Attachment 4 – Technical Specifications

Cook Islands Investment Corporation

SPECIFICATION of work to be done and materials to be used in carrying out the

works shown on the accompanying drawings

Apii Nikao Temporary Classrooms

Project Specification Nikao, Rarotonga, Cook Islands

Project Ref: C43/16

TENDER ISSUE

Specification built using masterspec software Masterspec ID: 122022

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1013 DOCUMENT CONTROL ...................................................................................................... 3 1220 PROJECT ............................................................................................................................ 4 1232 INTERPRETATION & DEFINITIONS .................................................................................. 6 1237 WARRANTIES ..................................................................................................................... 8 1238 AS BUILT DOCUMENTATION ..........................................................................................11 1250 TEMPORARY WORKS & SERVICES ...............................................................................13 1260 PROJECT MANAGEMENT ...............................................................................................15 1270 CONSTRUCTION ..............................................................................................................17 2241 EXCAVATION ....................................................................................................................22 2322 CONCRETE PILE FOUNDATIONS ...................................................................................26 2323 TIMBER PILE FOUNDATIONS .........................................................................................28 3102 CONCRETE WORK - STANDARD ....................................................................................32 3821 TIMBER FRAMING ............................................................................................................39 4161T THERMAKRAFT UNDERLAYS, FOILS & DPC ................................................................46 4171HR JAMES HARDIE RIGID AIR BARRIERS ...........................................................................53 4231HF JAMES HARDIE FACADE PANEL CLADDING ................................................................57 4241D DIMOND PROFILED CLADDING ......................................................................................62 4311D DIMOND PROFILED METAL ROOFING ..........................................................................68 4383 TIMBER DECKING ............................................................................................................74 4521AE APL ALUMINIUM WINDOWS & DOORS - EDUCATION FACILITIES .............................77 4585WC WCS WINDOW & VENTILATION CONTROL SYSTEMS .................................................87 4611VE CSR VIRIDIAN EXTERIOR GLAZING...............................................................................92 4711 THERMAL INSULATION ...................................................................................................96 4711A AUTEX GREENSTUF® THERMAL INSULATION ..........................................................100 4811FS FOSROC SEALANTS ......................................................................................................104 4821 FLASHINGS .....................................................................................................................111 4924 STAINLESS STEEL METALWORK.................................................................................115 5111H JAMES HARDIE FIBRE CEMENT SHEET LININGS ......................................................120 5113G GIB® PLASTERBOARD LININGS ..................................................................................125 5122 PLYWOOD LININGS .......................................................................................................130 5431 PARTICLEBOARD FLOORS ...........................................................................................133 5438H JAMES HARDIE FIBRE CEMENT INTERIOR FLOORING ............................................137 5511 JOINERY & CABINETRY FIXTURES..............................................................................140 5571 TIMBER STAIRS..............................................................................................................144 6211J JACOBSEN WALL TILING ..............................................................................................146 6221J JACOBSEN FLOOR TILING ............................................................................................152 6512J JACOBSEN CARPET TILES ...........................................................................................158 6711W WATTYL TAUBMANS PAINTING EXTERIOR ................................................................161 6721W WATTYL TAUBMANS PAINTING INTERIOR .................................................................163 7112 RAINWATER STORAGE TANKS ....................................................................................167 7123 HOT & COLD WATER SYSTEM .....................................................................................171 7151 SANITARY FIXTURES, TAPWARE & ACCESSORIES ..................................................176 7411MA MARLEY RAINWATER DISPOSAL SYSTEMS ..............................................................180 7421 SANITARY SYSTEMS .....................................................................................................184 7701 ELECTRICAL BASIC .......................................................................................................188

© CIL Masterspec Aug 2016 DRAFT 1013 DOCUMENT CONTROL

1013 DOCUMENT CONTROL 1. DOCUMENT CONTROL Document Control 1.1 PREPARED BY

Company: Cook Islands Investment Corporation

Postal Address: P.O. Box 51

Street Address: Avarua

City: Rarotonga

Telephone: 23139

Email: [email protected]

1.2 DOCUMENT DETAILS

Project Name: Apii Nikao Temporary Classrooms

Project Number:

File Reference:

Client: Ministry of Education Cook Islands / Cook Islands Investment Corporation

Client Contact:

Version: 1.01

1.3 REVISION CONTROL

Issue: Outline / Developed Design / Building Consent / Construction / As Built

Revision: -

Amendment Details:

Issued to: Tenderers

Date of Issue:

Reviewed by:

Approved by:

1.4 AUDIT CONTROL

Date:

Author:

Approved by:

© CIL Masterspec Aug 2016 DRAFT 1220 PROJECT

1220 PROJECT 1. GENERAL This general section describes the project including: - A description of the work - Site description, features and restrictions - Design parameters for design by contractor - Archaeological discovery 1.1 READ ALL SECTIONS TOGETHER Read all general sections together with all other sections. Description of the work 1.2 SCOPE OF THE WORK Construction of a building consisting of 2 classrooms and covered outdoor learning space

with boys and girls facilities suited to the senior students of a primary school level. The building shall be constructed in manner suited for transportation to another location.

1.3 NO RESTRICTED BUILDING WORK This project does not include Restricted Building Work. Health and Safety 1.4 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION SAFETY MATTERS The project has the following unusual or atypical features, which a reasonably

experienced contractor may not be aware of, that may present an unexpected hazard or risk during a typical construction process.

ITEM COMMENT

Primary School Environment

Contractor shall take all necessary steps to ensure student and teacher safety during the construction and defects liability period.

Student Safety Contractor shall conduct; be responsible and ensure that background checks are performed of all employees and sub-contractors to ensure student safety.

Provide particular health and safety procedures and methods to mitigate these hazards or

risks, and specifically include them as well as any other health and safety matters in the site Health and Safety Plan (refer to section 1260 PROJECT MANAGEMENT for Plan requirements).

Site 1.5 SITE The site consists of: Playground, playing field and existing school buildings. as shown on drawing no. A01 1.6 LEGAL DESCRIPTION The site of the works, the street address and the legal description are shown on the

drawings. 1.7 SITE FEATURES Green field site adjacent stormwater drain. Site environment - Wind 1.8 WIND DESIGN PARAMETERS - NON SPECIFIC DESIGN The design wind pressures are to NZS 3604, Table 5.4 Determination of wind zone, up to

and including Extra High Wind Zone. Building wind zone Extra High 55m/s (refer to NZS 3604, table 5.4)

http://www.masterspec.co.nz/redirect.aspx?pl=301


© CIL Masterspec Aug 2016 DRAFT 1220 PROJECT

Site environment - Durability 1.9 EXPOSURE ZONE The exposure zone is to NZS 3604, Section 4 Durability, 4.2 Exposure zones and NZBC

E2/AS1. The site zone is: Zone D classification Site environment - Seismic 1.10 EARTHQUAKE ZONE - NON SPECIFIC DESIGN The zone is to NZS 3604, Section 5 Bracing design, 5.3 Earthquake bracing demand. The earthquake zone is: Not Applicable Archaeological discovery 1.11 ANTIQUITIES AND ITEMS OF VALUE Report the finding of any fossils, antiquities and other items of value, to the Contract

Administrator. All to remain undisturbed until approval is given for removal.





© CIL Masterspec Aug 2016 DRAFT 1232 INTERPRETATION & DEFINITIONS

1232 INTERPRETATION & DEFINITIONS 1. GENERAL This general section relates to definitions and interpretation that are used in this

specification. Definitions 1.1 DEFINITIONS Required: Required by the documents, the New Zealand Building Code or by a

statutory authority. Proprietary: Identifiable by naming the manufacturer, supplier, installer, trade

name, brand name, catalogue or reference number. Provide and fix: "Provide" or "fix" or "supply" or "fix" if used separately mean provide

and fix unless explicitly stated otherwise. Review: Review by the contract administrator is for general compliance only.

Review does not remove the need for the contractor to comply with the stated requirements, details and specifications of the manufacturers and suppliers of individual components, materials and finishes. Neither can the review be construed as authorising departures from the contract documents.

Working day: Working day means a calendar day other than any Saturday, Sunday, public holiday or any day falling within the period from 24 December to 5 January, both days inclusive, irrespective of the days on which work is actually carried out.

Workplace: Workplace means the place where work is being carried out, or is customarily carried out, for a business or undertaking including any place where a worker goes, or is likely to be, while at work (under Health and Safety at Work Act 2015).

1.2 PERSONNEL Owner: The person defined as "owner" in the New Zealand Building Code. Principal: The person defined as "principal" in the conditions of contract. Contractor: The person contracted by the principal to carry out the contract. Contract administrator: The person appointed by the principal to administer the contract on

the principal's behalf. Where no person has been appointed by the Principal, it means the Principal or the Principal's representative.

1.3 ABBREVIATIONS The following abbreviations are used throughout the specification: AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association AS Australian Standard AS/NZS Joint Australian/New Zealand Standard ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials AWCINZ Association of Wall and Ceiling Industries of New Zealand Inc. BCA Building Consent Authority BRANZ Building Research Association of New Zealand BS British Standard COP Code of practice CSIRO Commonwealth Scientific and Industrial Research Organisation HERA Heavy Engineering Research Association LBP Licensed Building Practitioner MBIE Ministry of Business, Innovation and Employment MPNZA Master Painters New Zealand Association Inc NZBC New Zealand Building Code NZS New Zealand Standard NZS/AS Joint New Zealand/Australian Standard NZTA New Zealand Transport Agency NUO Network Utility Operator PCBU Person Conducting a Business or Undertaking (under Health and

Safety at Work Act 2015)




© CIL Masterspec Aug 2016 DRAFT 1232 INTERPRETATION & DEFINITIONS

OSH Occupational Safety and Health TA Territorial Authority TNZ Transit New Zealand(Transit New Zealand is now New Zealand

Transport Agency NZTA - some specifications are still prefixed TNZ) RBW Restricted Building Work SARNZ Scaffolding and Rigging New Zealand Inc SED Specific Engineering Design 1.4 DEFINED WORDS Words defined in the conditions of contract, New Zealand Standards, or other reference

documents, to have the same interpretation and meaning when used in their lower case, title case or upper case form in the specification text.

1.5 WORDS IMPORTING PLURAL AND SINGULAR Where the context requires, words importing singular only, also include plural and vice

versa.

© CIL Masterspec Aug 2016 DRAFT 1237 WARRANTIES

1237 WARRANTIES 1. GENERAL This general section refers to the requirements for warranties/guarantees as listed in this

section, as referred to within the body of this specification, and as referred to within separate specifications/documents relating to this project. It includes:

- Warranties for parts of the work required by the principal in a required form - Installer/applicator warranties for parts of the work in the installer's/applicator's standard

form - Manufacturer/supplier warranties provided with products, appliances and the like in the

manufacturer's/supplier's standard form - Guarantees provided by contractor in the contractor's standard form These guarantees/warranties are in addition to any warranties, implied warranties, or

guarantees that are required by the Building Act, the Building Regulations, or the building consent.

Warranties 1.1 PROVIDE WARRANTIES Provide executed warranties in favour of the principal in respect of, but not limited to,

materials, components, service, application, installation and finishing called for in that specified section of work. The terms and conditions of the warranty in no case negate the minimum remedies available under common law as if no warranty had been offered. Failure to provide the warranty does not reduce liability under the terms of the warranty called for in that specified section of work.

- Conform to the WARRANTY AGREEMENT form included in the specification/conditions

of contract. - Commence warranties from the date of practical completion of the contract works

(unless otherwise stated). - Maintain their effectiveness for the times stated. - Provide executed warranties prior to practical completion. 1.2 WARRANTIES - INSTALLER/APPLICATOR Where installer/applicator warranties are offered covering execution and materials of

proprietary products or complete installations, provide such warranties to the contract administrator. These warranties may be provided in lieu of the warranties that are otherwise required provided that these warranties are subject to similar conditions and periods.

Provide warranties in favour of the principal. The terms and conditions of such warranties

in no case negate the minimum remedies available under common law as if no warranty had been offered. Failure to provide the warranty does not reduce liability for execution and materials for that part of the work.

1.3 WARRANTIES - MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER Where warranties are offered covering materials, equipment, appliances or proprietary

products, provide all such warranties to the contract administrator. Provide warranties in favour of the principal. The terms and conditions of such warranties


Submission 1.4 REVIEW BY CONTRACTOR Obtain the warranties from the installers, applicators, manufacturers and suppliers at the

earliest possible date and review to ensure that they are correctly filled out and executed.


Where warranties are executed as a deed, ensure that a duplicate copy is provided for execution by the owner/principal. Keep safe and secure until required for submission.

1.5 WARRANTIES - REQUIRED BY BUILDING CONSENT AUTHORITY Obtain copies of warranties required as a condition of the building consent in the form

required for submission to the BCA. Keep safe and secure until required at the time of the BCA final inspection and Code Compliance Certificate.

1.6 WARRANTIES - REQUIRED BY CONTRACT Obtain copies of warranties listed in the contract documents. Provide all warranties at the

same time. If the project has an operations and maintenance documentation provision, present the warranties with the operations and maintenance information. If no operations and maintenance documentation provision exists, present the warranties to the contract administrator in a loose-leaf binder with a contents index suitably labelled and including the project name and details. Provide a title on the binder edge "Warranties for (project name)"

2. SELECTIONS Weathertightness and watertightness warranty 2.1 WEATHERTIGHTNESS AND WATERTIGHTNESS WARRANTY A warranty is required from the contractor for a minimum period of 2 years, covering the

weathertightness of the complete building envelope and the watertightness of all liquid supply and disposal systems and fittings. This general warranty is in addition to any specific warranties required.

Provide this warranty in favour of the principal. The terms and conditions of this warranty


- Conform to the standard form WARRANTY AGREEMENT included in the contract

documents. - Commence the warranty from the date of Practical Completion. - Maintain its effectiveness for the time stated. 3. SCHEDULES Schedule of work section warranties 3.1 SCHEDULE OF WORK SECTION WARRANTIES The following work sections have warranty and guarantee requirements, refer to these

sections for details:

4161T Thermakraft Underlays, Foils & DPC 4171HR James Hardie Rigid Air Barriers 4231HF James Hardie Facade Panel Cladding 4241D Dimond Profiled Cladding 4311D Dimond Profiled Metal Roofing 4521AE APL Aluminium Windows & Doors-Education Facilities 4585WC WCS Window & Ventilation Control Systems 4611VE CSR Viridian Exterior Glazing 4711A Autex Greenstuf Thermal Insulation 4811FS Fosroc Sealants 5111H James Hardie Fibre cement sheet linings 5438H James Hardie Fibre cement interior flooring 5811 Signs & Displays 6211J Jacobsen Wall tiling 6221J Jacobsen Floor tiling 6512J Jacobsen Carpet tiles 6612J Jacobsen Entrance Matting Systems 7123 Hot & Cold Water System


7311 Fire Hose Systems 7411MA Marley Rainwater Disposal Systems 7701 Electrical Basic

© CIL Masterspec Aug 2016 DRAFT 1238 AS BUILT DOCUMENTATION

1238 AS BUILT DOCUMENTATION 1. GENERAL This general section relates to common requirements for the preparation, submission and

review of as built documentation as listed in this section, as referred to within the body of this specification, and as referred to within separate specifications/documents relating to this project. Detailed requirements for as built documentation for particular parts of the work may be included in specific work sections.

1.1 AS BUILT DOCUMENT REQUIREMENTS Where requirements for the as built documents and records are not stated in a specific

section, they shall include: As built drawings recording: - The actual positions as constructed of all sewer, stormwater, sanitary plumbing, piped

and ducted services, electrical and mechanical services. - Inverts and locations of services at key points within the building and at the property

lines. - Dimension services in relation to the structure and building grid lines. - Ductwork, piping, conduit and equipment, including such items provided for future use. - Depth of various elements of foundations in relationship to the ground floor level - Field changes of dimensions - Other significant deviations and changes which are concealed in construction and

cannot be identified by visual inspection - Access doors and panels Records of: - Products and materials selected for alternatives specified - Approved substitutions and accepted alternatives - Other approved changes and deviations to items specified. 1.2 PROVISIONAL AS BUILT DOCUMENTS Prior to practical completion provide provisional/draft as built documents in sufficient

detail to allow the principal to operate, maintain, adjust and re-assemble the contract works and to allow for review by the reviewer. Where no named reviewer has been nominated, submit the as built documentation to the contract administrator. Submit in hard copy and electronic form.

1.3 AS BUILT DOCUMENT REVIEW As built document review indicates only that the reviewer is satisfied that the documents

are legible. The review is not a check of the accuracy or completeness of the documents, however the reviewer may comment on any aspect of the documentation and require the documents to be revised and resubmitted. Review of as built documents does not relieve the contractor of responsibility for their correctness.

Where no time is stated in a specific section, allow 10 working days for review by the reviewer. Where a large amount of documentation is involved more time will be necessary.

1.4 COMPLETE AS BUILT DOCUMENTS Prior to the end of the defects notification/liability period, provide complete as built

documents reflecting any review requirements, with all Information of good quality and properly titled, numbered, cross-referenced and dated. Provide documents in sufficient detail to allow the principal to operate, maintain, adjust and re-assemble the contract works. Submit in hard copy and electronic form to the contract administrator.

1.5 AS BUILT DOCUMENTS - ELECTRONIC COPY Provide an electronic copy of the as built documents in the following format: Drawings: PDF format (in addition provide DWG files if available) Other documents: PDF format

© CIL Masterspec Aug 2016 DRAFT 1238 AS BUILT DOCUMENTATION

2. SCHEDULES Schedule of as built documents 2.1 SCHEDULE OF AS BUILT DOCUMENTS The following work sections have as built requirements, refer to these sections for details:

4585WC WCS Window & Ventilation Control Systems Schedule of additional items 2.2 SCHEDULE OF ADDITIONAL ITEMS The following documents have as built requirements, refer to these documents for details: - Electrical - Plumbing

© CIL Masterspec Aug 2016 DRAFT 1250 TEMPORARY WORKS & SERVICES

1250 TEMPORARY WORKS & SERVICES 1. GENERAL This general section relates to temporary works and services required for the construction

of the contract works. It includes - Temporary works and services including temporary fencing and hoardings - Scaffolding and shoring - General care and protection Temporary works 1.1 COMPLY WITH NEW ZEALAND BUILDING CODE Refer to New Zealand Building Code clauses and approved document paragraphs for the

criteria and/or methods that must be used in this section to establish compliance with the code.

1.2 COSTS RELATING TO TEMPORARY WORKS Pay all rates/fees in respect of temporary works. 1.3 MAINTENANCE OF TEMPORARY WORKS Maintain alter, adapt and move temporary works and services as necessary. Clear away

when no longer required and make good. 1.4 SAFEGUARD THE SITE, THE WORKS AND MATERIALS Take all precautions to prevent unauthorised access, including access outside working

hours, to the site, the works and adjoining property. Safeguard the site, the works, materials and plant from damage and theft.

1.5 SITE FENCING Provide and maintain a site fence, 2 metres high from ground level on the side accessible

to the public. Construct to comply with NZBC F5/AS1 Construction and demolition hazards. Construct as required for public areas and as shown on the drawings.

Construct the fence with: - galvanized chain link netting with a 50mm x 50mm maximum grid size - posts at 2.5 metre centres maximum - gap at the bottom of the fence no greater than 100mm 1.7 SITE FENCING - NON-PUBLIC AREAS Provide and maintain a 1 metre high site fence to non-public areas. Construct using: - warratah stakes at 1.5 metre centres fitted with safety caps - plastic safety mesh 1.11 WATER Provide clean, fresh water for the works and make arrangements for distributing about

the site. 1.12 ELECTRICITY To AS/NZS 3012. Nominate the person to install and be responsible for the complete temporary electrical

installation. The name and designation of the person responsible is to be displayed prominently and close to the main switch or circuit breaker.

Inspect and overhaul the installation at such intervals as are prescribed by the network

utility operator but not exceeding three monthly intervals. 1.16 MAKE GOOD EXISTING SERVICES Make good all damage to existing roads, footpaths, grounds, sewers or other services,

caused in carrying out the contract works. 1.19 SPECIAL SITE CLEANING Ensure field and playground are free of any debris from construction.



© CIL Masterspec Aug 2016 DRAFT 1250 TEMPORARY WORKS & SERVICES

1.20 CONSTRUCTION KEYING AND SECURITY Provide locksets with temporary keying, or install with the cylinders removed. 1.21 TEMPORARY STORAGE Provide temporary storage areas and protective covers and screens. Fillet stack and

protect all framing and structural members from moisture and contamination. Completely protect finishing materials from the weather and damage and store in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements. Protect fabricated elements from the weather and damage, and store in accordance with suppliers' requirements.

1.23 PERIODIC RUBBISH REMOVAL Maintain on site appropriate means for the storage and removal of construction waste

material. Where required or appropriate provide for the separate storage of recyclable waste and other materials requiring special disposal.

Special protection 1.24 SPECIAL PROTECTION Protect adjacent playground from site works

© CIL Masterspec Aug 2016 DRAFT 1260 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

1260 PROJECT MANAGEMENT 1. GENERAL This general section relates to project management requirements including: - Meetings - Cost control - Communicating and recording - Programming - Health and safety Site Meetings 1.1 SITE MEETINGS Meetings to normally be held: Fortnightly The following persons to attend: - Principal/Client representative - Engineer to Contract - Contractors representative - Contractors Site Supervisor - Services consultants when needed - Subcontractors when needed (contractor to inform them). Meeting place: Project site Time: 10AM Day: Wednesdays 1.2 SITE MEETING MINUTES The contract administrator is to keep full minutes of all site meetings and arrange

distribution to all those involved within 3 working days. The minutes are to record - Documentation and information issued and required - Directions and variations issued - Confirmation of contract insurances - Programme - General business - Site health and safety - Payment claim processing including costing variations 1.16 WORKING HOURS Work on site is not restricted. Comply with territorial authority consent conditions and

noise and nuisance controls. Health and safety 1.18 HEALTH AND SAFETY REGULATIONS, CODES AND GUIDES Comply with: - Health and Safety at Work (General Risk and Workplace Management) Regulations

2016, also Health and Safety in Employment Regulations 1995 as amended by that Regulation.

- Relevant codes of practice, guides, guidelines and standards. 1.19 HEALTH AND SAFETY IMPLEMENTATION Take all practical steps to make the site and the contract works safe and to provide and

maintain a safe working environment. Ensure that all those working on or visiting the site are aware of the rules governing site safety, are properly supervised and are not unnecessarily exposed to hazards and risks.

© CIL Masterspec Aug 2016 DRAFT 1260 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

Co-operate, consult and co-ordinate health and safety matters with each PCBU including all subcontractors, suppliers, separate contractors, others engaged on the project and others who may be affected by the construction of the works.

Identify any significant hazards and risks. Maintain proper procedures for dealing with any emergencies that may arise.

Immediately investigate accidents, identify their cause and maintain a register of accidents and serious harm. Provide a copy of any report which the contractor is required to make to a public authority on any accident which is associated with carrying out the contract works and results in serious harm to any person.

Refer to individual work sections for detailed requirements on this project. 1.20 SUSPENSION OF HAZARDOUS WORK On the request of the contract administrator, acting on reasonable grounds, suspend any

identified hazardous activities and proceed to eliminate, isolate or minimise them in order to comply with the Act, without prejudice to any other rights of the principal under the contract.

1.21 SITE SAFETY PERSON Appoint a suitably qualified site safety person to co-ordinate site safety and to attend all

site meetings. 1.23 MAINTAIN HEALTH AND SAFETY PLAN Maintain health and safety plan and alter to accommodate changing situations and /or

substitutions. Advise contract administrator of changes. 1.24 COMPLY WITH SITE SAFETY PLAN Carry out all construction operations in accordance with the submitted health and safety

plan. 1.25 INFORM WORKERS OF HAZARDS AND RISKS Inform workers and others on the site of: - hazards and risks they may be exposed to while working or other legitimate activities - hazards and risks they may create while working which could harm others - how these hazards and risks may be minimised - emergency procedures - the location of first aid facilities and safety equipment. 1.27 POWDER-ACTUATED FASTENING TOOLS Powder-actuated fastening tools to be used only by workers holding current certificates of

competence in their name, issued under the requirements of the Health and Safety in Employment Regulations 1995.

1.28 SMOKE FREE REQUIREMENTS Do not smoke on site except in a designated determined by the contractor with the

agreement of the contract administrator. 1.29 RESTRICTIONS Do not: - light rubbish fires on the site - bring dogs on to or near the site - bring radios/audio players on to the site.

© CIL Masterspec Aug 2016 DRAFT 1270 CONSTRUCTION

1270 CONSTRUCTION 1. GENERAL This GENERAL section relates to common requirements for construction issues

including: - - Quality assurance - Noise and nuisance - Set out - Common execution requirements - Common materials requirements - Supply of spare materials - Common requirements for samples and tests - Final presentation and cleaning - Commissioning Quality control and assurance 1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE Carry out and record regular checks of material quality and accuracy, including: - Concrete quality and finish. - Dimensional accuracy of structural column locations (following completion of

foundations). - All perimeter columns and frames for plumb. - Levels of all floors relative to the site datum. - Framing timber moisture content. Where any material, quality or dimension falls outside specified or required tolerances,

obtain written direction from the contract administrator. Where building consent approval is affected, confirm remedial action with the Building Consent Authority.

Provide all materials, plant, attendances, supervision, inspections and programming to

ensure the required quality standards are met by all project personnel. Noise and nuisance 1.2 LIMIT CONSTRUCTION NOISE Minimise the effects of noise generation by including in the planning of the work such

factors as placing of plant, programming the sequence of operations and other management functions. Limit construction noise to comply with the requirements of NZS 6803, the requirements of the Resource Management Act sections 326, 327 and 328 and the Health and Safety in Employment Regulations clause 11.

1.3 ACCEPTABLE NOISE LEVELS Refer to NZS 6803 Tables 2 and NZS 6803, tables 3 for the upper limits of construction

work noise in residential and industrial areas over the various time periods, particularly 0730 to 1800 hours. Note also the allowed adjustments and exemptions in NZS 6803, 6. Do not exceed these limits.

1.4 PROVIDE INFORMATION TO NEIGHBOURS Provide information to neighbours of any noise generation from the site liable to

constitute a problem. Explain to them the means being used to minimise excessive noise and establish with them the timings most suitable for the noise generating work to be carried on.

Discuss with any complainant the measures being used to minimise noise. Where

possible modify these measures to accommodate particular circumstances. Finally, determine the sound level at the location under discussion using methods and observation reporting as laid down in NZS 6803. If the noise level is above the upper limits of NZS 6803, tables 2 and NZS 6803, tables 3, cease the noise generating operation and remedy the problem.










1.5 ADDITIONAL NOISE CONSTRAINTS As well as complying with the preceding clauses comply with the following on this

contract: During school operation ensure any construction noises such as mechanical saw cutting should be away from the building and the opposite side of the school hall.

1.6 DIRT AND DROPPINGS Remove dirt and droppings deposited on public or private thoroughfares from vehicles

servicing the site to the satisfaction of the appropriate authorities and the contract administrator.

1.7 DAMAGE AND NUISANCE Take all precautions to prevent damage and nuisance from water, fire, smoke, dust,

rubbish and all other causes resulting from the construction works. Set-out and tolerances 1.8 SURVEY INFORMATION Locate and verify survey marks and datum points required to set out the works. Record

and maintain their position. Re-establish and replace disturbed or obliterated marks. 1.9 SET-OUT AND DATUM Set out the work to conform with the drawings. Establish a permanent site datum to

confirm the proposed building ground floor level and its relationship to all other existing and new building levels.

1.10 SET-OUT BY LICENSED CADASTRAL SURVEYOR Before commencing construction provide the contract administrator with a certificate

prepared by a licensed cadastral surveyor that the set-out is complete and that the building is accurately placed on the site.

During construction provide the contract administrator with a certificate, prepared by the

same licensed cadastral surveyor confirming the set-out of the foundations and grid lines. Necessary adjustments are to be determined and agreed to by the contract administrator before proceeding further.

1.11 CONFIRM HEIGHT IN RELATION TO BOUNDARY Clause deleted. 1.12 USE OF SET-OUT INSTRUMENTS Permit without charge, the use of instruments already on site for checking, setting out and

levels. 1.13 CHECK DIMENSIONS Check all dimensions both on drawings and site, particularly the correlation between

components and work in place. Take all dimensions on drawings to be between structural elements before linings or finishes, unless clearly stated otherwise.

1.14 TOLERANCES All work to be level, plumb, and true to line and face. Unless otherwise specified in

specific work sections of this specification, tolerances for structural work shall comply with the following:

Concrete construction:

To NZS 3109 Concrete construction Clause 3.9 Tolerances for reinforcement Table 5.1 Tolerance for precast components Table 5.2 Tolerance for in situ construction To NZS 3114 Concrete surface finishes

Masonry construction: To NZS 4210 Masonry construction: Materials and workmanship Clause 2.6.5 Tolerances Table 2.2 Maximum tolerances





Structural steelwork: To NZS 3404:1997 Steel structures standard Section 14.4 Tolerances (after fabrication) Section 15.3 Tolerances (erection)

Timber framing: To NZS 3604 Timber-framed buildings Clause 2.2 Tolerances Table 2.1 Timber framing tolerances

Refer to work sections for tolerance requirements for finishes. Execution 1.15 EXAMINE PREVIOUS WORK Before commencing any part of the work carefully examine the previous work on which it

may depend. Report in writing to the contract administrator defects that may affect the quality of the proposed work and obtain instructions. Commencing work on any part means that previous work is accepted as being satisfactory for work of the required standard.

1.16 WORKER QUALIFICATIONS All work to be level, plumb, and true to line and face. Employ only experienced workers

familiar with the materials and techniques specified. 1.17 MINIMISE DELAYS DUE TO WEATHER Use appropriate techniques and methods to prevent damage and minimise delays due to

weather. Materials 1.18 NEW PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS Materials and products to be new unless stated otherwise, of the specified standard, and

complying with all cited documents. 1.19 COMPATIBILITY OF MATERIALS AND FINISHES Ensure all parts of a construction or finish are compatible and their individual use

approved by the manufacturers and suppliers of other parts of the system. Source all parts of a system from a single manufacturer or supplier.

1.20 STORING PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS Take delivery of and store products, materials and components in accordance with codes

of practice and the product manufacturer's or supplier's stated requirements. Maintain the proper condition of any protective packaging, wrappings or supports during delivery, unloading and storage.

1.21 HANDLING PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS Handle products, materials and components in accordance with codes of practice and the

manufacturer's or supplier's stated guidelines. Avoid distortion and any contact with potentially damaging surfaces or conditions.

1.22 SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS Ensure substrate conditions are within the manufacturer's or supplier's stated guidelines

both before and during the installation of any material, product or system. Obtain written instructions on the necessary action to rectify unsatisfactory conditions.

1.23 INSTALLING PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS Install in accordance with the manufacturer's or supplier's technical literature. Ensure that

all installers are familiar with the required substrate conditions and the manufacturer's or supplier's specified preparation, fixing and finishing techniques.

1.24 COMPLY WITH STANDARDS Comply with the relevant and/or cited Standard for any material or component. Obtain

certificates of compliance when requested by the contract administrator.




1.25 CONDITION OF MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS To be in perfect condition when incorporated into the work. 1.26 INCOMPATIBLE MATERIALS AND METALS Separate incompatible materials and metals with separation layers, sleeves or gaskets of

plastic film, bituminous felt or mastic or paint coatings, installed so that none are visible on exposed surfaces.

Samples and tests 1.27 SAMPLES AND PROTOTYPES Where specified in the work sections, submit samples, prepare sample panels, and

construct prototypes for review as to appearance, form and conformance with the drawings and specifications. Submit all information required to assist the review process, including technical data, manufacturer's literature, independent appraisals and producer statements.

Timing for the provision and review of samples, sample panels and prototypes to be

included in the contract programme. Allow a minimum of 10 working days for each review. Proceed only after instructions to proceed have been issued in writing by the contract administrator.

In situ work may be incorporated in the finished work if so confirmed, otherwise allow to

remove completely and replace. 1.28 CONTROL STANDARD Obtain the contract administrator's confirmation of material, component and work

samples which then become the quality control standard. Remove from the site any rejected samples. Retain confirmed samples with care on site for comparison throughout the contract. Remove from the site when no longer required.

Spares 1.29 SPARES Collect, protect and store safely all spare materials required under the contract. Give the

contract administrator an inventory of all spares. Final presentation and cleaning 1.30 REMOVE TEMPORARY PROTECTION Remove all temporary markings, coverings, labels and protective wrappings unless

instructed otherwise. 1.31 REPLACE DAMAGED MATERIALS Replace all materials or component damaged during the works to the standard of and

integral with the original. 1.32 COMPLETE ALL SERVICES Ensure all services are complete and operational, with all temporary labelling removed,

required labelling fixed and service instructions provided. 1.33 CLEANING BY CONTRACTOR Clear the contract works of all construction materials, waste, dirt and debris. Clean the

contract works including: - Wipe all surfaces to remove construction dust - Clean out service ducts and accessible concealed spaces - Clean out all gutters and rainwater heads - Wipe dust from both sides of glass. Take particular care when removing paint or

cementitious materials to not damage the glass. - Remove adhesive residue left by labels and other temporary protection/markings - Clean out the interior of all cabinetry


- Wash down external concrete including driveways and concrete masonry. Take care when waterblasting to not cause damage to the surface or allow water to enter the building.

- Remove rubbish and building material from the area immediately adjacent to the contract works

1.34 CLEANING BY COMMERCIAL CLEANER Use a commercial cleaning firm to clean the whole of the interior of the building, including

all appliances, equipment, fittings, surfaces and finishes to leave it without any blemish. Cleaning to include:

- Clean and wash down all external surfaces to remove dirt, debris and marking. - Clean all interior surfaces including cabinetwork, joinery, sanitary and hardware items. - Vacuum or polish all floor finishes. - Clean and polish all glass, both sides. Commissioning 1.35 MOVING PARTS Adjust, ease and lubricate all doors, windows, drawers, hardware, appliances, controls

and all moving parts to give easy and efficient operation. 1.36 TESTS AND CERTIFICATION hydraulics and plumbing 1.37 SECURITY AT COMPLETION Remove any temporary lock cylinders and complete final keying prior to handing over

keys to the principal on completion of the works. Leave the works secure with all accesses locked. Account for all keys/cards/codes and hand to the principal along with an itemised schedule, retaining a duplicate schedule signed by the principal as a receipt.

© CIL Masterspec Aug 2016 DRAFT 2241 EXCAVATION

2241 EXCAVATION 1. GENERAL This section relates to the excavating required for the building works, removing surface

soils and the disposal of excavated material. Related work 1.1 RELATED SECTIONS Refer to 2322 CONCRETE PILE FOUNDATIONS for foundations. Refer to 1256 WASTE MANAGEMENT for surplus earth removal. Documents 1.2 DOCUMENTS REFERRED TO Documents referred to in this section are: NZS 4402 Methods of testing soils for civil engineering purposes WorkSafe NZ Approved code of practice for safety in excavation and shafts for

foundations Documents listed above and cited in the clauses that follow are part of this specification.

However, this specification takes precedence in the event of it being at variance with the cited document.

Requirements 1.3 ARCHAEOLOGICAL DISCOVERY If fossils, antiquities and other items of value are found refer to the general section 1220

PROJECT for actions to be taken with archaeological discovery. Performance 1.4 ACCESS FOR MACHINES Determine working conditions and access for machines. Take into account the time of

year, the nature of the ground and subsoil to be excavated, the ground water table and all matters influencing the carrying out of the work.

1.5 SAFE WORKING CONDITIONS Provide safe working conditions and adequate support to excavations at all times. Cover

holes and fence off trenches and banks. 1.6 FOUNDATION BEARING Request written instructions if a natural bearing is: - reached at a lesser depth or - not reached at the depth shown on the drawings. In made-up ground excavate down to a natural bearing. Remove unsuitable material that

is exposed and replace with compacted backfill. 1.7 INSPECTION Arrange for inspections and before placing any new work. If bearing becomes

inadequate due to any cause then stop work and request further instructions. 1.8 SITE MEASUREMENT, OTHER FORMATIONS If for any reason the excavations have to vary from the drawings, those affected to be

solid measured and the quantity recorded and agreed to in writing as the excavation proceeds.

2. PRODUCTS Materials





2.1 TOPSOIL Weathered soil, with organic inclusions capable of supporting the growth of vegetation. 2.2 CUT MATERIAL Consisting of sands, gravels, sedimentary materials, clays, scoria and similar deposits. 2.3 ROCK Defined as material encountered in excavations which because of its size or position can

be removed only by breaking up by explosives or mechanical plant such as jack hammers or percussion drills.

2.4 UNCONTROLLED FILL Variable fill material placed with little or no compaction control. 2.5 EXCAVATED FILL Material from other formations in the excavation which may be selected and approved as

suitable for filling and complying with NZS 4402 by having grading and moisture content properties that will allow compaction to 95% of maximum density.

3. EXECUTION Conditions 3.1 REPORT Report any survey pegs, bench marks, and the like on any features, leaving them

undisturbed until approval is given for removal. 3.2 RETAINED FEATURES Refer to SELECTIONS/drawings for those features to be retained. Mark out those

features to be retained with 1 metre high 50mm x 50mm timber stakes with yellow plastic tape between, to eliminate accidental damage.

3.3 COMPLY Comply with the requirements of the WorkSafe NZ publication: Approved code of practice

for safety in excavation and shafts for foundations. 3.4 WORK BY OTHERS Before taking over work done on the site by others check all levels and conditions and

report any discrepancies affecting further work. 3.5 EXISTING SERVICES AND FOUNDATIONS Locate underground services and foundations before work is started. Any information

provided regarding the location of these services and foundations is given from available records but with no guarantee of accuracy as regards alignment or depth. Furthermore no guarantee is given or implied that the information provided covers all existing services and foundations. Make good at no extra cost damage to existing services to the satisfaction of the appropriate network utility operator. Protect existing roads, footpaths, gutters, crossings etc from damage during work.

3.6 EXCAVATION NEAR TREES Do not excavate or remove topsoil within the drip line of retained trees unless specifically

directed. If excavation is directed, use hand methods, taking care to avoid damage to roots. Do not cut roots greater than 50mm diameter. Do not stockpile spoil against tree trunks or beneath the drip line of retained trees. Report any damage to tree boles or branches, with necessary remedial work by an approved tree surgeon.

3.7 KEEP FREE OF WATER Keep excavations free from water and keep water from excavations clear of other

construction work.





3.8 TERRITORIAL AUTHORITY REQUIREMENTS Obtain from the territorial authority requirements for the method of discharging water from

the site. 3.9 FORM SUMPS Form sumps outside the line of foundations and deep enough to drain excavations.

Pump from sumps without disturbing excavations or any material in place. 3.10 SILT CONTROL Undertake silt control measures required by territorial authorities and network utility

operators in relation to design, location and discharge into the drainage system. Application 3.11 STRIP TOPSOIL Strip topsoil carefully over the whole site and stockpile where directed on the site, on the

prepared subgrade, for re-spreading at the completion of the contract. 3.12 STRIP TO SUBGRADE Strip the soil over the whole site to form a subgrade generally, but at a minimum of

200mm below the original ground level. Leave the subgrade level, clear of all loose material and with no impediment for the excavation work.

3.13 DIVERT WATERWAYS Temporarily divert as necessary all ditches, field drains and other waterways encountered

during the excavations and reinstate to approval on completion. 3.14 DIVERT DRAINS AND SERVICE LINES Divert services, drains and field drains encountered in the excavations to new routes

clear of the building and reconnect to the requirements of the network utility operator. 3.15 BREAK OUT Break out and remove old foundations, floor slabs, drains, manholes and septic tanks,

seal up connections and remove contaminated soil. Grub out roots in excess of 75mm diameter to a minimum of 500mm below the bottom level of footings or paving. Backfill with selected excavated material, well rammed in layers.

Take special care when working close to retained trees and shrubs. 3.16 EXCAVATION GENERALLY Excavate for pads, strip foundations and tie beams to the profiles and levels shown on

the drawings. Allow clearance for working space and formwork as necessary. Trim to required profiles, falls and levels. If pouring against natural ground excavate an extra 25mm that side to provide 75mm minimum cover to reinforcement horizontally. Bench surface of sloping ground to receive filling.

3.17 OVER EXCAVATION Make good with well compacted backfill. 3.18 EXCAVATED BACKFILL Stockpile selected excavated backfill on site where directed so that it does not impede

continuing works until it is required. Finishing 3.19 BATTERS, TEMPORARY PROTECTION Protect batters with a change of level between crest and toe of more than 1.5 metres

from weather erosion with a waterproof covering of either hessian and tar, or heavy duty black polythene sheet. Seal at joints and securely fix down at crest and toe. Maintain coverings in good condition until the ground is secured by permanent construction.

Completion


3.20 LEAVE Leave work to the standard required by following procedures. 3.21 SURPLUS TOPSOIL Remove unwanted stripped soil from the site continually as the work proceeds. Clean up

continually any soil if dropped on footpaths or roads. 3.22 SURPLUS MATERIAL Remove surplus excavated material from the site continually as the excavation proceeds.

Clean up continually any excavated material dropped on footpaths or roads. 4. SELECTIONS 4.1 RETAINED FEATURES Clause deleted.

© CIL Masterspec Aug 2016 DRAFT 2322 CONCRETE PILE FOUNDATIONS

2322 CONCRETE PILE FOUNDATIONS 1. GENERAL This section relates to precast and in situ concrete pile foundations supporting timber

framed floor construction not requiring specific design. 1.1 RELATED WORK Refer to the Following: - 2241 EXCAVATION for excavation work. - 3821 TIMBER FRAMING for Timber framing over. - 4161T THERMAKRAFT UNDERLAYS, FOILS & DPC for damp proof membrane

between timber and concrete. Documents 1.2 DOCUMENTS REFERRED TO Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The following

documents are specifically referred to in this section: NZBC B1/VM4 Structure NZS 3101.1&2 Concrete structures standard NZS 3109 Concrete construction NZS 3604 Timber-framed buildings 1.3 MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER DOCUMENTS The Contractor shall take all necessary steps to inform themselves of the manufacturer's

documents and specifications and ensure that they are up to date. Requirements 1.4 CO-ORDINATION Refer to all drawings and calculations to ensure details and fixings required are provided

for in the installation of the piles and bracing work. 1.5 DESIGN AND INSTALLATION Design and installation of piling system to comply with NZS 3604.Section 6 Foundations

and subfloor framing, and to NZBC B1/VM4, Structure Foundations, 5.1 Concrete piles.

2. PRODUCTS Materials - piles within the scope of NZS3604 2.1 CONCRETE PILES, PRE-CAST To NZS 3604 6.4.3 Materials for piles. Cast from minimum of 17.5 MPa ordinary grade

concrete to NZS 3109, reinforced with D10 for piles over 750mm high. 2.2 CONCRETE FOOTINGS For footings minimum of 17.5 MPa ordinary grade concrete to NZS 3109, and NZS 3604,

section 6.4.5, Pile footings. 3. EXECUTION Conditions 3.1 GENERALLY Comply with NZS 3604 except as varied by contract documents. Execution to include

those methods, practices and processes contained in the unit standards for the National Certificate in Carpentry.

3.2 PILE FOOTING Excavate for each pile and provided a concrete footing to NZS 3604 6.4.5, Pile footings.













© CIL Masterspec Aug 2016 DRAFT 2322 CONCRETE PILE FOUNDATIONS

Application 3.3 INSTALL CONCRETE PILES, PRECAST Pour concrete footing and set in pre-cast concrete piles to NZS 3604 6.4.5, Pile

footings. 3.4 LOADING Do not fully load concrete piles until the concrete footings have cured for a minimum of 7

days. Completion 3.5 LEAVE Leave work to the standard required by following procedures. 4. SELECTIONS


© CIL Masterspec Aug 2016 DRAFT 2323 TIMBER PILE FOUNDATIONS

2323 TIMBER PILE FOUNDATIONS 1. GENERAL This section relates to timber pile foundations and subfloor bracing supporting timber

framed floor construction. 1.1 RELATED SECTIONS Refer to 3821 TIMBER FRAMING for timber framing. Documents 1.2 DOCUMENTS Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The following

documents are specifically referred to in this section: NZBC B1/VM4 Structure Foundations NZS 3109 Concrete construction NZS 3602 Timber and wood-based products for use in building NZS 3603 Timber structures standard NZS 3604 Timber-framed buildings NZS 3605 Timber piles and poles for use in buildings NZS 3640 Chemical preservation of round and sawn timber 1.3 MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER DOCUMENTS The Contractor shall adhere to all manufacturer's documents and specifications and

ensure all documents and specifications are current and up to to date. Requirements 1.4 CO-ORDINATION Refer to all drawings and calculations to ensure details and fixings required are provided

for in the installation of the piles and bracing work structure. 1.5 DESIGN AND INSTALLATION Design and installation of piling system to comply with NZS 3604.section 6,

Foundationsand subfloor framing, and to NZBC B1/VM4, Structure Foundations, 5.3 Timber piles.

Performance 1.6 COMPLIANCE, VISUAL GRADING AND PROOF TESTING The pile structure to comply with NZS 3605. - Ordinary piles are branded with a triangle brand. - Anchor piles for residential piles to be visually branded "A". - Construction piles and poles that require a high performance to be branded 'H" for "high

category". 1.7 PROOF OF PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT Provide evidence that the piles and poles have been treated to NZS 3640, H5 CCA

(preservative code 01 or 02) 2. PRODUCTS Materials 2.1 TIMBER PILES, ROUND Radiata pine, treated H5 CCA (preservative code 01 or 02) to NZS 3602, table 1A to

design data assigned in NZS 3603, section 7 and complying with NZS 3605.4 Round or square house piles, for cross-section, length, straightness, grade, growth rings, durability, strength, and branding.
















2.2 TIMBER PILES, SQUARE Radiata pine, treated H5 CCA (preservative code 01 or 02) to NZS 3602, table 1A to

design data assigned in NZS 3603, section 7 and complying with NZS 3605.4 Round or square house piles, for cross-section, length, straightness, grade, growth rings, durability, strength, and branding.

2.3 TIMBER PILE BRACING Species, grade, moisture content in service and level of treatment to NZS 3602, tables 1B

and 1C and grading to NZS 3603. Components 2.4 CONCRETE For pile footings 17.5 MPa ordinary grade concrete to NZS 3109, and NZS 3604, section

6.4.5, Pile footings. 2.5 NAILS / WIRE DOGS Stainless steel and or hot dipped galvanized steel to NZS 3604, clause 6.5.2b, Fixings

and section 4, Durability, clause 4.4, Steel fixings and fastenings and table 4.3, Steel items such as nails and screws used for framing and cladding.

2.6 BOLTS AND SCREWS Stainless steel and or hot dipped galvanized steel to NZS 3604, Section 4 Durability,

clause 4.4 Steel fixings and fastenings. 2.7 NAIL PLATES Hot dipped galvanized steel toothed or nailed steel plates to NZS 3604, Section 4

Durability, clause 4.4 Steel fixings and fastenings, to the manufacturer's design for the particular locations shown on the drawings.

2.8 PROPRIETARY CONNECTORS Stainless steel, hot dipped galvanized steel or epoxy coated hot dipped galvanized steel

to the manufacturer's design for the particular locations shown on the drawings. 2.9 CORROSION RISKS For exterior timber, timber in damp areas and timber subject to occasional wetting, use

only stainless steel (or equivalent) fixings and connectors, when the timber is treated with; Copper Azole (CuAz, Preservative code 58), Alkaline Copper Quaternary (ACQ, Preservative code 90), Micronise Copper Azole (code 88) or Micronised Copper Quaternary (code 89).

3. EXECUTION Conditions 3.1 GENERALLY Comply with NZS 3602 and NZS 3604 except as varied by this specification. Execution

to include those methods, practices and processes contained in the unit standards for the National Certificate in Carpentry.

3.2 EXCAVATION Comply with NZS 3604 section 3, Site requirements, and section 6, Foundations and

subfloor framing. Excavate for pile footings as detailed on the drawings. Application - Driven piles 3.3 DRIVING EQUIPMENT Drive piles with equipment of sufficient capacity for the pile weight. Protect the pile head

with a suitable cap and cushion. 3.4 SPLICING DRIVEN PILES Splicing of driven piles or poles is not allowed. Replace those that finish up too short.















3.5 INSTALL DRIVEN ROUND TIMBER PILES Prepare, drive and finally locate timber piles to NZS 3604, section 6.6, Driven timber

piles. Application - Placed piles 3.6 INSTALL ROUND TIMBER PILES Prepare, place, locate and secure to NZS 3604, section 6, Foundations and subfloor

framing, and as detailed on the drawings. Cast piles in concrete footing as detailed. 3.7 INSTALL SQUARE TIMBER PILES Prepare, place, locate and secure to NZS 3604, section 6, Foundations and subfloor

framing, and as detailed on the drawings. Cast piles in concrete footing as detailed. Application - General 3.8 NOTCHES AND HOLES Minimise notching and drilling of piles and poles within 300mm of the ground level. 3.9 TREAT CUTS Brush-treat timber piles and poles cut after treatment with preservative to NZS 3640

appendix B4. 3.10 PILE BRACING Brace piles to NZS 3604, clause 6.8, Braced pile systems. Refer to bracing plan for

location of braces and to drawings for bracing details. 3.11 SUB-FLOOR JACK STUDS Frame up off foundation walls and piles, all fabricated, fastened and braced to NZS 3604,

clause 6.10, Framed subfloor walls. Completion 3.12 LEAVE Leave work to the standard required by following procedures. 4. SELECTIONS 4.1 ORDINARY TIMBER PILES Brand/type: Approved "Triangle" branded Size: 125 x 125mm square or 140mm dia. round, minimum Treatment: H5 CCA (preservative code 01 or 02) 4.2 DRIVEN ROUND TIMBER PILES Brand/type: Approved brand and type Size: 140mm diameter minimum Treatment: H5 CCA (preservative code 01 or 02) 4.3 ANCHOR TIMBER PILES Brand/type: "A" branded Size: 125 x 125mm square or 140mm dia. round, minimum Treatment: H5 CCA (preservative code 01 or 02) Location: Refer to bracing plan 4.4 CANTILEVERED TIMBER PILES Brand/type: Approved brand and type. Species: Pinus Radiata Size: 140mm dia. round, minimum Treatment: H5 CCA (preservative code 01 or 02) Location: Refer to bracing plan 4.5 SUB FLOOR JACK STUDS Species: Pinus Radiata








Size: see NZS3604 Treatment: H1.2 4.6 SUB-FLOOR/PILE TIMBER BRACING Species: Pinus Radiata Size: 100x75mm up to 3.0m long, 100x100mm up to 5.0m long Treatment: H1.2 Location: Refer to bracing plan 4.7 NAILS / NAIL PLATES / WIRE DOGS

Brand/type: Approved brand and type Material < 600mm from ground: Stainless steel Material > 600mm from ground: Stainless steel Location: through out

4.8 PROPRIETARY CONNECTORS

Brand/type: Approved brand and type Material < 600mm from ground: Stainless steel Material > 600mm from ground: Stainless steel Location: Through out

4.9 BOLT FIXINGS

Brand/type Approved brand and type Material < 600mm from ground: Stainless steel Material > 600mm from ground: Stainless steel Size: 15mm diameter min Washers: 40mm square Location: Through out

© CIL Masterspec Aug 2016 DRAFT 3102 CONCRETE WORK - STANDARD

3102 CONCRETE WORK - STANDARD 1. GENERAL This section relates to formwork, reinforcement, concrete mixes and the placing of

concrete. 1.1 RELATED WORK Refer to the following: - 2322 CONCRETE PILE FOUNDATIONS for precast concrete pile foundations. - 3821 TIMBER FRAMING for timber framing. - 3161T THERMAKRAFT UNDERLAYS, FOILS & DPC for damp proof membranes. 1.2 ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS Refer to the general section 1232 INTERPRETATION & DEFINITIONS for abbreviations

and definitions used throughout the specification. The following abbreviations apply specifically to this section: DPM Damp proof membrane MPa Megapascal CCANZ Cement and Concrete Association of New Zealand The following definitions apply specifically to this section: ACRS Australian Certification Authority for Reinforcing Steels - An

independent certification scheme for reinforcing steel and structural steel, by product and manufacturer/processor. Certifies compliance with Australia/New Zealand Standards.

Web site - www.steelcertification.com Documents 1.3 DOCUMENTS Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The following

documents are specifically referred to in this section: NZBC B1/AS1 Structure NZBC E2/AS3 External moisture AS 1366.3 Rigid cellular plastics for thermal insulation - Rigid cellular polystyrene

- Moulded (RC/PS - M) AS 1478 Chemical admixtures for concrete, mortar and grout - Admixtures for

concrete. AS/NZS 2269.0 Plywood - Structural - Specifications NZS 3101.1 Concrete structures standard NZS 3104 Specification for concrete production NZS 3109 Concrete construction NZS 3112.1 Methods of test for concrete - Tests relating to fresh concrete NZS 3114 Specification for concrete surface finishes NZS 3121 Water and aggregate for concrete NZS 3122 Specification for Portland and blended cements (General and special

purpose) NZS 3125 Specification for Portland-limestone filler cement NZS 3604 Timber-framed buildings NZS 3631 New Zealand timber grading rules NZS 4229 Concrete masonry buildings not requiring specific engineering design AS/NZS 4671 Steel reinforcing materials AS/NZS 4672.1 Steel prestressing materials - General requirements AS/NZS 4858 Wet area membranes CCANZ CP 01 Code of practice for weathertight concrete and concrete masonry

construction 1.4 MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER DOCUMENTS Manufacturer's and supplier's documents relating to this part of the work: Dricon® Concrete SDS

http://www.steelcertification.com/




















Dricon® Brochure Dricon® Quick Selection Guide Manufacturer/supplier contact details Company: Firth Dricon Web: www.firth.co.nz Email: [email protected] Telephone: +64 9 583 2121 Requirements 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS Workers to be experienced, competent trades people familiar with the materials and

techniques specified. Performance 1.6 TESTING Carry out sampling and concrete acceptance tests during construction to NZS 3109.9.

Concrete acceptance tests during construction. Conduct 7 day strength tests. After a 7 day test result of less than 60% of the specified strength, stop concrete placement until it is shown that the suspect concrete compiles with the specification.

Carry out slump tests, yield tests and air content tests to NZS 3112.1, sections 4, 5 and

9, and evaluate to NZS 3104.2.15. Control tests and their evaluation. Make available all test records to the contract administrator on request.

1.7 STEEL REINFORCING COMPLIANCE Steel reinforcing and steel prestressing materials for concrete to AS/NZS 4671 or

AS/NZS 4672.1, respectively. Steel to be manufactured in New Zealand, or by an overseas manufacturer holding a current valid NZ S Mark or ACRS certificate for that type of steel. Confirm compliance and provide evidence if requested.

Steel that fails to meet these requirements is not to be used (or ordered) without the contract administrators written approval, further proof and/or testing may be required.

1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE Carry out the whole of this work to the requirements of NZS 3109. Quality assurance procedures to include all aspects of concrete construction including; - Formwork quality - Reinforcing steel placing - Cast in items - Concrete quality - Concrete finishes - Construction tolerances Advise the name of the suitably qualified and experienced representative who is

responsible for quality control of the concrete work. The representative is to sign a written quality control checklist for each on-site concrete pour. Provide a copy to the construction reviewer in sufficient time for a pre-pour inspection on request.

1.9 INSPECTION NOTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS A minimum 24 hour Notification 1.10 INSPECTIONS BY CONSTRUCTION REVIEWER Foundation design and reinforcing prior to concrete pour. 1.11 INSPECTIONS BY BUILDING CONSENT AUTHORITY Inspection of Reinforcing prior to pour of concrete work. 2. PRODUCTS Materials








2.1 CEMENT Portland cement to NZS 3122. 2.2 CEMENT, FILLER Portland limestone filler cement to NZS 3125. 2.3 SAND To NZS 3121. 2.4 COARSE AGGREGATE, NORMAL CONCRETE To NZS 3121, except as modified by NZS 3104: clause 2.4.3, Coarse aggregate. The

total mass of reactive alkali in the concrete mix to not exceed the requirements of section 2 of the Cement and Concrete Association, Alkali Aggregate Reaction publication.

2.5 AGGREGATE, PRESCRIBED MIX CONCRETE Builders mix (all-in aggregate) to NZS 3104: clause 3.1.4, Definition and clause 3.3.2,

Aggregate. 2.6 WATER To NZS 3121. Concrete 2.7 PRESCRIBED MIX CONCRETE Prescribed mix concrete 17.5, 20 or 25 MPa grade (for grade refer to SELECTIONS)

minimum strength, using either separate batching of sand and builder's mix or coarse aggregate to NZS 3104, table 3.1, Grading recommendations for combined and uncombined coarse aggregates.

2.8 MASS CONCRETE Concrete having a minimum strength of 10 MPa at 28 days Reinforcement 2.9 GRADE 300E STEEL To AS/NZS 4671. Round bars are shown by symbol "R" and deformed bars by symbol

"D", followed by the diameter in millimetres. 2.10 GRADE 500E STEEL To AS/NZS 4671. Round bars shown by symbol "HR" and deformed bars by symbol

"HD" followed by diameter in millimetres. 2.11 WELDED WIRE FABRIC Hard drawn steel wire spot welded with correct gauge to AS/NZS 4671 Class E, smooth

or deformed and to the spacings and dimensions either specified or shown on the drawings.

2.12 TYING WIRE Mild drawn steel wire not less than 1.2mm diameter. 2.13 SPACERS AND CHAIRS Precast concrete or purpose made moulded PVC to approval. Where concrete spacer

blocks are used in exposed concrete work use blocks similar to surrounding concrete. 3. EXECUTION 3.1 HANDLE AND STORE Handle and store reinforcing steel and accessories without damage or contamination.

Store on timber fillets on hard ground in a secure area clear of any building operation. Lay steel fabric flat.













Ensure reinforcement is clean and remains clean so that at the time of placing concrete it is free of all loose mill scale, loose rust and any other contamination that may reduce bonding capacity.

3.2 EXPOSED CONCRETE Formwork linings and surface finishes as nominated for both fair face and concealed or

exposed surfaces. Unless detailed, obtain written confirmation of the type and pattern of all joints.

Install reinforcing 3.3 CUT AND BEND Cut and bend bars using proper bending tools to avoid notching and to the requirements

of NZS 3101.1, 8 and NZS 3109: 3.3 Hooks and bends. Minimum radii of reinforcement bends to NZS 3101.1, 8 and NZS 3109: table 3.1, Minimum radii of reinforcement bends. Do not rebend grade 500E bars. Where rebending is necessary for grade 300E bars, use a purpose built tool, proper preparation and preheating.

3.4 ADJUSTMENTS Use a purpose built tool for on site bending and to deal with minor adjustments to steel

reinforcement. 3.5 TOLERANCES, BENDING To NZS 3109, 3.9, Tolerances for reinforcement. 3.6 SECURE REINFORCEMENT Secure reinforcement adequately with tying wire and place, support and secure against

displacement when concreting. Bend tying wire back well clear of the formwork. Spacing as dimensioned, or if not shown, to the clear distance minimums in NZS 3109, 3.6, Spacing of reinforcement.

3.7 LAPPED SPLICES Length of laps where not dimensioned on the drawings in accordance with the

SELECTIONS. Increase laps of plain round steel by 100%. Provide laps only where indicated on the drawings. Tie all lapping bars to each other.

Welded wire mesh laps to NZS 3101, lap one mesh square plus 50mm minimum (do not count bar extension beyond the outermost wire).

3.8 REINFORCEMENT COVER TO NZS 3604 OR NZS 4229 For in-situ concrete, foundations and interior slabs on ground, to NZS 3604 or NZS

4229, the reinforcement and welded mesh cover to be:

Location, cover to NZS 3604 NZS 4229

Footing, to earth 75mm 75mm

Footing, to DPM 75mm 50mm

Foundation, to edge 75mm 75mm

Slab, to slab top 30mm 30mm

Slab, to slab edge 50mm to 75mm 50mm to 75mm

3.9 CASTING IN Build in all grounds, bolts and fixings for wall plates and bracing elements, holding down

bolts, pipes, sleeves and fixings as required by all trades and as shown on the drawings, prior to pouring the concrete.

Do not use grounds exceeding 100mm in length. Location and form of conduits to be

approved in writing by the Contract Administrator. Minimum cover 40mm. Do not encase aluminium items in concrete. Do not paint steel embedded items more than 25mm into the concrete encasement. Cut back form ties to specified cover and fill the cavities with mortar.

Form all pockets, chases and flashing grooves as required by all trades and as shown on

the drawings.














Wrap all pipes embedded in concrete with tape to break the bond and to accommodate expansion. Do not embed pipes for conveying liquids exceeding a temperature of 50°C in concrete.

Place concrete 3.10 PRE-PLACEMENT INSPECTION Do not place concrete until all excavations, boxing and reinforcing have been inspected

and passed by the Building Consent Authority. 3.11 UNFAVOURABLE CONDITIONS Do not place concrete in high winds or other unfavourable conditions. Refer to NZS

3109: 7.2 Unfavourable conditions, for when concrete may not be placed. Remove and make good concrete damaged by frost, dry and wet conditions.

3.12 PROTECT CONCRETE WORK Protect formwork, reinforcement, "build in" items and fresh concrete from damage, as the

pour is placed, making good any damage if it occurs. 3.13 TRANSPORT CONCRETE Transport concrete from agitator to final placement as quickly as possible using means

that avoid segregation. 3.14 PUMPING CONCRETE Set up and supervise pump operation, placing and compaction of the mix to NZS 3109,

7.4, Handling and placing and NZS 3109, 7.6, Compaction Advise the ready-mix supplier of the type of pump and the slump required, in addition to the concrete grade, strength and quantity.

3.15 PLACE CONCRETE Place concrete in layers not more than 500mm deep, compacted and vibrated. Do not

place fresh concrete against the preceding layer after more than 45 minutes, or such lesser time as required by the circumstances, to NZS 3109: clause 7.4, Handling and placing.

3.16 COMPACT CONCRETE To NZS 3109: clause 7.6, Compaction. Compact by vibration of the concrete to expel

entrapped air and until settlement of the concrete is visibly evident over all areas of the surface. Maintain vibration until settlement ceases and coarse aggregate at the surface is embedded. Do not continue vibration beyond reaching this condition.

3.17 VIBRATORS Use sufficient immersion vibrators, with one spare for emergency, to ensure that vibration

is achieved throughout the entire volume of each layer of concrete, and until complete compaction is reached, to NZS 3109: clause 7.6, Compaction.

Finishing 3.18 SURFACE FINISHES To NZS 3114, 105, Specification of finishes, for off the form finishes and to NZS 3114,

Part 3, Floors, exterior pavements, and inverts, for slabs and pavements. Refer SELECTIONS.

Curing 3.19 CURING PERIOD Cure all concrete of normal cement type and mixing proportions for a minimum of 7 days.

Keep time between placing of concrete and the start of curing to an absolute minimum. Ensure curing is continuous.

3.20 CURING METHOD Notify the curing method to be used for this work. Select from the following methods; - Ponding











- Sprinkling - Wet coverings - Plastic sheet - Curing compound 3.21 SECURE COVERINGS When covering with sheet materials, ensure that edges are well secured throughout the

specified curing period, to prevent draughts passing over the surfaces of the concrete. 3.22 COLD WEATHER Do not use coverings employing water at times of freezing weather. Protect 3.23 PROTECT PLASTIC CONCRETE Protect plastic concrete from indentation and surface marking. 3.24 PROTECT HARDENED CONCRETE Protect surfaces of stripped concrete from damage especially at arrises. 3.25 PROTECT EXPOSED SURFACES Protect from rust marks and other surface disfigurements. Defects 3.26 DEFECTS Reject concrete with structural defects. Immediately after stripping formwork, identify all

defects and obtain direction. Do not carry out any repair work until directed and then only in accordance with the direction. Repair defects by cutting out, making good and replacing, or otherwise as directed.

3.27 SURFACE DEFECTS Make good surface defects immediately after forms are stripped. Make good hollows or

bony areas with 1:2 mortar or plaster, finished to the same tolerances as the parent concrete. Fill any tie rod holes with 1:2 mortar.

Completion 3.28 REMOVE Remove all unused materials and all concrete and reinforcing debris from the site. 4. SELECTIONS 4.1 REINFORCEMENT LAPS Where reinforcement laps are not shown on the drawings, lap as follows:

Bar Diameter Grade 300E deformed Grade 500E deformed

10mm 400mm 650mm

12mm 500mm 750mm

16mm 650mm 1000mm

20mm 800mm 1250mm

25mm 1000mm 1600mm

32mm 1200mm 2000mm

4.2 WELDED WIRE FABRIC Clause deleted 4.3 PRESCRIBED MIX CONCRETE Location: Foundations Prescribed mix concrete: 20 MPa: Site concrete, bedding concrete and for setting posts Add to mix: Not required


4.4 MASS CONCRETE

Mass concrete:

10 MPa minimum for: Filling in

© CIL Masterspec Aug 2016 DRAFT 3821 TIMBER FRAMING

3821 TIMBER FRAMING 1. GENERAL This section relates to the supply and erection of timber framing, as a framed structure, or

as part of a partitioning system. 1.1 RELATED WORK Refer to the following: - 3102 CONCRETE WORK - STANDARD for concrete work - 2322 CONCRETE PILE FOUNDATIONS for concrete piles to NZS 3604. - 4161T THERMAKRAFT UNDERLAYS FOILS AND DPC for moisture barriers. - 4171HR JAMES HARDIE RIGID AIR BARRIERS for bracing and moisture barrier. - 4241D DIMOND PROFILED CLADDING for cladding over timber battens. - 4311D DIMOND PROFILED METAL ROOFING for roofing over timber framing. - 4383 TIMBER DECKING for timber decking. - 4711 THERMAL INSULATION for insulation between roof framing. - 4711A AUTEX GREENSTUFF THERMAL INSULATION for insulation between

framing. - 5122 PLYWOOD LININGS for interior plywood linings. - 5113G GIB PLASTERBOARD LININGS for optional internal linings. - 5431 PARTICLEBOARD FLOOR LININGS for floor linings over timber framing. - 5438H JAMES HARDIE FIBRE CEMENT INTERIOR FLOORING for flooring over

timber framing. - 5571 TIMBER STAIRS for timber stairs. 1.2 ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS Refer to the general section 1232 INTERPRETATION & DEFINITIONS for abbreviations

and definitions used throughout the specification. The following abbreviations apply specifically to this section: SG Structural grade to NZS 3604, 1.3 Definitions Documents 1.3 DOCUMENTS Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The following

documents are specifically referred to in this section: NZBC B2/AS1 Durability AS/NZS 2904 Damp-proof courses and flashings NZS 3602 Timber and wood-based products for use in building NZS 3603 Timber structures standard NZS 3604 Timber-framed buildings NZS 3622 Verification of timber properties NZS 3631 New Zealand timber grading rules NZS 3640 Chemical preservation of round and sawn timber WorkSafe NZ Guidelines for the provision of facilities and general safety in the

construction industry. BRANZ BU 582 Structurally fixed cavity battens *A copy of NZS 3604 Timber-framed building, must be held on site. 1.4 MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER DOCUMENTS Manufacturer's and supplier's documents relating to this part of the work: CCH Woodproducts New Zealand: - PTS – Laserframe® - PTS - Laserframe® Cavity Batten - PTS - Laserframe® Ceiling Batten - SDS Antisapstain Treated Pine Solid Wood - SDS Boron Treated Solid Timber - SDS LOSP Azole Treated Solid Timber - SDS Untreated Solid Timber - Moulds on Timber













http://www.chhwoodproducts.co.nz/download_library_file.cfm?l=585043&f=2d0d19171a12040d




http://www.chhwoodproducts.co.nz/download_library_file.cfm?l=5c52&f=2d0d19171a12040d

http://www.chhwoodproducts.co.nz/download_library_file.cfm?l=5c5c&f=2d0d19171a12040d

http://www.chhwoodproducts.co.nz/download_library_file.cfm?l=5c53&f=2d0d19171a12040d



Manufacturer/supplier contact details Company: Carter Holt Harvey Woodproducts New Zealand Web: http://www.chhwoodproducts.co.nz Email: Use website Telephone: 0800 746 399 1.5 DIMENSIONS All timber sizes except for roof battens are actual minimum dried sizes. 1.6 SUBSTITUTIONS Any and all substitutions must be approved. 2. PRODUCTS Materials 2.1 TIMBER FRAMING, TREATED Species, grade and in service moisture content to NZS 3602, NZBC B2/AS1 and

treatment to NZS 3640, NZBC B2/AS1. Structural grade (SG) to NZS 3604, NZS 3622 with properties to NZS 3603.

2.2 APPEARANCE TIMBERS Graded to NZS 3631, treated where required by NZBC B2/AS1, NZS 3602, table 1, and

treatment to NZS 3640. 2.3 STRAPPING Treated to NZBC B2/AS1, NZS 3602, table 1 and to NZS 3640, clause 6.3.1. Species: Radiata pine Grade: SG6 Size: 70mm x 45mm, 45mm x 45mm or 45mm x 19mm 2.4 DPC Refer to 4161 UNDERLAYS, FOIL AND DPC section Components 2.5 NAILS Type to NZS 3604, section 4, Durability, and of the size and number for each particular

types of joint as laid down in the nailing schedules of NZS 3604, sections 6-10. 2.6 BOLTS AND SCREWS Bolts and screws of engineering and/or coach type complete with washers, to the

requirements of NZS 3604, section 4, Durability, and of the number and form required for each particular junction to NZS 3604, sections 6-10.

2.7 THREADED RODS Use stainless steel threaded rods of the required length, with washers and nuts at both

ends, when stainless steel bolts of the required length are not available. 2.8 TIMBER CONNECTORS AND FIXINGS Supply for each particular joint the connectors and fixings as noted on the drawings.

Comply with the requirements of the manufacturer, NZS 3604, section 4, Durability, and of the number and form required for each particular junction to NZS 3604, sections 6-10.

2.9 BRACING STRAPS Nail-on type to the requirements of NZS 3604, section 4, Durability, and of the number

and form required for each particular application to NZS 3604, sections 6-10. 2.10 POWDER ACTUATED FASTENERS To type, size and charge required by the powder actuated tool manufacturer for each

particular member and the substrate.
























2.11 CORROSION RISKS For interior timber, treated with copper-based timber preservatives (H3.2 or higher), use a

minimum of hot-dipped galvanized steel fixings and fasteners. For exterior timber, timber in damp areas and timber subject to occasional wetting, use

only stainless steel (or equivalent) fixings and connectors, when the timber is treated with; Copper Azole (CuAz, Preservative code 58), Alkaline Copper Quaternary (ACQ, Preservative code 90), Micronise Copper Azole (code 88) or Micronised Copper Quaternary (code 89).

3. EXECUTION Conditions 3.1 PROTECT TIMBER Protect all timber against damage and from inclement weather. Ensure that any variation

in moisture content is kept to a minimum, before and after erection and before enclosure. 3.2 EXECUTION Execution to comply with NZS 3604, except as varied in this specification. Execution to

include those methods, practices and processes contained in the unit standards for the National Certificate in Carpentry and the National Certificate in Joinery (cabinetry, exterior joinery, stairs).

3.3 SEPARATION Separate all timber framing timbers from concrete, masonry and brick by: - - a full length polyethylene damp-proof membrane overlapping timber by at least 6mm; or - a 12mm minimum free draining air space 3.4 FRAMING MOISTURE CONTENT Maximum allowable equilibrium moisture content (EMC) for non air-conditioned or

centrally heated buildings, for framing to which linings are attached. - At erection: 24% EMC maximum - At enclosure: 20% EMC maximum - At lining: 16% EMC maximum 3.5 TOLERANCES Permissible deviations from established lines, grades and dimensions equal to or less

than the following. Multiples of given limits are not cumulative. - Deviation in plan, up to 10 metres, 5mm - Deviation in plan, over 10 metres, 10mm total - Deviation from horizontal, up to 10 metres, 5mm - Deviation from horizontal, over 10 metres, 10mm total - Deviation from vertical position per 3 metres, 3mm - Deviation from horizontal and vertical, within openings, 3mm. Application 3.6 SET-OUT Set-out framing generally in accordance with the requirements of NZS 3604, to carry

superimposed loads and as required to support sheet linings and claddings. Set back nogs 12.5mm from face of studs where required for back-blocking of plasterboard non-tapered ends or edges.

3.7 SET TIMBERS Set timbers true to required lines and levels with mitres, butt joints, laps and housings cut

accurately to provide full and even contact over the whole of the bearing surface.




3.8 TIMBER CUTTING Select and cut spanning members to minimise allowable defects and avoiding knots and

short grain on edges in the middle third, and shakes, splits and checks at mid-span and close to ends.

3.9 TIMBER PLATES AND FURRING Fix to steelwork with bolts and washers or approved proprietary fastenings at 1 metre

maximum spacing and not less than 2 fixings to each member, or to engineering specific design.

3.10 HOLES AND NOTCHES Limit holes and notches, checks and half-housing for the structure to those allowable in

NZS 3604. Neatly form holes and notches for services without lessening the structural integrity of the member.

3.11 CUTTING Cutting for straightening to comply with NZS 3604, 8.5.3, Straightening studs. 3.12 EXPOSED TIMBER CONNECTORS AND FIXINGS Do not use steel timber connectors and fixings on any structural framing exposed to view

unless detailed on the drawings. 3.13 POWDER ACTUATED AND MECHANICALLY POWERED FIXING Comply with the WorkSafe NZ: Guidelines for the provision of facilities and general safety

in the construction industry, part 5, section 5.7. To be operated by a licensed applicator. 3.14 ADDITIONAL FRAMING Position and fix all necessary members for the fixing of all services, fittings, fixtures,

edges of linings or claddings, and to provide lateral support to load carrying framing. 3.15 FORM NAILED JOINTS Fully drive nails in all structural joints with the number and location for each particular

joint, to the requirements of the nailing schedules of NZS 3604. Where splitting could occur, pre-drill to 80% of nail diameter.

3.16 FORM BOLTED JOINTS Drill for and set bolts to ensure full bearing and development of the joint strength, with

tension to just set the washers into timber or to engineering specific design. 3.17 FIT CONNECTORS AND FIXINGS Fit connectors and fixings to obtain full bearing over all contact surfaces and full

development of the required loading capacity for that particular joint and in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements or to engineering specific design.

3.18 FIT JAMB BATTENS For walls with direct fix cladding, fit 20mm (nominal) jamb battens over the wall underlay,

to the jambs of window and door rough openings, to NZBC E2/AS1, fig 72A. Cut around sill flashings. Fix with 60 x 2.8 flat head galvanized nails at 300mm centres.

3.19 FIT BRACING Fit and fix subfloor, wall and roof bracing elements to the requirements of the

manufacturer or to NZS 3604, to develop the full number of bracing units required. 3.20 DPC TO LOSP TREATED TIMBER Refer to 4161 UNDERLAYS, FOIL AND DPC section 3.21 DPC TO TIMBER Refer to 4161 UNDERLAYS, FOIL AND DPC section Completion









3.22 CLEAN UP Clean up timber framing as the work proceeds so no offcuts, chips, sawdust or any other

matter or items remain behind the claddings or linings. 3.23 LEAVE Leave work to the standard required by following procedures. 3.24 REMOVE Remove debris, unused materials and elements from the site. 4. SELECTIONS 4.1 SUB-FLOOR FRAMING - RADIATA PINE

Member Species Grade Treatment

Bearers: Radiata pine SG8 H1.2

Ground floor joists: Radiata pine SG8 H1.2

4.2 SUB-FLOOR FRAMING - DOUGLAS FIR


Bearers: Douglas fir Structural H1.2

Ground floor joists: Douglas fir Structural H1.2

4.3 FLOOR FRAMING - RADIATA PINE


Mid floor joists: Radiata pine SG8 H1.2

Boundary joists: Radiata pine SG8 H1.2

4.4 FLOOR FRAMING - DOUGLAS FIR


Mid floor joists: Douglas fir Structural H1.2

Boundary joists: Douglas fir Structural H1.2

4.5 EXTERIOR WALL FRAMING - RADIATA PINE


Exterior walls: Radiata pine SG8 H1.2

Parapets: Radiata pine SG8 H1.2

Enclosed decks and balconies: Radiata pine SG8 H1.2

Cantilevered joists enclosed decks and balconies:

Radiata pine SG8 H3.2

Wall battens (not cavity): Radiata pine Merch H1.2

Jamb battens Radiata pine Merch H3.1

4.6 EXTERIOR WALL FRAMING - DOUGLAS FIR


Exterior walls: Douglas fir SG8 H1.2

Parapets: Douglas fir SG8 H1.2

Enclosed decks and balconies: Douglas fir SG8 H1.2

Cantilevered joists enclosed decks and balconies:

Douglas fir SG8 H3.2

Wall battens (not cavity): Douglas fir Merch H1.2

Jamb battens Douglas fir Merch H3.1

4.7 ROOF FRAMING - RADIATA PINE


Rafters: Radiata pine SG10 H1.2

Trusses: Radiata pine SG10 H1.2

Purlins: Radiata pine SG8 H1.2

Valley boards: Radiata pine Merch H1.2

Sarking: Radiata pine Merch H1.2

Skillion roof framing: Radiata pine SG10 H1.2

Enclosed flat roof framing: Radiata pine SG10 H1.2


4.8 ROOF FRAMING - DOUGLAS FIR


Rafters: Douglas fir SG10 H1.2

Trusses: Douglas fir SG10 H1.2

Purlins: Douglas fir SG8 H1.2

Valley boards: Douglas fir Merch H1.2

Sarking: Douglas fir Merch H1.2

Skillion roof framing: Douglas fir SG10 H1.2

Enclosed flat roof framing: Douglas fir SG10 H1.2

4.9 INTERIOR WALL FRAMING - RADIATA PINE


Non structural walls: Radiata pine SG8 H1.2

Structural and braced walls: Radiata pine SG8 H1.2

4.10 INTERIOR WALL FRAMING - DOUGLAS FIR


Non structural walls: Douglas fir SG8 H1.2

Structural and braced walls: Douglas fir SG8 H1.2

4.11 CEILING FRAMING - RADIATA PINE


Ceiling joists: Radiata pine SG8 H1.2

Timber ceiling battens: Radiata pine SG8 H1.2

Proprietary ceiling battens: Laserframe® Type 8 H1.2

4.12 CEILING FRAMING - DOUGLAS FIR


Ceiling joists: Douglas fir SG8 H1.2

Timber ceiling battens: Douglas fir SG8 H1.2

Proprietary ceiling battens: CCH Laserframe®

SG8 H1.2

4.13 EXTERIOR EXPOSED TIMBER


Posts: Radiata pine SG8 H3.2 CCA

Joists: Radiata pine SG8 H3.2 CCA

Exterior stairs and steps: Radiata pine SG8 H3.2 CCA

Pergola: Radiata pine SG8 H3.2 CCA

Ground contact members Radiata pine SG8 H5 CCA

Note: All CCA preservative code 01 or 02 4.14 SPECIAL FRAMING ELEMENTS


N/A N/A N/A N/A

4.15 DPC Refer to 4161 UNDERLAYS, FOIL AND DPC section 4.16 NAILS

Location Type Material Finish

Throughout 316 Stainless Steel

4.17 BOLTS AND SCREWS



4.18 NAIL PLATES


\Throughout 316 Stainless Steel


4.19 CONNECTORS



© CIL Masterspec Aug 2016 DRAFT 4161T THERMAKRAFT UNDERLAYS, FOILS & DPC

4161T THERMAKRAFT UNDERLAYS, FOILS & DPC 1. GENERAL This section relates to the application of Thermakraft Industries (NZ) Ltd, DPC, DPM,

underfloor foil insulation, wall underlays and roofing underlays. 1.1 RELATED WORK Refer to the following: - 2322 CONCRETE PILE FOUNDATIONS for foundations. - 3102 CONCRETE WORK - STANDARD for concrete work. - 3821 TIMBER FRAMING for timber framing. - 4171HR JAMES HARDIE RIGID AIR BARRIERS for moisture barriers. - 4241D DIMOND PROFILED CLADDING for metal cladding system. - 4311D DIMOND PROFILED METAL ROOFING for metal roofing - 4521AE APL ALUMINIUM WINDOWS & DOORS EDUCATION FACILITIES for window

and door penetrations. 1.2 ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS Refer to the general section 1232 INTERPRETATION & DEFINITIONS for abbreviations

and definitions used throughout the specification. The following abbreviations apply specifically to this section: NZMRM New Zealand Metal Roofing Manufacturers Inc. The following definitions apply specifically to this section: Wall underlay the same meaning as defined in NZBC E2/AS1, covering kraft based

and synthetic wall underlays, sometimes called, wall wraps, building wraps or building papers.

Documents 1.3 DOCUMENTS Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The following

documents are specifically referred to in this section: NZBC C/AS1-AS7 Protection from fire NZBC E2/AS1 External moisture AS 1530.2 Methods for fire tests on building materials, components and

structures - Test for flammability of materials NZS 2295 Pliable, permeable building underlays AS/NZS 2904 Damp-proof courses and flashings NZS 3604 Timber-framed buildings AS/NZS 4200.1 Pliable building membranes and underlays - Materials NZS 4214 Methods of determining the total thermal resistance of parts of

buildings AS/NZS 4389 Roof safety mesh AS/NZS 4534 Zinc and zinc/aluminium-alloy coatings on steel wire NZMRM CoP NZ metal roof and wall cladding Code of Practice 1.4 MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER DOCUMENTS Thermakraft documents relating to work in this section are: Thermakraft product manual and technical data sheets. BRANZ Appraisal 329 - Supercourse 500 Damp-Proof Course and Concealed Flashing BRANZ Appraisal 651 - Thermakraft Covertek™ 407 Fire Retardant Self Supporting

Roof Underlay BRANZ Appraisal 695 - Watergate-Plus Fire Retardant Wall Underlay BRANZ Appraisal 743 - Thermakraft Covertek 405 Plus fire Retardant Self-Supporting

Roof Underlay BRANZ Appraisal 867 – Thermakraft Steelwrap 290 Wall Underlay BRANZ Appraisal 878 - Thermakraft Aluband Window Flashing Tape BRANZ Appraisal 912 – Thermakraft 220 Wall Underlay BRANZ Appraisal 917 - Thermakraft Covertek 403 Plus Roof Underlay




















BRANZ Appraisal 918 - Thermakraft Covertek 403 Plus Wall Underlay Code Mark Certificate 30069 - Thermakraft Covertek 403 Plus Absorbent Breathable

Roof Underlay Code Mark Certificate 30030 - Thermakraft Covertek 405 Absorbent Breathable Roof

Underlay Code Mark Certificate 30028 - Thermakraft Covertek 407 Absorbent Breathable Roof

Underlay Manufacturer/supplier contact details Company: Thermakraft Industries (NZ) Ltd Web: www.thermakraft.co.nz Email: [email protected] Telephone: 0800 806 595 Warranties 1.5 WARRANTY - MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER Warrant this work under normal environmental and use conditions against failure of

materials and execution. Thermakraft Industries Ltd warrant performance of products if design and installation complies with relevant technical literature, NZBC, and recognised industry Codes of Practice. Copy of Thermakraft Product Warranty available on request.

Requirements 1.7 INSTALLATION SKILL LEVELS Installers to be experienced in the installation of Thermakraft products and familiar with

Thermakraft Industries technical literature and the related documents listed in this design i.e. NZMRM CoP NZ metal roof and wall cladding Code of Practice.

2. PRODUCTS Materials DPC 2.1 EMBOSSED POLYETHYLENE Supercourse 500™ hi-impact polyethylene film to AS/NZS 2904 and embossed on both

sides. Thickness 500 microns minimum, manufactured for use as a damp-proof course and concealed flashings around doors and windows and to BRANZ Appraisal 329. Refer to SELECTIONS for type of jointing tape.

DPM 2.2 DAMP-PROOF MEMBRANE - MEDIUM DUTY, BLACK - GROUND COVER TO

SUSPENDED TIMBER FLOORS Thermathene Black™ polyethylene sheet with minimum thickness of 0.25 mm and a

minimum vapour flow resistance of 50MNs/g to NZS 3604, 7.5.6, Polyethylene (polythene) sheet damp-proof membranes. Refer to SELECTIONS for type of jointing tape.

Wall underlays 2.3 SYNTHETIC BREATHER TYPE FILM COATED WALL UNDERLAY Watergate-Plus™ 295, absorbent breathable spun bonded non-woven polyolefin type

building membrane, coated with a water resistant vapour permeable film. A fire retardant membrane, with Flammability Index of ≤ 5, when tested to AS 1530.2. The product has a BRANZ Appraisal 695.

Roofing underlays





http://www.thermakraft.co.nz/






2.4 SYNTHETIC FIRE RETARDANT SELF SUPPORTING NON-WOVEN ROOFING UNDERLAY

CoverTek™ 407, a fire retardant non-woven self supporting roofing underlay, consisting of two spun-bonded polyolefin fabric layers bonded to a micro porous inner layer, designed for use as a water absorbent, breathable, water resistant roofing underlay for sloped roofs. CoverTek™ 407 has a flammability index of ≤ 5, tested to AS 1530.2, to NZBC C/AS1-AS7, meets the requirements for suspended fabrics, BRANZ Appraisal 651 and Code Mark Certificate 30028. Can be used in areas exposed to view in occupied spaces.

2.5 SYNTHETIC NON-WOVEN SELF SUPPORTING ROOFING UNDERLAY CoverTek™405, a non-woven self-supporting roofing underlay, consisting of two spun-

bonded polyolefin fabric layers bonded to a micro porous inner layer, designed for use as a water absorbent, breathable, water resistant roofing underlay for sloped roofs. Covertek™ 405 has a flammability Index of ≤ 5 tested to AS 1530.2, to NZBC C/AS1-AS7, meets the requirements for suspended fabrics, BRANZ Appraisal 743 and Code Mark Certificate 30030. Can be used in areas exposed to view in occupied spaces.

2.6 SYNTHETIC NON-WOVEN HEAVYWEIGHT ROOFING UNDERLAY CoverTek™ 403 Plus, a non-woven roofing underlay, consisting of two spun-bonded

polyolefin fabric layers bonded to a micro porous inner layer, designed for use as a water absorbent, breathable, water resistant roofing underlay for sloped roofs. Covertek™ 403 Plus has a flammability Index of ≤5 tested to AS 1530.2, and meets the requirements of NZBC C/AS2-AS7, 4.17.8. (b) for suspended flexible fabrics.

Commercial roofing foils 2.7 FIRE RETARDANT LIGHT DIFFUSER FOIL INSULATION Thermabar 344 F.R, a layer of highly burnished aluminium foil bonded with flame

retardant adhesive to a white synthetic woven fabric. Fire retardant to AS 1530 2 and has achieved a Flammability Index ≤ 5. To NZS 4214, Methods of determining the total thermal resistance of parts of buildings. Refer to SELECTIONS for type of foil tape.

2.8 FIRE RETARDANT LIGHT DIFFUSER DOUBLE SIDED FOIL INSULATION Thermabar 346 F.R,two layers of highly burnished aluminium foil bonded with flame

retardant adhesive. Fire retardant to AS 1530 2 and has achieved a Flammability Index ≤ 5. To NZS 4214, Methods of determining the total thermal resistance of parts of buildings. Refer to SELECTIONS for type of foil tape.

2.9 FIRE RETARDANT LIGHT DIFFUSER SYNTHETIC FOIL INSULATION Thermakraft 397, a fire retardant light diffuser foil insulation / vapour control layer

comprised of a fully synthetic laminated insulating foil with a spun bonded fabric core encased in polyolefin film. Fire retardant to AS 1530 2 and has achieved a Flammability Index ≤ 5. To NZS 4214, Methods of determining the total thermal resistance of parts of buildings. Usedto line walls and under roofs in commercial and industrial buildings to give aclean white finish. Refer to SELECTIONS for type of foil tape.

2.10 FIRE RETARDANT LIGHT WEIGHT ALUMINIUM FOIL Thermabar 731, two layers of aluminium foil and paper laminates bonded with flame

retardant adhesive and reinforced with fibreglass yarn in a tri-directional pattern, to AS/NZS 4200.1 and AS 1530.2 with Flammability Index ≤ 5. To NZS 4214, Methods of determining the total thermal resistance of parts of buildings. Refer to SELECTIONS for type of foil tape.

Accessories 2.11 WINDOW AND DOOR SEALING TAPE Thermakraft Aluband™ Window Sealing Tape system consists of synthetic faced

reinforced bituminous window sealing tape, Thermakraft Aluband™ Corner Moulding™ piece, used in conjunction with the Thermakraft Aluband™ Hand Tool to ensure good adhesion and a tight fit into corners. Refer to Thermakraft Data Sheet for installation details and BRANZ Appraisal 878.

















2.12 STUD STRAPS - POLYETHYLENE Thermastrap 201, 19mm wide polyethylene straps. 2.13 WIRE NETTING 75mm galvanized hexagonal wire netting to AS/NZS 4534. 2.14 GUTTER AND UNDER FLASHINGS Thermakraft 215™, bituminous breather type underlay to NZS 2295 cut to width for use

under valley, apron flashing and internal gutters. Soffit liner cut to width from Thermakraft 215™ bituminous breather type underlay. Refer

to SELECTIONS. 2.15 TAPE Thermakraft tapes to compliment the underlay. Pressure sensitive aluminium foil tapes

for joining foil insulation and vapour barriers. These include: - Thermakraft White General Purpose Underlay Tape - Thermakraft Foil Tape 150 - Thermakraft Window Sealing Tapes, used to repair damaged bituminous underlays 2.16 DRAINAGE MATT Thermakraft Drainage Matt, an extruded 3 dimensional synthetic black mesh, used as an

air separation layer between fully sarked roof and roof cladding. Used in wall applications to allow air passage and drainage where no other cavity is provided.

3. EXECUTION Conditions 3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Design application and installation of Thermakraft Building products to NZBC E2/AS1,

BRANZ Appraisals, Thermakraft Technical Literature and Industry Codes of Practice. 3.2 STORAGE Store building underlays and accessory materials, under conditions that ensure no

deterioration or damage. Store rolls in an upright position on a smooth floor and protected from sunlight, UV radiation and moisture.

3.3 INSPECTION Before starting work, check that the building construction phase will allow work of the

required standard. Carry out remedial work identified before laying underlay. Application DPC 3.4 DPC TO LOSP/CCA TREATED TIMBER Lay Supercourse 500™ DPC under LOSP or CCA treated bottom plate of all timber

framed walls on concrete, in a single layer with 50mm overlaps at joints to provide a waterproof barrier.

3.5 DPC TO TIMBER / STEEL Lay DPC under the bottom plate of all timber / steel framed walls on concrete, in a single

layer with 50mm overlaps at joints to provide a waterproof barrier. Refer to SELECTIONS for type.

3.6 DPC TO MASONRY AND BRICK VENEER Lay DPC along based of cavity and fix top edge to studs with galvanized clouts. Turn

DPC out over concrete rebate under bottom course of veneer. Application - DPM 3.7 DPM TO GROUND UNDER SUSPENDED TIMBER FLOOR Lay DPM on ground under enclosed subfloor suspended timber floor in accordance with

NZS 3604, 6.14.3, Ground cover, and as follows. Ensure that:






- the vapour barrier is weighted down and held against air movement by bricks or rocks - total subfloor ground area is covered - polyethylene sheet is new and unpunctured - adjacent sheets are lapped a minimum of 75mm - sheets are butted up to surrounding foundation walls, piles and other penetrating

elements - ground is shaped to prevent water accumulation on the vapour barrier and to drain to

the exterior. Note: In accordance with NZS 3604 the minimum requirement for subfloor ventilation

under all situations is to be no less than 700mm² for every 1m² of floor area. Application - wall underlay 3.8 WALL UNDERLAY Fix horizontally to outside face of framing in true alignment, with succeeding sheets

overlapping 150mm to NZBC E2/AS1, 9.1.7, Wall underlay, and refer to Thermakraft Industries for requirement for fastenings. Fix to Thermakraft Industries Technical Data specifications. Scribe neatly around penetrations and openings to leave no gaps. Tape all penetrations. Keep clean, undamaged and without visible weather deterioration until closed in.

3.9 INSTALL STUD STRAPS Over underlay, install 19mm wide polyethylene straps horizontally at 300mm centres,

draw taut and fix to studs with stainless steel staples. 3.10 METAL CLADDING ON TIMBER CAVITY BATTENS Fix strip of Thermakraft DPC as a separator between the timber and metal cladding. Application - roofing underlay 3.11 WIRE NETTING Lay 75mm galvanized wire netting at right angles across the purlins and drawn taut

before fixing. Tie edges of netting together with galvanized wire clips. 3.12 ROOF UNDERLAY Lay vertically over purlins on wire netting with a 150mm side lap. Fix securely to purlins

with galvanized fixing clips. Lay underlay to avoid excessive dishing between purlins. When used vertically limit individual runs to 10 metres for bituminous underlays. Do not lay vertically on roof pitches under 10° without support.

Lay horizontally across the rafter/trusses starting at the gutter line with succeeding sheets

in true alignment and lapping 150mm. Scribe around and fit neatly to all penetrations. Avoid prolong exposure by installing the roof immediately.

3.13 GUTTER AND UNDER FLASHINGS Lay Thermakraft 215™ bituminous breather type underlay cut to width by manufacturer

for use as an underlay to valley, apron flashings, and internal gutters. Lap under flashings with adjoining underlays. Fix Thermakraft 215™ bituminous breather type underlay soffit liner from top plate down 150mm past ribbon plate.

Application - commercial roof underlays 3.14 FOIL ROOF UNDERLAY Lay vertically over purlins with a 150mm side lap. Fix securely to purlins with galvanized

fixing clips. Lay underlay to avoid excessive dishing between purlins. Alternatively lay horizontally across the rafter/trusses starting at the gutter line with

succeeding sheets in true alignment and lapping 150mm. Scribe around and fit neatly to all penetrations. Avoid prolong exposure by installing the roof immediately.

3.15 FOIL ROOF UNDERLAY AS VAPOUR BARRIER Lay horizontally or vertically on safety mesh. Start at the gutter and work towards the

ridge with a minimum lap of 150mm. Tape joints using F150 Foil Tape x 48mm.




3.16 ROOF UNDERLAY INSTALLATION Apply from the lowest point to allow laps to shed water. All edge and end laps must be

overlapped by a minimum of 150mm. Ensure that the underlay is properly fixed to the surface at perimeters or around penetrations.

Completion 3.17 CLEAN UP Clean up as the work proceeds. 3.18 LEAVE Leave work to the standard required by following procedures. 3.19 REMOVE Remove debris, unused materials and elements from the site. 4. SELECTIONS For further details on selections go to www.thermakraft.co.nz. Damp Proof Course 4.1 THERMAKRAFT - SUPERCOURSE 500™ DPC Location: Concrete piles and timber floor frame Type: Supercourse 500™ DPC Jointing tape: Thermakraft window sill tape 75mm Aluband™ Damp Proof Membrane 4.2 THERMATHENE BLACK™ - GROUND UNDER SUSPENDED TIMBER FLOOR Location: Timber in contact with concrete work. Type: Thermathene Black™ Jointing tape: Thermakraft "White General Purpose Underlay Tape" Wall Underlays 4.3 THERMAKRAFT WATERGATE-PLUS™ 295 Location: Where no rigid air barriers are. Type: Thermakraft Watergate-Plus™ 295 Jointing tape: Thermakraft window sill tape 75mm Aluband Roofing Underlays 4.4 COVERTEK ROOFING UNDERLAYS Location: Roof Type: CoverTek™ 403 Plus fire retardant non-woven roofing underlay Jointing tape: Thermakraft window sill tape 75mm Aluband™ Foils - Commercial 4.5 THERMABAR FOIL Location: Roof Type: Thermabar 731 F.R. fire retardant light weight aluminium foil Jointing tape: White GP Tape 48mm Window / Door Sealing System 4.6 THERMAKRAFT - ALUBAND™ Location: Throughout Type: Thermakraft window sill tape 75mm Aluband™ Stud Straps

http://www.thermakraft.co.nz/


4.7 THERMASTRAP Location: Where wall underlays are applied. Type: Thermastrap 201, 19mm blue polypropylene tape Wire Netting 4.8 WIRE NETTING Location: Roof Type: 75mm galvanized wire netting Gutter and Under Flashing 4.9 GUTTER AND UNDER FLASHINGS Location: Eave and gutter junction Type: Apron flashing underlay 415mm wide Jointing tape: Thermakraft window sill tape 75mm Aluband™

© CIL Masterspec Aug 2016 DRAFT 4171HR JAMES HARDIE RIGID AIR BARRIERS

4171HR JAMES HARDIE RIGID AIR BARRIERS 1. GENERAL This section relates to the supply and fixing of James Hardie rigid air barrier products; - HomeRAB® Pre-Cladding - RAB® Board 1.1 RELATED WORK Refer to the following: - 3821 TIMBER FRAMING for timber framing. - 4161T THERMAKRAFT UNDERLAYS, FOILS & DPC for underlays and tapes. - 4711 THERMAL INSULATION for insulation. - 4711A AUTEX GREENSTUFF THERMAL INSULATION for insulation. - 4811FS FOSROC SEALANTS for sealants and tapes to joins and junctions. Documents 1.2 DOCUMENTS Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The following

documents are specifically referred to in this section: NZBC E2/AS1 External moisture AS/NZS 1170.2 Structural design actions - Wind actions AS/NZS 2908.2 Cellulose-cement products - Flat sheet NZS 3602 Timber and wood-based products for use in building NZS 3604 Timber-framed buildings 1.3 MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER DOCUMENTS Manufacturer's and supplier's documents relating to this part of the work: James Hardie Rigid Air Barriers Installation Manual BRANZ Appraisal 611 - James Hardie Rigid Air Barriers Manufacturer/supplier contact details Company: James Hardie New Zealand Web: www.jameshardie.co.nz Email: [email protected] Telephone: Ask James Hardie™ on 0800 808 868. Warranties 1.4 WARRANTY - MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER Provide a material manufacturer/supplier warranty: 15 years: For HomeRAB® Pre-Cladding and RAB® Board (refer to James

Hardie™ product warranty) 15 years: For accessories supplied by James Hardie (refer to James Hardie™

product warranty) From: Date of purchase - Provide this warranty on the manufacturer's standard form. Refer to the general section 1237 WARRANTIES for additional requirements. Performance 1.6 PERFORMANCE, WIND The design wind pressures are to NZS 3604, up to and including Very High Wind Zone.

James Hardie HomeRAB® Pre-Cladding is suitable for these conditions. 2. PRODUCTS Materials







http://www.jameshardie.co.nz/




2.1 HOMERAB PRE-CLADDING James Hardie HomeRAB® Pre-Cladding, 4.5mm thick, manufactured from treated

cellulose fibre, Portland cement, sand and water, cured by high pressure autoclaving manufactured to AS/NZS 2908.2 and, face and edge sealed. Suitable for residential buildings within the scope of NZS 3604 and up to VH wind zone.

Components 2.2 FASTENER TYPE Fasteners to minimum durability requirements of the NZBC. Refer to NZS 3604, section

4 Durability, for requirements for fixing's material to be used in relation to the exposure conditions.

Refer to NZBC E2/AS1, Table 20, Material selection, and NZBC E2/AS1, Table 21,

Compatibility of materials in contact, for selection of suitable fixing materials and their compatibility with other materials.

Zone Fixings Material

Zone D, Zone E / Microclimates (incl. Geothermal) Grade 316 Stainless

Zone B, Zone C Hot-dipped galvanized

Bracing - outside Zone D Hot-dipped galvanized

Check against SED (specific engineering design) requirements for microclimate conditions.

2.3 GALVANIZED NAILS HomeRAB® Pre-Cladding - Hot-dip galvanized 40 x 2.8mm HardieFlex™ nails or 50 x 2.8mm RounDrive nails for

nail guns. RAB® Board - Hot-dip galvanized 40 x 2.8mm HardieFlex™ nails or 50 x 2.8mm RounDrive nails for

nail guns. 2.4 STAINLESS STEEL NAILS HomeRAB® Pre-Cladding - 316 Stainless Steel 40 x 2.8mm HardieFlex™ nails or 50 x 2.8mm RounDrive nails for

nail guns. RAB® Board - 316 Stainless Steel 40 x 2.8mm HardieFlex™ nails or 50 x 2.8mm RounDrive nails for

nail guns. Accessories 2.5 SEALING STRIP Inseal® 3259, 1.5mm thick x 50mm wide black compressible medium density closed cell

foam tape for vertical joints. Battens must be installed within 24hrs of the Inseal tape installation.

Inseal® 3259, 1.5mm thick x 80mm wide black compressible medium density closed cell foam tape for corner joints. Battens must be installed within 24hrs of the Inseal tape installation.

2.6 JOINT SEALING TAPE Marshall Innovations or 3M joint sealing tape. Refer to James Hardie's technical

literature for selection and use requirements. 2.7 WINDOW FLASHING TAPE Marshall Innovations tape. Refer to tape maufacturer for selection and installation

requirements. 2.8 HORIZONTAL FLASHING HomeRAB® 4.5 horizontal flashing. RAB® Board horizontal flashing.







3. EXECUTION Conditions 3.1 STORAGE Take delivery of products dry and undamaged on pallets, and keep on pallet. Protect

edges and corners from damage and covered to keep dry until fixed. 3.2 HANDLING Avoid distortion and contact with potentially damaging surfaces. Do not drag sheets

across each other, or across other materials. Protect edges, corner and surface finish from damage.

3.3 SUBSTRATE Do not commence work until the substrate is of the standard required for the specified

finish; plumb, level and in true alignment. Moisture content of timber framing must not exceed the requirements specified by NZS 3602 to minimise shrinkage and movement after sheets are fixed.

3.4 FRAMING Provided in accordance with NZS 3604 or to SED (specific engineering design)

requirements. Stud spacing and nog spacing must not exceed 600mm or 1,200mm respectively. Minimum 45mm wide stud required where vertical jointing on studs.

Application - particular installations 3.5 FIRE RESISTANCE RATING, FIBRE CEMENT Install mineral fibre insulation or glass fibre insulation fitted tightly in the timber framing

cavity. Fix RAB® Board to the exterior face of the framing, direct or on cavity. Fix lining sheets. Refer to project drawing for FRR system construction details and James Hardie Fire and Acoustic Design Manual for further information.

3.6 BRACING SYSTEM HOMERAB PRE-CLADDING Fix sheets in accordance with the Bracing Design Manual. Refer to the bracing manual

bracing table for specific requirements. Application - generally 3.7 PENETRATIONS AND FLASHINGS Confirm that exterior wall openings have been prepared ready for the installation of all

window and door frames and other penetrations through the cladding. Required preparatory work includes the following:

- Openings formed in accordance with the James Hardie Rigid Air Barriers installation manual.

- Materials lapped in a way that water tracks down to the exterior face of the Rigid Air Barrier.

- Underlay to openings finished and dressed off ready for the installation of window and door frames and other penetrations

Install Rigid Air Barriers 3.8 SHEET LAYOUT Refer to the James Hardie Rigid Air Barriers installation manual for sheet layouts to suit

general installations and where used to achieve structural bracing. For bracing applications all edges must be supported on framing.

3.9 VERTICAL JOINTS Join sheets to the James Hardie Rigid Air Barriers installation manual. 3.10 HORIZONTAL JOINTS Join sheets to the James Hardie Rigid Air Barriers installation manual.




3.11 EXTERNAL AND INTERNAL CORNERS Form in accordance with the James Hardie Rigid Air Barriers installation manual using a

75mm minimum wide sealing tape. 3.12 FIXING SHEETS Fix in accordance with the James Hardie Rigid Air Barriers installation manual for either

general or bracing applications. Sheets can either be gun nailed or hand nailed using the nails specified. Gun nailing is recommended to reduce installation time.

3.13 SEALANTS Application and use of sealants to manufacturer's instructions. 3.14 PENETRATIONS Form in accordance with the James Hardie Rigid Air Barriers installation manual. 3.15 OPENINGS Form in accordance with the James Hardie Rigid Air Barriers installation manual.

Exposed timber framing around window, door, meter box and other penetrations must be covered with a 150mm wide minimum flashing tape or sealing tape. Flashing tapes must be lapped over the HomeRAB® Pre-Cladding or RAB® Board by 50mm minimum.

3.16 FLASHINGS AND JUNCTIONS Form in accordance with the James Hardie Rigid Air Barriers installation manual. Install

flashing tape over any flashings and at all junctions with other materials or building elements.

3.17 AT SOFFITS Form in accordance with the James Hardie Rigid Air Barriers installation manual. 3.18 BASE CLEARANCES Form in accordance with the James Hardie Rigid Air Barriers installation manual. Lining is

required to extend below the bottom plate by 15mm minimum to form a drip edge and must finish a minimum 100mm clear of finished ground. Where base of sheets are cut to suit site requirements seal the bottom edge using Dulux® Acraprime 501/1 primer or Dulux® Primacryl primer.

Completion 3.19 REPLACE Replace all damaged or marked elements. 3.20 LEAVE Leave work to the standard required for following procedures. 3.21 REMOVE Remove debris, unused materials and elements from the site. 4. SELECTIONS 4.1 JAMES HARDIE HOMERAB® PRE-CLADDING - RIGID AIR BARRIER Brand/type: James Hardie HomeRAB® Pre-Cladding Flashing tape: 3M All weather Flashing Tape 8067 by 3M Nail finish: 316 Stainless Steel Nails: 316 40 x 2.8mm HardieFlex™ nails or 50 x 2.8mm RounDrive nails for

nail guns

© CIL Masterspec Aug 2016 DRAFT 4231HF JAMES HARDIE FACADE PANEL CLADDING

4231HF JAMES HARDIE FACADE PANEL CLADDING 1. GENERAL This section relates to the supply and fixing of James Hardie fibre cement ExoTec®

Facade Panel rainscreen and Titan® Facade Panel rainscreen. 1.1 RELATED WORK Refer to the following: - 3821 TIMBER FRAMING for timber grades. - 4171HR JAMES HARDIE RIGID AIR BARRIERS for pre-cladding. - 4821 FLASHINGS for flashings. - 6711W WATTYL TAUBMANS PAINTING EXTERIOR for paining. Refer to painting section/s for the protective coating required to meet the NZBC durability

requirements. Documents 1.2 DOCUMENTS Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The following

documents are specifically referred to in this section: NZBC E2/AS1 External moisture AS/NZS 1170.2 Structural design actions - Wind actions AS/NZS 2908.2 Cellulose-cement products - Flat sheet NZS 3602 Timber and wood-based products for use in building NZS 3604 Timber-framed buildings AS/NZS 4284 Testing of building facades 1.3 MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER DOCUMENTS James Hardie documents relating to this part of the work: Titan® Facade Panel/ExoTec® Facade Panel Rainscreen technical specification Titan® Facade Panel/CLD® Structural Cavity Batten technical specification HardieFlex™ Sheet technical specification Eaves and Soffit Linings installation manual BRANZ Appraisal 467 - Titan® & Exotec® Facade Panel Rainscreen Manufacturer/supplier contact details Company: James Hardie New Zealand Web: www.jameshardie.co.nz Email: [email protected] Telephone: 0800 808 868 Warranties 1.4 WARRANTY - MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER Provide a material manufacturer/supplier warranty: 15 years: For James Hardie™ ExoTec® Facade Panel & Villaboard®. (refer to James Hardie™ product warranty) 15 year For accessories supplied by James Hardie (refer to James Hardie™

product warranty) From Date of purchase - Provide this warranty on the manufacturer's standard form. Refer to the general section 1237 WARRANTIES for additional requirements. Requirements 1.6 INFORMATION FOR OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE Provide relevant James Hardie maintenance requirements at completion of the work. Performance










1.7 PERFORMANCE, WIND The design wind pressures are to AS/NZS 1170.2. James Hardie Technical Specification

are suitable for these conditions. Refer to technical specification to check the wind pressure limits.

Up to; - 2.5kPa ULS Titan® Facade Panel on CLD® Structural Cavity Batten. - 4.5kPa ULS Titan® Facade Panel on timber cavity battens. - 5.0kPa ULS ExoTec® Facade Panel on steel top hat section. 2. PRODUCTS Materials 2.1 RIGID AIR BARRIERS Refer to section 4171HR JAMES HARDIE RIGID AIR BARRIERS. 2.2 EXTERIOR CAVITY WALL BATTENS Radiata pine battens, minimum 45mm wide x 18mm thick, H3.1 treated, height to match

timber framing studs. To NZS 3602, Table 1, reference 1D.10, Requirements for wood-based building components to achieve a 50-year durability performance.

2.3 EXTERIOR CAVITY CLOSER Perforated uPVC, with upstands. 2.4 EXOTEC FACADE PANEL James Hardie ExoTec® Facade Panel, high density autoclaved sheet, 1190mm wide x

9mm thick manufactured from treated cellulose fibre, Portland cement, sand and water. Cured by high pressure autoclaving and manufactured to AS/NZS 2908.2. BRANZ appraised and tested to AS/NZS 4284 for weathertightness. Both faces and all edges presealed.

2.5 FLUSH JOINTED SOFFIT LINING James Hardie Villaboard® Lining 6mm and 9mm thick manufactured from treated

cellulose fibre, Portland cement, sand and water, cured by high pressure autoclaving and manufactured to AS/NZS 2908.2.

Components 2.6 FASTENER TYPE Fasteners to minimum durability requirements of the NZBC. Refer to NZS 3604, Section

4, Durability, for requirements for fixing's material to be used in relation to the exposure conditions.

Refer to NZBC E2/AS1, Table 20, Material selection for fixing material, and NZBC

E2/AS1, Table 21, Compatibility of materials in contact, for selection of suitable fixing materials and their compatibility with other materials.

Zone Fixings Material

Zone D, Zone E / Microclimates (incl. Geothermal) Grade 316 Stainless

Zone B, Zone C Hot-dipped galvanized

Bracing - All zones Grade 316 Stainless

Check against SED (specific engineering design) requirements for microclimate conditions.

2.7 THERMAL BREAK FOR STEEL FRAMING For structural steel framing use 7-10mm XPS (extruded polystyrene grade) between the

steel frame and wall underlay/RAB® Board, to provide a thermal break. 2.8 SCREWS, FACADE PANEL FIXING TO TIMBER BATTEN Grade 316 stainless steel countersunk wood screws 65mm x 10 g for ExoTec® and

Titan® Facade Panels.











2.9 HORIZONTAL T SOCKET JOINTER Aluminium T socket manufactured from grade 5005 aluminium alloy. Accessories 2.10 SEALING STRIPS FOR TIMBER CAVITY BATTEN Inseal® 3259, 1.5mm thick x 50mm wide black compressible medium density closed cell

foam tape. Butyl rubber black membrane with a 6mm x 9mm Inseal 3109 adhered along each edge

of one face with pressure sensitive acrylic adhesive. 50mm wide for vertical joints and 80mm wide for corners.

Polypropylene / Polyethylene flashing for internal and external corners used with CLD®

structural cavity batten. 2.11 SEALANT Silaflex MS sealant or similar. Refer to the sheet manufacturer's technical literature for

selection and use requirements. 3. EXECUTION Conditions 3.1 STORAGE Take delivery of products dry and undamaged on pallets, and keep on pallet. Protect

edges and corners from damage and covered to keep dry until fixed. 3.2 HANDLING Avoid distortion and contact with potentially damaging surfaces. Do not drag sheets

across each other, or across other materials. Protect edges, corner and surface finish from damage.

3.3 SUBSTRATE Do not commence work until the substrate is of the standard required for the specified

finish; plumb, level and in true alignment. Moisture content of timber framing must not exceed the requirements specified by NZS 3602 to minimise shrinkage and movement after sheets are fixed.

For facade panel confirm that 75mm framing for vertical joints and 125mm nogs for

horizontal joints have been correctly installed when using timber cavity battens. 3.4 SEAL EDGES Seal site cut sheet edges prior to installation. Seal sheet edges around window and door

openings, meter boxes and at other penetrations. Application - particular installations 3.5 FIRE RESISTANCE RATING, FIBRE CEMENT Install mineral fibre insulation or glass fibre insulation fitted tightly in the timber framing

cavity. Apply fire retardant wall underlay to the exterior face of the framing and fix fibre cement cladding and lining sheets, direct or on cavity. Refer to James Hardie Fire and Acoustic Design Manual.

3.6 BRACING SYSTEM Fix sheets in accordance with James Hardie technical specification. Application - generally 3.7 PENETRATIONS AND FLASHINGS Confirm that exterior wall openings have been prepared ready for the installation of all




- Wall underlay appropriately incorporated with penetration and junction flashings. - Materials lapped in a way that water tracks down to the exterior face of the wall

underlay. - Wall underlay to openings finished and dressed off ready for the installation of window

and door frames and other penetrations - Claddings neatly finished off to all sides of openings - Installation of flashings (those required to be installed prior to installation of penetrating

elements). Install Titan®/ExoTec® Facade Panels 3.8 RAINSCREEN HORIZONTAL JOINT Glue Aluminium 'T' Socket to the top of the back face of the lower panel. Do not allow

fixings through the upper sheet to penetrate through the aluminium socket. 3.9 EXOTEC® FACADE PANEL RAINSCREEN OVER TIMBER CAVITY BATTENS Fix ExoTec® Facade Panels to timber cavity battens. ExoTec® facade panels must only

be screw fixed.

Stud centres

Fixing type

Fixings to perimeter studs/nogs (maximum)

Fixings to intermediatestud (maximum)

600mm 65mm x 10g screw

200mm 300mm

400mm 65mm x 10g screw

200mm 200mm

3.10 FIXING GENERALLY All panel edges must be supported. The screws must be driven perfectly tight against the

panels so that there is no movement between the panels and framing. Use a hand screw driver to finally tighten all screws. The minimum edge distance as per technical specification must be maintained when fixing screws or nails through the rainscreen panels. When countersunk screws are used the screw head must be set between 1.5mm minimum to 2.0mm maximum below the panel surface.

Use James Hardie countersinking drill bit to drill holes in the panel. The drill speed must

be set between 400 and 560 rpm. 3.11 FINISHING SITE CUT EDGES Any penetrations as well as site cut sheet edges must be sealed with an appropriate

sealer that is compatible with the finishing coat. 3.12 FINISHING SEALANTS Apply and use of sealants to manufacturer's instructions. Check with sealant

manufacturer prior to coating over sealants. 3.13 FINISHING SCREW FILLER Fill all countersunk screw holes with an epoxy filler. The countersunk holes must be

clean and dry before they are filled. Ensure that the screws are perfectly tight and there is no movement between the panel and framing before the holes are filled. Use Nuplex Fairing Cream or a similar product for this purpose. Refer to the epoxy manufacturer recommendation before use.

3.14 FINISHING GENERAL Refer to painting section/s for protective coating system. Panels must be coated within

90 days of installation. Soffits 3.15 INSTALL FLUSH JOINTED SOFFIT SHEETS Cut sheets dry and ensure all edges and joints are fully supported. Fit expansion joints to

limit finished areas to 9 metre x 6 metres for large soffits or 7.2 metres for narrow soffits. Flush joints with James Hardie Base Coat, paper reinforcing tape and James Hardie Top Coat to flush width of 180mm. Refer to Eaves and Soffit Linings installation manual.


Completion 3.16 REPLACE Replace all damaged or marked elements. 3.17 LEAVE Leave work to the standard required for following procedures. 3.18 REMOVE Remove debris, unused materials and elements from the site. 4. SELECTIONS For further details on selections go to www.jameshardie.co.nz. 4.1 TIMBER CAVITY BATTENS Timber species: Radiata pine Treatment: H3.1 4.2 JAMES HARDIE - EXOTEC® FACADE PANELS Location: Exterior wet area and opposite wall; Outside Learning Area. Brand/type: James Hardie ExoTec® Facade Panel Thickness: 9mm Fastener type: Screw Fastener finish: 316 Stainless steel, class 4 coated. 4.3 JAMES HARDIE VILLABOARD® - FLUSH JOINTED SOFFIT SHEETS Brand/type: James Hardie Villaboard® Lining soffit system Thickness: 6mm Nails: 40 x 2.8mm HardieFlex™ Nails Finishing 4.4 PAINTING Refer to painting section/s for details.


© CIL Masterspec Aug 2016 DRAFT 4241D DIMOND PROFILED CLADDING

4241D DIMOND PROFILED CLADDING 1. GENERAL This section relates to the supply and fixing of Dimond profiled cladding complete with

accessories. 1.1 RELATED WORK Refer to following: - 3182 TIMBER FRAMING for timber battens and framing. - 4161T THERMAKRAFT UNDERLAYS, FOILS & DPC for underlays. - 4171HR JAMES HARDIE RIGID AIR BARRIERS for pre-cladding rigid linings. - 4821 FLASHINGS for flashings general. 1.2 ABBREVIATIONS The following abbreviations are used throughout this part of the specification: BMT Base metal thickness NZMRM New Zealand Metal Roofing Manufacturers Inc Documents 1.3 DOCUMENTS Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The following

documents are specifically referred to in this section: NZBC E2/AS1 External moisture AS/NZS 1170.2 Structural design actions - Wind actions AS 1397 Continuous hot-dip metallic coated steel sheet and strip - Coatings of

zinc and zinc alloyed with aluminium and magnesium AS 3566 Self-drilling screws for the building and construction industries NZS 3602 Timber and wood-based products for use in building NZS 3604 Timber-framed buildings ISO 9223 Corrosion of metals and alloys - Corrosivity of atmosphere -

Classification determination and estimation NZMRM CoP NZ Metal Roof and Wall Cladding Code of Practice Documents listed above and cited in the clauses that follow are part of this specification.


1.4 MANUFACTURER'S DOCUMENTS Manufacturer's and supplier's documents relating to work in this section are: Web only based: Dimond Roofing and Cladding Systems Manual Available from: Dimond web site Web: www.dimond.co.nz Telephone: 0800 346 663 (0800 DIMOND) Warranties 1.5 WARRANTY - MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER Provide a material manufacturer/supplier warranty: 15 years For failure of coating adhesion 15 years For weatherproofing by material penetration - Provide this warranty on the Dimond standard form. - Commence the warranty from the date of practical completion of the contract works. Refer to the general section 1237 WARRANTIES for additional requirements. 1.6 WARRANTY - INSTALLER/APPLICATOR Provide an installer/applicator warranty: 5 years For workmanship






http://www.dimond.co.nz/


- Provide this warranty on the Metal wall cladding installers' standard form - Commence the warranty from the date of practical completion of the contract works - Include a copy of the Dimond maintenance requirements with the warranty. Refer to the general section 1237 WARRANTIES for additional requirements. Requirements 1.8 QUALIFICATIONS Installers to be Dimond Recommended Installer, or experienced, competent roofers

familiar with Dimond products. And for Restricted Building Work, shall also be an LBP or supervised by an LBP.

Carry out work with experienced, competent installers familiar with the products being used and with appropriate qualifications such as the National Certificate in Metal Roofing and Cladding.

Carry out the cladding work with experienced, competent installers familiar with the

products being used. Performance - Wind 1.9 DESIGN PARAMETERS - NON SPECIFIC DESIGN Building wind zone Extra High / 1.62kPa ULS(refer to NZS 3604, table 5.4) Refer to Dimond for "Wind Load Span Capacity charts". 1.10 FIXINGS, WIND Design and use the fixings/fixing pattern appropriate for the wind design parameters.

Refer to Dimond Technical Information for load span tables and fixing charts for the selected profile. Allow for specific loadings at corners and the periphery of the cladding, where localised pressure factors apply. Fixing pattern to also take into account fixing method and girt/frame spacing.

Performance - General 1.11 PERFORMANCE Install cladding materials in accordance with the NZMRM CoP and Dimond,

requirements for the selected profile, to form a weather-tight performance for the completed cladding system, including all penetrations through the walls and junctions with roofs and parapets.

1.12 SPREAD OF FIRE To NZBC C/AS1-AS7,5.8.2 a) Exterior surface finishes. 1.13 CO-ORDINATE Co-ordinate to ensure substrate and preparatory work is complete and other work

programmed in the order required for access and completion of the walls. Ensure that all necessary members are positioned so that flashings can be fastened at both edges through the cladding to the primary structure.

2. PRODUCTS Materials 2.1 PRE-FINISHED HOT-DIPPED ALUMINIUM/ZINC/MAGNESIUM COATED STEEL Formability steel sheet, G550 for roll forming or G300 for flashings, coated to AS 1397. 2.2 FASTENERS GENERALLY Fixings and fasteners are to be compatible with all materials, the environment and

meeting the requirements of the NZ Building Code. Installation is to be in accordance with E2/AS1 and/or the NZ Metal Roof and Wall Cladding - Code of Practice and Dmond requirements.

For fixing patterns refer to Dimond Fixing Charts for the selected profile.





2.3 FIXING SCREWS To AS 3566. Screws appropriate to the cladding material and the supporting structure,

as required by Dimond and with a minimum Class 4 or 5 durability and not less than the material being fixed. Screw into timber to penetrate by minimum 30mm. Screw fasteners to be head stamped identifying the manufacturer and class. Use Alutite or stainless steel with aluminium based sheets. Refer to SELECTIONS.

2.4 RIVETS Sealed aluminium, minimum diameter 4mm, for use with zinc coated, zinc/aluminium

coated or aluminium cladding. Components 2.5 FLASHINGS GENERALLY Material, grade and colour as detailed and scheduled. Ensure that materials used for

flashings are compatible with the window frame materials and fixings and cladding materials and fixings.

2.6 FLASHINGS To NZBC E2/AS1,4.0 Flashings Formable grade 0.55mm BMT for galvanized,

aluminium/zinc-coated and pre-painted steel, and 0.90 for aluminium to the same standards as the profiled sheets,notched where across profile or provided with a soft edge. Ensure flashing material matches the cladding material.

2.7 WALL AND PARAPET FLASHINGS To NZBC E2/AS1, 4.0 Flashings. Supplied by Dimond to match or to suit the cladding. 2.8 EXTERIOR CAVITY WALL BATTENS Refer to timber framing sections. 2.9 EXTERIOR CAVITY CLOSER/VERMIN-PROOFING Refer to timber framing sections. 2.10 CLOSURE STRIPS Non-bituminous compressible, profiled foam strips to fit the sheet profile. Accessories 2.11 WALL UNDERLAY Refer to 4161 UNDERLAYS, FOIL AND DPC. 2.12 SEALANT Neutral curing MS sealant or MS polymer sealant as required by Dimond and used as

directed. 2.13 LAP SEALING TAPE Closed cell self adhesive nitrile tape. 3. EXECUTION Conditions 3.1 INSPECTION Inspect the wall framing and supporting structure to ensure that it is complete and fully

braced ready for cladding. 3.2 FRAMING TIMBER MOISTURE When continuous metal cladding etc. Runs along a long continuous timber member and

is directly fixed to it, the timbers equilibrium moisture content (EMC) to be 18% or less. For flashings in this situation (sometimes called transverse flashings) the framing EMC to be maximum 16%, and preferably as low as 12%. Transverse flashings can be temporarily tacked in place and final fixing done when moisture content is acceptable.




3.3 STORAGE Take delivery of and accept packs of cladding undamaged on delivery. Reject all

damaged material. Store on a level firm base with packs well ventilated and completely protected from weather and damage. Do not allow moisture to build up between sheets. If sheet packs become wet, fillet or cross stack to allow air movement between sheets.

3.4 HANDLING Avoid distortion and contact with damaging substances, including cement. Do not drag

sheets across each other and other materials. Protect edges and surface finishes from damage.

3.5 SEPARATION Isolate dissimilar materials in close proximity as necessary by painting the surfaces or

fitting separator strips of compatible or inert materials. Place isolators between metals and treated timber and cement based materials. Do not use unpainted lead sheet or copper in contact with or allow water run-off onto galvanized and aluminium/zinc-coated metals, or mixing of aluminium sheet with steel mesh.

Application 3.6 SET-OUT FOR VERTICAL CLADDING Set cladding to vertical plumb lines and maintain verticality. Set all exposed fixings with

horizontal string lines. Carefully set out sheets with side laps away from the main line of sight, and with the widths of end sheets the same. Check during fixing to eliminate creep or spread and to keep fastenings in line.

3.7 SET-OUT FOR HORIZONTAL CLADDING Set cladding starting from the bottom to horizontal level lines and maintained through the

laying process. Set all exposed fixings with vertical string lines. Maintain equal gaps between flashing ends to allow for expansion movement.

3.8 AVOID END LAPS End laps should be avoided, except where specifically detailed. 3.9 MOVEMENT JOINTS Wall fixing and jointing to conform with Dimond requirements for thermal movement.

Over timber framing, transverse flashings (those running along continuous framing members) to have expansion joints at maximum 12.0m centres. Maximum horizontal sheet lengths between vertical joints recommended to be 8m.

3.10 FIXING GENERALLY Install and fix in accordance with the NZMRM CoP, and Dimond required fixing patterns

and details for each area of the building cladding. Use only screws as required by Dimond. Paint colour matched fixings and accessories before installation.

3.11 FIX UNDERLAYS To NZBC E2/AS1. 9.1.7. Fix to framing, with laps and fixing to Dimond requirements.

Make good any damage before or during fixing of cladding before fixing continues. 3.12 INSTALL DRAINED CAVITY 20mm minimum thickness drained cavity to NZBC E2/AS1: 9.0 Wall claddings, where

required. Fix vertical cavity battens to wall framing studs. The battens are fixed by the cladding fixings which will penetrate the wall framing studs over the wall underlay. Seal the top of the cavity and install cavity closer/vermin-proofing at base of wall, open horizontal (or raking) junctions and over openings (windows, meters etc).

3.13 PENETRATIONS Confirm that exterior wall openings have been prepared ready for the installation of all


- wall underlay to openings finished and dressed off ready for the installation of window and door frames and other penetrations





- claddings neatly finished off to all sides of openings - installation of flashings (those required to be installed prior to installation of penetrating

elements). 3.14 MARKING AND CUTTING Cut only by shearing tools. Do not use black lead pencils for marking aluminium/zinc

coated products. Use Blue coloured Zincalume pencil supplied by New Zealand steel. 3.15 FIX SHEETS Fix sheets in place using the fastening system required by Dimond, making due

allowance for dynamic local wind pressures on the building and thermal movement in the sheet.

3.16 INSTALL FLASHINGS Flash to penetrations, cap corners and edges, using sealant and rivets to detail, to

Dimond requirements, NZBC E2/AS1, 4.0 Flashings. Flashings should only be installed onto timber battens with a moisture content less than 18%.

3.17 SEPARATION Separate metal sheeting from CCA treated timber with suitable inert isolation material. 3.18 COMPLETE Ensure the work is complete with all flashings, finishings and trim properly installed so the

cladding system is completely weathertight. Completion 3.19 REPLACE Replace all damaged or marked elements. 3.20 LEAVE Leave this work complete with all necessary flashings and cappings all properly installed

as the work proceeds so the finished cladding is completely weathertight. 3.21 REMOVE Remove debris, unused materials and elements from the site. 4. SELECTIONS For further details on selections go to www.dimond.co.nz Coating system 4.1 COATING SYSTEM - EXPOSURE ZONE D (CAT 4) Project Exposure Zone D to NZS 3604, C 4 to ISO 9223. Profile/location: Main exterior wall cladding Base material: Steel Coating system: Colorsteel Maxx Coating colour: New Denim Blue Cladding 4.2 DIMOND V-RIB CLADDING BMT/material 0.55mm Steel Framing material: Timber Pan fixing: Class 4*, 12-10x50 Type 17 Woodteks with neos , or 12-11x50 Type

17 with neos or M6x50 HG-Z4 Roofzips with neos Fixing pattern: Refer to Dimond V-Rib literature for details Accessories 4.3 FLASHINGS - GENERALLY Profile: Drip Edge Barge; Internal Corner; Bulky Corner, Foot Mould; Sill

Flashing;





BMT/material: 0.9mm Aluminium Coating system: To match cladding Paint colour: To match cladding 4.4 CLOSURE STRIPS Brand: As recommended by manufacturer 4.5 COVERS AND TRIMS Location: Penetrations and openings Material/thickness: Aluminium 0.9mm Aluminium

© CIL Masterspec Aug 2016 DRAFT 4311D DIMOND PROFILED METAL ROOFING

4311D DIMOND PROFILED METAL ROOFING 1. GENERAL This section relates to the supply and fixing of Dimond profiled roofing and includes: - Metal roofing - Duraclad roofing - accessories 1.1 RELATED WORK Refer to the following: - 3821 TIMBER FRAMING for roof framing. - 4161T THERMAKRAFT UNDERLAYS, FOIL AND DPC for underlays, foils and DPC. - 4241D DIMOND PROFILED CLADDING for wall cladding. - 4711 THERMAL INSULATION for roofing insulation. - 4821 FLASHINGS for flashings - 7411MA MARLEY RAINWATER DISPOSAL SYSTEMS. 1.2 ABBREVIATIONS The following abbreviations are used throughout this part of the specification: BMT Base metal thickness NZMRM New Zealand Metal Roofing Manufacturers Inc MS Modified silicone Documents 1.3 DOCUMENTS Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The following

documents are specifically referred to in this section: NZBC E2/AS1 External Moisture AS/NZS 1170.2 Structural design actions - Wind actions AS 1397 Continuous hot-dip metallic coated steel sheet and strip - Coatings of

zinc and zinc alloyed with aluminium and magnesium AS 3566 Self-drilling screws for the building and construction industries NZS 3604 Timber-framed buildings ISO 9223 Corrosion of metals and alloys - Corrosivity of atmosphere -

Classification determination and estimation NZMRM CoP NZ Metal Roof and Wall Cladding - Code of Practice Documents listed above and cited in the clauses that follow are part of this specification.


1.4 MANUFACTURER'S DOCUMENTS Manufacturer's and supplier's documents relating to work in this section are: Web only based: Dimond Roofing and Cladding Systems Manual Available from: Dimond web site Web: www.dimond.co.nz Telephone 0800 346 663 (0800 DIMOND) Warranties 1.5 WARRANTY - MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER Provide a material manufacturer/supplier warranty:. 15 years: for failure of coating adhesion 15 years: for weatherproofing by material penetration - Provide this warranty on Dimond standard form. - Commence the warranty from the date of practical completion of the contract works









Refer to the general section 1237 WARRANTIES for additional requirements. 1.6 WARRANTY - INSTALLER/APPLICATOR Provide an installer/applicator warranty: 5 years from the date of completion of the roof - Provide this warranty on Roofing installers standard form. - Commence the warranty from the date of practical completion of the contract works. Include a copy of the Dimond maintenance requirements with the warranty. Refer to the general section 1237 WARRANTIES - INSTALLER/APPLICATOR for

additional requirements. Provide all relevant Dimond maintenance information on completion of the roofing work,

as required by the GENERAL sections. Requirements 1.8 QUALIFICATIONS Roofers to be Dimond Recommended Installer, or experienced, competent roofers

familiar with Dimond products. And for Restricted Building Work, shall also be an LBP or supervised by an LBP.

Carry out work with experienced, competent installers familiar with the products being used and with appropriate qualifications such as the National Certificate in Metal Roofing and Cladding

Performance - Wind 1.9 DESIGN PARAMETERS - NON SPECIFIC DESIGN Building wind zone: Extra High / 1.62kPa ULS(refer to NZS 3604, table 5.4) Refer to Dimond for "Wind Load Span Capacity charts". 1.10 FIXINGS, WIND Design and use the fixings/fixing pattern appropriate for the wind design parameters.

Refer to Dimond Technical Information for load span tables and fixing charts for the selected profile. Allow for specific loadings at corners and the periphery of the roof, where localised pressure factors apply. Fixing pattern to also take into account fixing method and purlin spacings.

Performance - General 1.11 CO-ORDINATE Co-ordinate to ensure substrate and preparatory work is complete and other work

programmed in the order required for access and completion of the roof. Ensure that all necessary members are positioned so that flashings can be fastened at both edges through the roof profile or cladding to the primary structure.

1.12 PERFORMANCE Select installation method of the roof materials and accept responsibility for the weather-

tight performance of the completed roofing system including penetrations through the roof and junctions with walls and parapets.

2. PRODUCTS Materials 2.1 PRE-FINISHED HOT-DIPPED ALUMINIUM/ZINC/MAGNESIUM COATED STEEL Formability steel sheet, G550 for roll forming or G300 for flashings, coated to AS 1397. Fixings



2.2 FASTENERS GENERALLY Fixings and fasteners are to be compatible with all materials, the environment and

meeting the requirements of the NZ Building Code. Installation is to be in accordance with E2/AS1 and/or the NZ Metal Roof and Wall Cladding - Code of Practice and Dmond requirements.

For fixing patterns refer to Dimond Fixing Charts for the selected profile. 2.3 FIXING SCREWS To AS 3566. Screws appropriate to the roofing material and the supporting structure, as

required by Dimond and with a minimum Class 4 or 5 durability and not less than the material being fixed. Screw into timber to penetrate by minimum 30mm. Screw fasteners to be head stamped identifying the manufacturer and class. Use Alutite or stainless steel with aluminium based sheets. Refer to SELECTIONS.

2.4 RIVETS Sealed aluminium, minimum diameter 4mm, for use with zinc coated, zinc/aluminium

coated or aluminium roofing. Components 2.5 FLASHINGS GENERALLY To NZBC E2/AS1, 4.0 Flashings. Formable grade 0.55 BMT for galvanized, aluminium/zinc, aluminium/zinc/magnesium -

coated and pre-painted steel, and 0.90 for aluminium to the same standards as the profiled sheets, notched where across profile or provided with a soft edge.

2.6 FLASHINGS TO VERGE, RIDGE AND HIP Supplied by the roofing manufacturer to match or to suit the roofing in the same material

as the roof. 2.7 BOOT FLASHINGS Generally to E2/AS1, 8.4.17 Roof penetrations(note; E2/AS1, Figure.54 Soaker

flashing for pipe penetration, has an error, use as guide only) EPDM proprietary pipe flashing laid on 45° bias to roofing, with over-flashing (soaker

flashing) if required. A boot flashing should be positioned so that it dams a roofing pan no more than 50%, if

this cannot be avoided use an over-flashing back to the ridge and fix the boot flashing to that.

2.8 NATURAL LIGHTING Refer to 4312D DIMOND PROFILED GRP NATURAL LIGHTING. Accessories 2.9 WIRE NETTING AND SAFETY MESH Refer to 4161 UNDERLAYS, FOIL AND DPC. 2.10 UNDERLAY AND REFLECTIVE FOIL Refer to 4161 UNDERLAYS, FOIL AND DPC 2.11 SEALANT Neutral curing MS sealant or polymer sealant as required by the roofing manufacturer

and used as directed. 2.12 CLOSURE STRIPS Non-bituminous compressible, profiled foam strips to fit the sheet profile. 2.13 LAP SEALING TAPE Closed cell self adhesive nitrile tape. 3. EXECUTION Conditions



3.1 INSPECTION Inspect the roof framing and supporting structure to ensure that it is complete and fully

braced ready for roofing and free from any misalignments or protrusions that could damage the roofing.

3.2 FRAMING TIMBER MOISTURE When continuous metal cladding etc. Runs along a long continuous timber member and

is directly fixed to it, the timbers equilibrium moisture content (EMC) to be 18% or less. For flashings in this situation (sometimes called transverse flashings) the framing EMC to be maximum 16%, and preferably as low as 12%. Transverse flashings can be temporarily tacked in place and final fixing done when moisture content is acceptable.

3.3 STORAGE Upon delivery, visually inspect all sheets for any damage and accept packs of roofing

undamaged on delivery. Reject all damaged material. Store on a level firm base with packs well ventilated and completely protected from weather and damage. Do not allow moisture to build up between sheets. If sheet packs become wet, fillet or cross stack to allow air movement between sheets.

3.4 HANDLING Avoid distortion and contact with damaging substances, including cement. Do not drag

sheets across each other and other materials. Protect edges and surface finishes from damage. Use soft, flat sole shoes when fixing and for all other work on the roof. Walk along the purlin line whenever possible.

3.5 SEPARATION Isolate dissimilar materials in close proximity as necessary by painting the surfaces or

fitting separator strips of compatible or inert materials. Place isolators between metals and treated timber, cement based materials, and mixing aluminium sheet and steel mesh. Do not use unpainted lead sheet or copper in contact with or allow water run-off onto galvanized or aluminium/zinc coated steel.

Application 3.6 FIX INSULATION Refer to Thermal Insulation sections. 3.7 SET-OUT Carefully set out with consideration of the position of side laps to take account of the

prevailing wind and line of sight. Ensure all sheets are square and oversailing the gutter true to line. Check during fixing to eliminate creep or spread and string lines along purlin centres to keep fastenings in line.

3.8 END LAPS End laps should be avoided, except where specifically detailed. 3.9 THERMAL MOVEMENT For sheet lengths more than 18 metres, make provision for thermal expansion where

required 3.10 FIXING GENERALLY Install and fix in accordance with the Dimond required fixing patterns and details for each

area of the building roofing. Use only screws as required by the roofing manufacturer. Paint colour matched fixings and accessories before installation.

3.11 MARKING AND CUTTING Use chalk line, Chinagraph pencils or coloured pencil for marking roof sheets prior to

cutting. Do not use lead pencil for marking Zincalume®, ZAM®, Colorsteel® and Colorcote®. Cut by shear only, using nibblers or hand snips. Remove all cutting and drilling debris from the roof.


3.12 FIX SHEETS Fix sheets in place using the fastening system required by Dimond for specified profiles,

making due allowance for dynamic local wind pressures on the building and thermal movement in the sheet.

3.13 STOP ENDS AND DOWNTURNS Form stop-ends at the upper end of sheets. Form downturns at the gutter line where the

roof pitch is less than 8 degrees. Form using the required tools. 3.14 FLASHINGS Flash roof to parapets, walls and penetrations to detail. Flashings to be installed on

timber framing with moisture content of less than 18%. Where no detail is provided flash to NZMRM CoP NZ metal roof and wall cladding Code of Practice recommendations and Dimond requirements. Cut accurately and fix using sealant and rivets to detail and to Dimond requirements to form a weatherproof cover. For highly visible flashings, plan joints/junction to take account of the aesthetic requirements.

3.15 SEPARATION Separate metal sheeting from CCA treated timber with an inert isolation material such as

flashing tape, underlayment mat or similar. Contact Dimond for other options. 3.16 USE OF SEALANTS Select and use sealants only as recommended by Dimond. Remove any swarf and clean

down, apply sealant in two narrow beads transversely across flashing intersections, close to the two edges. Avoid exposing sealant on outside surfaces.

3.17 FLASHING PENETRATIONS Flash all penetrations through the roof. Fit pipe flashings with a proprietary collar

flashing, with other penetrations flashed as detailed and to provide a weathertight installation. Ensure that flashings are set to avoid any ponding of water.

Completion 3.18 REPLACE Replace damaged or marked elements. 3.19 LEAVE Leave this work complete with all necessary flashings, undercloaks, valleys, ridges and

hips all properly installed as the work proceeds so the finished roof is completely weathertight.

3.20 REMOVE Remove trade rubbish and unused materials from the roof and surrounds daily during the

work. Sweep down at the end of each day, and clean out spouting, gutters and rainwater pipes on completion of the roof. Remove debris, unused materials and elements from the site.

4. SELECTIONS For further details on selections go to www.dimond.co.nz. Coating system 4.1 COATING SYSTEM - EXPOSURE ZONE D (CAT 4) Project Exposure Zone D to NZS 3604, C 4 to ISO 9223. Profile/location: Dimond V-RIB roof Base material: 0.55mm Steel Coating system: Colorsteel Maxx Paint colour: New Denim Blue Roofing 4.2 DIMOND V-RIB ROOFING BMT/material 0.55mm Steel





Purlin material: Timber Fixing: Class 4*, 14-10x65 Type 17 Woodteks with neos , or 12-11x65 Type

17 with neos or M6x65 HG-Z4 Roofzips with neos. V-Rib load spreading profile Metal and 36mm EPDM.

Fixing pattern: Refer to Dimond V-Rib literature for details Accessories 4.3 FLASHINGS - GENERALLY Profile: Barge Flashing, Eaves Flashing, Gutter Flashing BMT/material: 0.90mm Aluminium Coating system: To match roofing Paint colour: To match roofing 4.4 FLASHINGS - INACCESSIBLE Material/thickness: Aluminium 0.90mm BMT 4.5 CLOSURE STRIPS Brand: As recommended by the manufacturer.

© CIL Masterspec Aug 2016 DRAFT 4383 TIMBER DECKING

4383 TIMBER DECKING 1. GENERAL This section relates to the fabrication and installation of exterior timber - spaced boarding to decks - steps and landings Related work 1.1 RELATED SECTIONS Refer to 3821 TIMBER FRAMING for farming grades Documents 1.2 DOCUMENTS Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The following

documents are specifically referred to in this section: NZBC D1/AS1 Access routes NZBC D1/VM1 Access routes NZS 3602 Timber and wood-based products for use in building NZS 3604 Timber-framed buildings AS/NZS 3661.1 Slip resistance of pedestrian surfaces - Requirements BRANZ BU 497 Stair construction 1.3 MANUFACTURER'S DOCUMENTS The Contractor shall inform themselves and adhere to all documents and specifications

to all products outlined in selections and ensure all information is up to date and current. Performance 1.4 SLIP RESISTANCE FOR ACCESS ROUTES Slip resistance for decking to comply with NZBC D1/AS1: 2.0 Level access routes and

3.0 Ramps; NZS 3604, 7.4.4 Surface. - when in place on a level access route, to have a mean coefficient of friction (µ) not less

than 0.4 when tested in accordance with AS/NZS 3661.1. - when in place on a sloping access route, to have a coefficient of friction (µ) not less

than 0.4 + 0.0125S (S = slope of surface expressed as a percentage). 2. PRODUCTS Materials 2.1 SOLID TIMBER COMPONENTS Selection to NZS 3602. 2.2 HARDWOOD SPACED BOARDING FOR EXTERIOR DECKS Plantation-grown hardwood. Dressed four sides and with arrises, or specifically profiled

decking. Provide a timber sample for review prior to laying. 3. EXECUTION Conditions 3.1 GENERALLY Execution to include those methods, practices and processes contained in the current

syllabus for the National Certificate in Carpentry and the National Certificate in Joinery (cabinetry, exterior joinery, stairs).

Check site dimensions. Carry out machining within the practices recommended for the

particular timber, wood product or pre-finished wood product being used. Machine drill











and cut holes and recesses and form joints to the componentry manufacturer's recommendations. Work to be accurate, square and true to line and face.

3.2 PREPARATION, PRE-COATING For decking to be, stained, sealed or oiled, ensure underside face, edges and cuts of the

decking are pre-coated prior to installation. Refer to SELECTIONS for finish. Application 3.3 FABRICATE AND INSTALL TIMBER STEPS Fabricate and install steps and landings to comply with NZBC D1/AS1:4.0 Stairways, and

unless detailed otherwise to BRANZ BU 497. 3.4 LAYING TIMBER SPACED BOARDING - EXTERIOR DECKS Confirm whether the grooved side of the boards is face up or face down. Avoid

excessively short or long lengths. Drill for all fixings. Stagger end joints. Space narrow boards (<100mm) a minimum of 2mm apart in general conditions, or minimum 3mm to 4mm apart if wide boards (>100mm) or narrow boards that are likely to swell after fixing, or 5mm apart for wide boards that are likely to swell. Leave a 12mm minimum gap between the exterior wall and the adjacent decking board.

3.5 SCREW FIXING Pre-drill for all fixings, where the screws allow, use a proprietary deck pre-drilling and

countersinking tool. Use decking screws and power drive into the deck surface to just slightly below the board

surface (approx. 0.5mm). Take care to not overdrive the screw as this may result in the screw heads or the boards being damaged. Refer to SELECTIONS.

3.6 CORROSION RISKS For exterior timber, timber in damp areas and timber subject to occasional wetting, use

only stainless steel or silicon bronze, fixings and connectors, if decking or framing timber is treated with; Copper Azole (CuAz, Preservative code 58), Alkaline Copper Quaternary (ACQ, Preservative code 90), Micronise Copper Azole (code 88) or Micronised Copper Quaternary (code 89).

Completion 3.7 LEAVE Leave work to the standard required by following procedures. 3.8 REMOVE Remove all debris, unused materials and elements from the site. 4. SELECTIONS 4.1 SLIP RESISTANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR WALKING SURFACES

Location: Stairs and Ramp Slip resistance boarding: Coated and sand / grit impregnated

4.2 EXTERIOR DECKING - HARDWOOD SPACED BOARDING Species: Kwila Decking Timber. Substitution shall not be accepted without

approval Size: 90mm x 19mm Grooved face: Reeded Finish: Cabots Aquadeck Rustic Oak on Kwila. Apply as specified by the

Manufacturer. 4.3 STEPS AND STAIRS Strings: Pinus Radiata / Douglas Fur Treads: Kwila Decking Timber 4.4 SCREW FIXING Location: Through out



Screw type: Stainless steel hidden head screw Screw size: 65 x 10g brown head

© CIL Masterspec Aug 2016 DRAFT 4521AE APL ALUMINIUM WINDOWS & DOORS - EDUCATION FACILITIES

4521AE APL ALUMINIUM WINDOWS & DOORS - EDUCATION FACILITIES

1. GENERAL This section relates to the fabrication, supply and installation of products required to

achieve passive ventilation in schools, manufactured by either Altherm, First or Vantage.

It comprises of: - APL Metro Series aluminium windows and doors for education facilities - APL Magnum Series aluminium doors for education facilities - Hardware and furniture - Flashings and sealants 1.1 RELATED WORK Refer to the following: - 3821 TIMBER FRAMING for timber framing. - 4161T THERMAKRAFT UNDERLAYS, FOILS & DPC for tapes - 4171HR JAMES HARDIE RIGID AIR BARRIERS for pre-cladding. - 4241D DIMOND PROFILED CLADDING for cladding. - 4611VE CSR VIRIDIAN EXTERIOR GLAZING for glazing. - 4811FS FOSROC SEALANTS for sealants - 4821 FLASHINGS for flashings. - 5122 PLYWOOD LININGS for interior linings. 1.2 ABBREVIATIONS AND TERMS SLS Serviceability limit state ULS Ultimate limit state WANZ Windows Association of New Zealand PQAS Powder Coating Quality Assurance System Documents 1.3 DOCUMENTS Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The following

documents are specifically referred to in this section: NZBC E2/AS1 External moisture NZBC F4/AS1 Safety from falling NZBC H1/VM1 Energy efficiency NZBC H1/AS1 Energy efficiency AS/NZS 1580.108.1 Methods of test for paints and related materials -

Determination of dry film thickness on metallic substrates - Non destructive methods

AS/NZS 1170.2 Structural design actions - Wind loads NZS 1170.5 Structural design actions - Earthquake actions - New Zealand AS/NZS 1734 Aluminium and aluminium alloys - Flat sheet, coiled sheet and plate AS/NZS 1866 Aluminium and aluminium alloys - Extruded rod, bar, solid and hollow

shapes AAMA 2604.05 Performance requirements and test procedures for high performance

organic coatings on aluminium extrusions and panels NZS 3604 Timber-framed buildings AS 3715 Metal finishing - Thermoset powder coatings for architectural

applications BS 3900 Methods of tests for paints, Part C5: Determination of film thickness NZS 4211 Specification for performance of windows NZS 4223.3 Glazing in buildings - Human impact safety requirements AS/NZS 4680 Hot-dip galvanized (zinc) coatings on fabricated ferrous articles WANZ Installation Guide The WANZ Guide to Window Installation as described in

E2/AS1 Amendment 5 WANZ PQAS Powder Coating Quality Assurance System

















WANZ SFA 3503-03 Anodic Oxide coatings on wrought aluminium for external architectural application (2005)

BRANZ BU 337 Protecting Window Glass from Surface Damage AAMA 2604 Voluntary specification, performance requirements and test

procedures for high performance organic coatings on aluminium extrusions and panels

AAMA 2605 Voluntary specification, performance requirements and test procedures for superior performing organic coatings on aluminium extrusions and panels

US Federal Specification TT-S-001543A Sealing compound, silicone rubber base (for caulking, sealing and

glazing in buildings and other structures) TT-S-00230C Sealing compound, elastomeric type, single component (for caulking,

sealing and glazing in buildings and other structures) 1.4 MANUFACTURER'S DOCUMENTS Manufacturer's and supplier's documents relating to work in this section are contained

within: Altherm Specifier's Guide First Specifier's Guide Vantage Specifier's Guide Copies of the above literature are available from: Web: www.altherm.co.nz www.firstwindows.co.nz www.vantagejoinery.com www.aplnz.co.nz Email: [email protected] Telephone: 09 309 3251 Facsimile: 09 309 3298 Warranties 1.5 WARRANTY - MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER Provide a material manufacturer/fabricator warranty: 5 years: For fabrication Refer to the general section for the required form of 1237WA WARRANTY AGREEMENT

and details of when completed warranty must be submitted. 1.6 WARRANTY - INSTALLER/APPLICATOR Provide an installer/applicator warranty: 2 years: For installation - Provide this warranty in the installer/applicator standard form. Refer to the general section 1237 WARRANTIES for additional requirements. Requirements 1.9 QUALIFICATIONS Work to be carried out by tradesmen experienced, competent and familiar with the

materials and techniques specified. 1.10 COMPLIANCE Windows and doors to be manufactured and installed to NZBC E2/AS1. 1.11 SHOP DRAWINGS Shop drawings to show the general arrangement of the aluminium joinery including, but

not be limited to: Construction details (minimum scale 1:5) showing the interface between joinery elements

and the building structure including: -


http://www.altherm.co.nz/

http://www.firstwindows.co.nz/

http://www.vantagejoinery.com/

http://www.aplnz.co.nz/



- Jointing details and method of fixing between individual elements and between this installation and adjacent work

- Interaction between claddings and linings - Flashing details - Sealants and air seals - Non standard fixing details including bracketing And where required the following: - - Design calculations - Producer Statement in the form PS1 Producer Statement Design - Rebate sizes - Dimensions of all typical elements and of any special sizes and shapes - Provision for the exclusion and/or drainage of moisture - Provision for adjustment of fixings to ensure true alignment of windows and doors - Sealant types and full size sections of all sealants and backing rods - Provision for thermal movement - Provision for seismic movement and movement under wind loads - Sequence of installation - Glazing specification and details Where requested provide the following additional information - Information of Professional Indemnity Insurance held by the person providing the

calculations and shop drawings Complete shop drawing review before commencing fabrication. 1.12 CERTIFICATION Provide evidence of a certificate by a laboratory accredited by International Accreditation

of New Zealand that the windows and doors offered comply with the requirements of NZS 4211.

Performance 1.13 PERFORMANCE - WINDOWS AND DOORS To NZS 4211, including: - deflection, opening sashes, air infiltration, water penetration, ultimate strength, torsional

strength of sashes, marking. Refer to SELECTIONS. 1.14 STRUCTURAL/WEATHER-TIGHTNESS The structural and weather-tight performance of the completed joinery, the glazing and

infill panels is the responsibility of the window fabricator. Performance - Wind (design by contractor) 1.15 DESIGN PARAMETERS WIND - DESIGN BY CONTRACTOR Design the installation to the manufacturer's requirements and as appropriate for the

project wind design stated in the general section 1220 PROJECT. Finishes 1.16 CERTIFY COATINGS - POWDER COATING Certify on request, compliance with this specification and support with control and

sampling records. Test for film thickness to BS 3900, part C5, method No. 4, using method (b) or to AS/NZ 1580.108.1 for certifying thickness and method (a) where any dispute arises as to the thickness provided.

The coating should be applied by an applicator who can certify that the coating has been applied in accordance with the specification.

2. PRODUCTS





2.1 WINDOWS - METRO SERIES Metro series windows; sliding, awning and casement. Refer to SELECTIONS for type

and finish. 2.2 DOORS - METRO SERIES Metro series doors; sliding. Refer to SELECTIONS for type and finish. Materials 2.3 ALUMINIUM EXTRUSIONS Alloy designation to comply with AS/NZS 1866. Branded and extruded for anodising or

powder coating. 2.4 ALUMINIUM SHEET AND STRIP Complying with AS/NZS 1734 of suitable thickness. Rolled for anodising or powder

coating. Alloy designation: 5251 - H16 or 5005 - H16 2.5 STAINLESS STEEL SHEET AND STRIP Type: 316 austenitic steel Finish grade: 2B (satin lustre) 2.6 GLASS Refer to the glazing section for glass types and installation. Reveals 2.7 REVEALS - TIMBER PAINTED Timber reveals for paint finish with all sides primed, grooved for wall linings or flush

finished for architraves. Accessories 2.8 SEISMIC SUB-FRAMES Where required units to have seismic sub-frames. Refer to NZS 1170.5. Refer to

SELECTIONS for requirements 2.9 FLASHINGS GENERALLY To NZBC E2/AS1, 9.1.10 Windows and Doors. Material, grade and colour of head

flashings to match the window frames. Ensure that materials used for head, jamb and sill flashings are compatible with the window frame materials and fixings, and cladding materials.

Components for installation - direct fix systems 2.10 SILL PAN FLASHING To NZBC E2/AS1, 9.1.10.5 Window and Door Sills. Flashing for direct fix claddings to

collect and drain water that may penetrate through the window or door unit. Size to extend from the inner most point of the aluminium frame out over the external face of the cladding.

2.11 WANZ SUPPORT ANGLE A Standard aluminium support angle for use below the sill pan for deeper claddings to

transfer the weight of the window back to the frame. Size to suit cladding thickness. Components for installation - cavity systems 2.12 STANDARD CAVITY CLOSER A device constructed from either aluminium or PVC to close the cavity above the window

or door unit, between the cladding and head flashing, to provide ventilation in accordance with NZBC E2/AS1 to the spaces above the window or door.








2.13 WANZ SUPPORT BAR Extruded aluminium support bar with built in drainage and ventilation to NZBC E2/AS1, to

provide continuous support to the window unit. Size to suit cladding type. Components 2.14 GLAZING GASKETS Thermoplastic rubber. Do not stretch glazing gaskets during installation. Measure and

cut gaskets 5-10% over length before installation. 2.15 HARDWARE AND FURNITURE Hinges, stays, catches, fasteners, latches, locks and furniture as offered by the window

and door manufacturer. Refer to SELECTIONS for type and finish. Key alike all lockable window hardware that is able to be keyed alike.

2.16 SAFETY STAYS Stainless steel non releasable restrictors to limit window opening to NZBC F4/AS1, Table

2, Acceptable opening sizes for barriers. 2.17 FIXING BRACKETS Designed by manufacturer to specific design. Sealants 2.18 STRUCTURAL SEALANT Silicone chemically curing sealant specifically formulated and tested or approved

equivalent with not less than a ± 40% movement factor complying with US Federal Specification TT-S-001543A.

2.19 WEATHERING/INSTALLATION SEALANT Building sealant used in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for weather sealing

aluminium frames to the cladding, complying with US Federal Specification TT S 0011534A, or a one-part polyurethane moisture curing, elastic joint sealant of medium modulus (± 25% movement) to US Federal Specification TT S 00230C.

Finishes 2.20 TRADITIONAL ANODISED ALUMINIUM To WANZ SFA 3503-03. Refer to SELECTIONS for thickness and colour. 3. EXECUTION Conditions - generally 3.1 DO NOT DELIVER Do not deliver to site any elements which cannot be unloaded immediately into suitable

conditions of storage. 3.2 UNLOAD WINDOW JOINERY Unload, handle and store elements in accordance with the window manufacturer's

requirements. 3.3 AVOID DISTORTION Avoid distortion of elements during transit, storage and handling. 3.4 PREVENT DAMAGE Store windows and doors on site in a clean and dry environment in such a manner as to

prevent damage to prefinished surfaces. Stack the units in a vertical position resting on their sills, with layers interleaved between to prevent rubbing. Keep paper and cardboard wrappings dry.

3.5 PROPRIETARY ELEMENTS Fix in accordance with the window manufacturer's requirements.





Conditions - fixings and fastenings 3.6 SUPPLY OF FIXINGS Use only fixings and fastenings recommended by the manufacturer of the component

being fixed and to comply with the ULS wind pressure stated in SELECTIONS. Ensure fixings and fastenings exposed to the weather are of aluminium or Type 316 stainless steel, or if not exposed to the weather may they be hot-dip galvanized steel with a coating weight of 610 g/m² complying with AS/NZS 4680.

3.7 INSTALLATION FIXING To NZBC E2/AS1, 9.1.10.8, Attachments for windows and doors. Fix windows/doors

through reveal to frame with a pair of 75 x 3.15mm minimum galvanized jolt head nails or a pair of 8 gauge x 65mm minimum stainless steel screws. Fix at a maximum of 450mm centres along all reveals and a maximum of 150mm from reveal ends. Ensure fixings do not penetrate metal flashings.

Install packers between reveals and framing at fixing points, except at the head. Assembly 3.8 FABRICATION Fabricate frames as detailed on shop drawings. Install fixing brackets, glazing, hinges,

stays and running gear as scheduled. Provide temporary bracing and protection. Temporarily secure all opening elements for transportation.

3.9 TIMBER / PVC REVEALS Before fixing to aluminium frames, ensure that timber reveals which are being painted

have been primed on all surfaces. Securely fix reveals through aluminium fin. 3.10 HARDWARE GENERALLY Factory fit all required and scheduled hardware. Account for all keys and deliver

separately to the site manager. 3.11 SAFETY STAYS Factory fit safety stays to all windows scheduled for safety stays and to all windows

where safety stays are required to comply with NZBC F4/AS1 4.0, Opening windows. Installation - windows and doors 3.12 CORROSION PROTECTION Before fixing, apply suitable barriers of bituminous coatings, stops or underlays between

dissimilar metals in contact, or between aluminium in contact with concrete. 3.13 CONFIRM PREPARATION OF EXTERIOR WALL OPENINGS Confirm that exterior wall openings have been prepared ready for the installation of all

window and door frames. Do not proceed with the window and door installation until required preparatory work has been completed.

Required preparatory work includes the following: - wall cladding underlay/building wrap to openings finished and dressed off ready for the

installation of window and door frames to NZBC E2/AS1:9.1.5 Wall underlays to wall openings.

- full height 20mm jamb battens to NZBC E2/AS1 figure 72A (direct fix only) - claddings neatly finished off to all sides of openings - installation of flashings (those which are required to be installed prior to frames). - application of waterproof sealer to all door and window sills in concrete floor or concrete

sill situations. To door sills only, apply a suitable membrane over the sealer. - all in accordance with the shop drawings, where applicable. 3.14 INSTALLATION Fix to comply with the reviewed shop drawings and installation details including flashings

and bedding compounds, pointing sealants and weathering sealants.







3.15 INSTALLATION DIRECT FIX Install to window manufacturers details and drawings including sill pans to window and

door units. 3.16 INSTALLATION CAVITY CONSTRUCTION Install to WANZ Installation Guide details and drawings including WANZ sill support bars. For thresholds with support bars fixed through membranes, pre-fill support bar screw

holes with silicone sealant to NZBC E2/AS1, figure 62(d). 3.17 INSTALL FLASHINGS Install flashings to heads, jambs and sills of frames as supplied and required by the

window manufacturer and as detailed on the drawings. Finish head flashings to match window finish.

Place all flashings so that the head flashing weathers the jamb flashings, which in turn

weathers over the upstand of the sill flashing. Ensure that sill flashings drain to the outside air.

Except where window/door frames are recessed, ensure that head flashings over-sail unit

by 20mm plus any jamb scriber width at each end. 3.18 COMPLETE AIR SEAL To NZBC E2/AS1:9.1.6 Air seals. Form an air-tight seal by means of proprietary

expanding foam or sealants used with PEF backing rods, applied between the window / door reveal and structural framing to a depth of 10 - 20mm, to provide a continuous air tight seal to the perimeter of the window or door.

3.19 FIX HARDWARE Fix all sash and door hardware and furniture as scheduled. Application - jointing and sealing 3.20 SEAL FRAMES ON SITE Seal frames to each other and to adjoining structure and finishes, to the requirements of

the window and sealant manufacturer and to make the installation weathertight. In very high and extra high or greater wind zones, seal between the window head and the head flashing. Do not seal the junction between the sill member and the cladding or sill flashing which must remain open.

3.21 PREPARE JOINTS Ensure joints are dry. Remove loose material, dust and grease. Prepare joints in

accordance with the sealant manufacturer's requirements, using required solvents and primers where necessary. Mask adjoining surfaces which would be difficult to clean if smeared with sealant.

3.22 BACK UP When using back-up materials do not reduce depth of joint for sealant to less than the

minimum required by the manufacturer of the sealant. Insert polyethylene rod or tape back-up behind joints being pointed with sealant.

3.23 SEALANT FINISH Tool sealant to form a smooth fillet with a profile and dimensions required by the sealant

manufacturer. Remove excess sealant from adjoining surfaces, using the cleaning materials nominated by the sealant manufacturer and leave clean.

Completion - cleaning 3.24 REMOVE TRADE DEBRIS Remove trade debris by appropriate means on a floor by floor basis as each floor is

completed and again before any work is covered up by others. Arrange for general removal.





3.25 TRADE CLEAN Trade clean window frames, operable windows and doors, glass and other related

surfaces inside and out at the time of installation to remove marks, dust and dirt, to enable a visual inspection of all surfaces.

Completion 3.26 PROTECTIVE COVERINGS Retain protective coverings and coatings and keep in place during the fixing process.

Provide protective coverings and coatings where required to prevent marking of surfaces visible in the completed work and to protect aluminium joinery from following trades. Remove protection on completion.

3.27 ADDITIONAL PROTECTION Supply and fix additional protection as necessary to prevent marking of surfaces which

will be visible on completed work. 3.28 REPLACE Replace damaged, cracked or marked elements. 3.29 IN - SITU TOUCH-UP TO POWDER COATED ALUMINIUM In situ touch-up of polyester or fluoropolymer coated aluminium is only permitted to minor

surface scratching. Otherwise replace all damaged material. 3.30 SAFETY Indicate the presence of transparent glasses for the remainder of the contract period, with

whiting, tape or signs compatible with the glass type. Indicators other than whiting must not be applied to the glass surface. Masking tape must not be used for this purpose.

3.31 MANIFESTATIONS To NZS 4223.3, 2.2 Manifestation (making glass visible). 4. SELECTIONS 4.1 SUPPLY AND INSTALLATION Supply and installation of the specified APL aluminium joinery system. Supply: By fabricator Installation: By fabricator Performance 4.2 THERMAL PERFORMANCE R-value: R0.26 (as determined from NZBC H1/VM1 or H1/AS1). 4.3 AIR INFILTRATION For NZS 4211, table 3 Air infiltration. Non-air conditioned zones (passive ventilation): Throughout Air conditioned zones: none 4.4 APL SEISMIC SUB-FRAME The following units to have seismic sub-frames.

Windows No: Seismic movement to be provided for

none none

Performance - Wind (design by contractor) 4.5 DESIGN PARAMETERS - NON SPECIFIC DESIGN Building wind zone Extra High (refer to NZS 3604, table 5.1). Finishes






4.6 TRADITIONAL ANODIZED ALUMINIUM FINISH Thickness grade: 20 microns Colour: Grey Glazing 4.7 EXTERIOR SINGLE GLAZING Location: Glazed doors Type/details: Grade A safety Toughened Laminated 4.8 MANIFESTATIONS Location: at 800mm Type/details: Frosted Vinyl Flashings and Sealant 4.9 FLASHINGS Material/type: Aluminium / Sill, head and jamb Pattern: Formed to suit details provided 4.10 WEATHERING SEALANT Type: 1-part polyurethane moisture curing, elastic joint sealant Colour: dark grey Reveals 4.11 TIMBER JAMB REVEALS Timber species: Radiata Pine or Douglas fur Grade/treatment: H1.2 Thickness: 25mm min Reveals: Flush Finish: Clear polyurethane Windows - Metro Series 4.12 APL METRO SERIES - AWNING WINDOW Brand: Metro Series Window No: In lieu of louvre windows Facing: 40mm Fasteners: Styline Wedge, face fixed 4.13 APL METRO SERIES - CASEMENT WINDOW Brand: Metro Series Window No: In lieu of louvre windows Facing: 40mm Fasteners: Styline Wedge, face fixed 4.14 APL METRO SERIES - SLIDING WINDOW Brand: Metro Series Window No: in Lieu of Louvre windows Sash section: 38mm deep Sill section: Flushline sill Lock stile: 88mm wide (min) Hardware: D pull (inside) Mortice parrot-beak hook deadbolt (Iseo 7814) Snib turn (inside only) Hardware finish: Anodised Doors - Metro Series 4.15 APL METRO SERIES - SLIDING DOOR Brand: Metro Series Door No: Through out


Door section: 38mm deep Door stile: 88mm wide (min) Sill section: Flushline sill Hardware: D pull Mortice hook deadbolt Finger turn (inside only) Hardware finish: Anodised Additional Hardware 4.16 WINDOW HARDWARE Window fastener: Standard

Location Item

Through out Safety stays - non releasable

Safety stays - disconnectable

Through out Sash locks

4.17 DOOR HARDWARE Locks & handles: Standard Miro

Location Item

All doors Parliament hinges

All doors Hold back devices

All classroom doors Patio bolts

none Door restrictors

4.18 HARDWARE FINISH Finish: Powder coat Colour: Matching Grey to architects approval 4.19 LOUVRE WINDOW SYSTEM Brand/Type Breezeway® Altair® Louvre Windows. Colour/Finish Slate Matt Blue Glass Panes 152mm panes Frosted to min 800mm then Clear glass to head to all

floor to ceiling windows. Accessories Manual pull connection shaft to high level multiple louvre windows. Strong Hold Louvre system Low profile pull Key lock system

© CIL Masterspec Aug 2016 DRAFT 4585WC WCS WINDOW & VENTILATION CONTROL SYSTEMS

4585WC WCS WINDOW & VENTILATION CONTROL SYSTEMS 1. GENERAL This section relates to Window Control Systems window control hardware. It includes; Shaft & Lever - Shaft & Lever is a classical window control system that provides robust, reliable and

economical window control operation. There are two options available: Manual Shaft & Lever and Electric Shaft & Lever.

Natural Ventilation - Natural ventilation is the process of supplying and removing air through an indoor space

without using mechanical systems. The windows should be on high-level places (usually 1.8m or more above finished floor level) in an attempt to create a cross-ventilation effect. Two advanced options are available:

Automated Natural Ventilation - Automated Window control system is an advanced window control solution, enabling

windows to automatically open or close, depending on the input from the environment. Window automation is achieved via the application of sensors.

Integrated Natural Ventilation - Integrated Window Control System is an advanced window control solution, integrating

windows with either Building Management System (BMS) as a focal point of all Mechanical services within the building, or by integrating an individual Mechanical service (air-conditioning, central / underfloor heating, etc).

1.1 RELATED WORK Refer to 4521AE APL ALUMINIUM WINDOWS & DOORS EDUCATION FACILITIES for

Breezway louvre windows. Documents 1.2 DOCUMENTS Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The following

documents are specifically referred to in this section: NZBC E2 /AS1 External moisture AS/NZS 1170.2 Structural design actions - Wind loads AS 3715 Metal finishing - Thermoset powder coatings for architectural

applications NZS 4211 :1985 Performance of windows BRANZ BU 337 Protecting Window Glass from Surface Damage 1.3 MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER DOCUMENTS Manufacturer's and supplier's documents relating to this part of the work: Contact Window Control Systems for relevant documents, also refer to

www.windowcontrolsystems.co.nz Manufacturer/supplier contact details Company: Window Control Systems Web: www.windowcontrolsystems.co.nz Email: [email protected] Telephone: 0800 226 687, 09 631 1061 Warranties 1.4 WARRANTY - MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER Provide a material manufacturer/supplier warranty: 2 years For operation and durability - Provide this warranty on the manufacturer/supplier standard form.




http://www.windowcontrolsystems.co.nz/



- Commence the warranty from the date of practical completion of the contract works. Refer to the general section 1237 WARRANTIES for additional requirements. 1.5 WARRANTY - INSTALLER/APPLICATOR Provide an installer/applicator warranty: 2 years For installation - Provide this warranty on the installer/applicator standard form. - Commence the warranty from the date of practical completion of the contract works. Refer to the general section 1237 WARRANTIES for additional requirements. Requirements 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS Installers to be experienced, competent trades people familiar with the materials and

techniques specified. 1.8 SAMPLES Refer to the general section 1270 CONSTRUCTION for details of how samples will be

reviewed. Provide the following samples for review by the Contract Administrator: Bar and connection lever. 1.9 SHOP DRAWINGS Refer to the general section 1235 SHOP DRAWINGS for the requirements for submission

and review and the provision of final shop drawings. Provide shop drawings to show the general arrangement including, but not be limited to: High level windows in internal learning areas. If requested provide the following additional information: Brochures & technical information. Submit shop drawings for review to CIIC special projects unit. - 10 working days (at least) before fabrication is planned to commence, provide shop

drawings for review. - Complete shop drawing review before commencing fabrication. 1.10 AS BUILT DOCUMENTS Refer to the general section 1238 AS BUILT DOCUMENTATION for the requirements for

submission and review of as built documents and records. Provide the following as built documents and records: - Provide draft as built information prior to practical completion. - Provide final as built information prior to the end of the defects liability period. 1.11 INFORMATION FOR OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE Refer to the general section 1239 OPERATION & MAINTENANCE for provision of the

following general operation and maintenance information as electronic PDF format documents:

- Warranty information - Safety data sheet. - Operations and maintenance manual - Contact details for supplier and installer. Provide this information prior to practical completion.


1.12 SPARES AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS Provide spares and maintenance materials listed in SELECTIONS to the Principal for

ongoing maintenance requirements. Compliance information 1.13 INFORMATION REQUIRED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE Provide the following compliance documentation: - - Applicators approval certificate from the manufacturer / importer / distributor - Manufacturer's / suppliers warranty - Installer's / applicator's warranty - Producer Statement - Construction from the applicator / installer - Producer Statement - Construction Review from an acceptable suitably qualified person - Other information required by the BCA in the Building Consent Approval documents. Performance - Wind (design by contractor) 1.14 DESIGN PARAMETERS WIND - DESIGN BY CONTRACTOR Design the installation to the manufacturer's requirements and as appropriate for the

project wind design stated in the general section 1220 PROJECT. Quality control and assurance 1.15 INSPECTIONS the Contractor is required to carry out or engage consultants to carry out inspections of

parts of the work. It will typically be expected that the person carrying out the inspections will be required to provide producer statements in support of the work carried out

2. PRODUCTS Shaft and lever 2.1 SHAFT AND LEVER WINDOW OPENERS, ELECTRIC & MANUAL Designed for use on high level windows (2.0m or more from finished floor level), shaft

and lever is operated from a gearbox at a convenient height with electric operation being a common option. Suitable for controlling large windows and those in high wind areas.

Maximum number of sashes with 2 arms: 6. Maximum number of sashes with 1 arm: 8. Maximum shaft length: 7500mm. Maximum riser height: 5400mm. Powdercoat finish colours available: Black/White/Grey. Colour selection from colour range. Refer SELECTIONS. 2.2 MANUAL SHAFT AND LEVER End control, left hand and right hand. Intermediate control. Central control. Operating gear complete with gearbox, handle, riser rod, arms, bearings and shaft. Mount handle to control gear. Refer to SELECTIONS. 3. EXECUTION Conditions 3.1 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Take delivery of materials and goods and store on-site and protect from damage. Protect finished surfaces, edges and corners from damage. Move/handle goods in accordance with manufacturer's requirements. Reject and replace goods that are damaged. 3.2 PRE-INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS Check work previously carried out and confirm it is of the required standard for this part of

the work.


Installation/application 3.3 STANDARDS AND TOLERANCES Refer to the general section 1270 CONSTRUCTION for general requirements. 3.4 SHAFT AND LEVER WINDOW INSTALLATION - MANUAL Install manual shaft and lever window operating gear strictly in accordance with Window

Control Systems recommendations. Install to high level opening sashes mounted on non-friction stays. Purpose build manual

shaft and lever window operating gear to suit the sash configuration, size, weight and wind loading.

Install projected windows with non-friction stays or hinges. Opening controlled to 270mm

of travel. Two arms per sash fitted to jambs on sashes over 1000mm wide or one arm fitted to the sill for sashes under 1000mm.

Completion 3.5 ROUTINE CLEANING Carry out routine trade cleaning of this part of the work including periodic removal of all

debris, unused and temporary materials and elements from the site. 3.6 DEFECTIVE OR DAMAGED WORK Repair damaged or marked elements. Replace damaged or marked elements where

repair is not possible or will not be acceptable. Adjust operation of equipment and moving parts not working correctly. Leave work to the standard required for following procedures.

3.7 PROTECTION Provide the following temporary protection of the finished work: Protection from dust, scratches and potential damage. Commissioning 3.8 FINAL INSPECTION AND TESTING Perform commissioning, include; - Testing - Sign-off and certification of the system and its components - Provide all technical documentation of equipment - Presence at the initial system activation 3.9 HANDOVER Supply end of project documentation, include a minimum of the following; - Wiring diagrams - Product datasheets - Installation instructions - As-built drawings - End-user manuals - Maintenance requirements - Service and maintenance schedule 4. SELECTIONS For further details on selections go to www.windowcontrolsystems.co.nz Materials 4.1 SHAFT AND LEVER WINDOW SYSTEM - MANUAL

Window number

W1 W2 W3 W4

Product: right hand side left hand side right hand side left hand side

Model: Manual Shaft & Lever

Manual Shaft & Lever





Control position:

N/A N/A N/A N/A

Handle mounting height:

Bottom Bottom Bottom Bottom

Colour: Anodised aluminium

Anodised aluminium

Anodised aluminium

Anodised aluminium

Other components:

N/A N/A N/A N/A

Spares and maintenance materials 4.2 SPARES AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS Provide the following spares and maintenance materials:

Item/quantity: 2 x Manual Shaft & Lever

Deliver to: Cook Islands Investment Corporation

© CIL Masterspec Aug 2016 DRAFT 4611VE CSR VIRIDIAN EXTERIOR GLAZING

4611VE CSR VIRIDIAN EXTERIOR GLAZING 1. GENERAL This section relates to the supply and fixing of Viridian products for external joinery in

complex residential and commercial buildings, including: - window and doors - curtain wall systems - balustrade systems - canopies - screens 1.1 RELATED WORK Refer to 4521AE APL ALUMINIUM WINDOWS & DOORS EDUCATION FACILITIES for

for windows and door frame. Documents 1.2 DOCUMENTS Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The following

documents are specifically referred to in this section: NZBC F4/AS1 Safety from falling NZBC H1/AS1 Energy Efficiency AS/NZS 1170.2 Structural design actions - Wind loads NZS 3604 Timber-framed buildings NZS 4211 Specification for performance of windows NZS 4218 Thermal insulation - Housing and Small Buildings NZS 4223.1 Glazing in buildings - Glass selection and glazing NZS 4223.Supp1 Glazing in buildings - Supplement 1 to NZS 4223.1:2008 and NZS

4223.4:2008 NZS 4223.3 Glazing in buildings - Human impact safety requirements NZS 4223.4 Glazing in buildings - Wind, dead, snow and live action NZS 4243.1 Energy Efficiency - Large Buildings - Building thermal envelope AS/NZS 2208 Safety glazing materials in buildings AS/NZS 4666 Insulating glass units BRANZ BU 337 Protecting window glass from damage 1.3 MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER DOCUMENTS Manufacturer's and supplier's documents relating to work in this section are: Viridian Architectural Glass Guide Manufacturer/supplier contact details Company: CSR Viridian Web: www.viridianglass.com Email: [email protected] Telephone: 0800 80 80 60 Warranties 1.4 WARRANTY - MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER Provide a material manufacturer/supplier warranty: 10 years: For insulating glass units 5 years: For laminated glass - Provide the warranty in the standard form in the general section 1237WA WARRANTY

AGREEMENT. - Commence the warranty from the date of practical completion of the contract works. Refer to the general section 1237 WARRANTIES for additional requirements. Requirements

















http://www.viridianglass.com/


1.5 SAMPLES Submit 150 mm square samples of selected glasses for review. Performance 1.6 THERMAL STRESS ANALYSIS Obtain the glass manufacturer's thermal stress analysis for spandrel panels and for

tinted, reflective and other solar control vision glasses for review before placing final order.

1.7 ENERGY EFFICIENCY Provide glazing to meet the energy requirements of, NZS 4218 and NZBC H1/AS1 for

small buildings, or NZS 4243.1 for large buildings. Refer to SELECTIONS and schedules for location and type of glazing.

2. PRODUCTS Materials 2.2 TOUGHENED GLASS Grade A safety glazing material to AS/NZS 2208. Components, general 2.3 JOINTING, PUTTY AND SEALING MATERIALS Ensure jointing, putty and sealing materials compatible with glass substrates. Confirm

compatibility with laminated glass, IGU's and glass coatings. Components, aluminium glazing 2.4 GLAZING TAPE AND GASKETS Single/double sided pressure sensitive self-adhesive low/medium/high density foam

tapes/butyl tapes selected to suit the glazing detail to window manufacturers' requirements.

2.5 SETTING BLOCKS Santoprene/Neoprene, 80-90 Shore A hardness, set at quarter points or to detail, to

support the weight of glass panes. 3. EXECUTION Conditions 3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS To NZS 4223.1, NZS 4223.2, NZS 4223.3 and NZS 4223.4. All external glazing to be

wind and watertight on completion. 3.2 DELIVERY Keep glass dry and clean during delivery and bring on to site when ready to glaze directly

into place. Comply also with the storage requirements set out in BRANZ BU 337. 3.3 GLASS CONDITION All glass of accurate size with clean, undamaged edges and surfaces. 3.4 GLASS THICKNESS If not specifically stated in the glazing schedule determine the minimum thickness of

glass for each sheet as required by NZS 4223.1, NZS 4223.3, NZS 4223.4, and NZS 4223 Supp 1. For windows tested to NZS 4211, ensure glass meets the requirements of the window testing.

Determine the final glass thickness based on whether wind loading or human impact

considerations govern.
















3.5 REBATE DIMENSIONS Provide rebates for glazing to the widths and depths necessary for each situation

including minimum glass edge cover to NZS 4223.1, Section 4, Glazing. Conditions - human impact safety requirements 3.6 SAFETY GLAZING, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Glazing of doors, side panels, low level and window seat glazing, bathrooms, stairwell

landings and similar locations, to NZS 4223.3 for thickness and maximum areas of safety glass.

3.7 SAFETY GLAZING MATERIAL Use only safety glazing materials defined in NZS 4223.3, that also comply with the

relevant requirements of AS/NZS 2208. Ensure material is permanently marked and if cut by the distributor or installer mark each piece to NZS 4223.3, 2.8 Identification.

3.8 CONTAINMENT Edge cover to comply with NZS 4223.1, Section 4 Glazing, table 5. Otherwise to NZS

4223.3, 2.3 Edge cover. Assembly 3.9 WORKING OF GLASS All working of glass as required in NZS 4223.1. 3.10 EDGE WORK AND BEVELLING Edgework other than a clean cut. Refer to SELECTIONS/drawings for type. 3.11 SURFACE TREATMENT Refer to SELECTIONS/drawings for finish. 3.12 SURFACE CUTTING Refer to SELECTIONS/drawings for finish. Application aluminium 3.13 INSTALL GLASS TO ALUMINIUM FRAMES Install glass to NZS 4223.1. - Bead glaze to Section 4, Glazing. - Channel glaze to Section 4, Glazing, Section 5 Framed, Unframed, Partly Framed

Glass Assemblies. 3.14 INSTALL SAFETY GLASS To NZS 4223.3. Finishing 3.15 SAFETY Indicate the presence of transparent glasses for the remainder of the construction period,

with whiting, tape or signs compatible with the glass type. Indicators other than whiting must not be applied to the glass surface.

3.16 MANIFESTATIONS To NZS 4223.3, 2.2 Manifestation (making glass visible). Completion 3.17 TRADE CLEAN Clean off or remove safety indicators at completion of the building. 3.18 REPLACE Replace damaged, cracked or marked elements.














3.19 LEAVE Leave work to the standard required by following procedures. 3.20 REMOVE Remove debris, unused materials and elements from the site. 4. SELECTIONS For further details on selections go to www.viridianglass.com Performance - wind 4.1 WIND ZONE - NON-SPECIFIC DESIGN Building wind zone: EH (Extra High wind Speed 55m/s) (as determined from NZS 3604,

NZS 4223.4) Glass by type 4.2 VLAM™ TOUGH™ SAFETY GLASS Location: Through out Brand/pattern: VLAM™ TOUGH™ safety glass Thickness: 10.38mm

http://www.viridianglass.com/



© CIL Masterspec Aug 2016 DRAFT 4711 THERMAL INSULATION

4711 THERMAL INSULATION 1. GENERAL This section relates to materials installed, laid, hung or fitted as thermal insulation to the

building fabric. 1.1 RELATED WORK Refer to the following: - 3821 TIMBER FRAMING for timber framing. - 4231HF JAMES HARDIE FACADE PANEL CLADDING for soffit cladding. - 4311D DIMOND PROFILED METAL ROOFING for roofing over. - 4721 ACOUSTIC INSULATION for acoustic insulation. - 4161T THERMAKRAFT UNDERLAYS, FOIL AND DPC for wall underlays, roofing

underlays, foils and films. Refer to roofing sections for roofing underlays. 1.2 ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS Refer to the general section 1232 INTERPRETATION & DEFINITIONS for abbreviations

and definitions used throughout the specification. The following abbreviations apply specifically to this section: BIB Building Insulation Blanket (term used by some manufacturers) EPS Expanded polystyrene sheets Documents 1.3 DOCUMENTS Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The following

documents are specifically referred to in this section: NZBC H1/AS1 Energy efficiency AS/NZS 3000 Electrical installations NZS 4218 2004 Energy efficiency - Small building envelope NZS 4220 Code of practice for energy conservation in non-residential buildings NZS 4243.1 Energy efficiency - Large buildings - Building thermal envelope NZS 4246 Energy efficiency - Installing insulation in residential buildings AS/NZS 4534 Zinc and zinc/aluminium-alloy coatings on steel wire AS/NZS 60598.2.2:2001 Luminaires- Particular Requirements - Recessed

luminaires AS/NZS 60695.11.5 Fire hazard testing - Test flames - Needle-flame test

method - Apparatus, conformity test arrangement and guidance Health and Safety at Work Act 2015 1.4 MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER DOCUMENTS Manufacturer's and supplier's documents related to this section are: - Expo Product Tech Guide Manufacturer/supplier contact details Company: Expol Web: expol.co.nz Email: [email protected] Telephone: +64 9 634 3449 Facsimile: -64 9 634 0756 Requirements 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS Work to be carried out by tradesmen experienced, competent and familiar with the

specified insulation materials and techniques specified. 2. PRODUCTS Materials












2.1 CELLULAR POLYSTYRENE INSULATION Proprietary expanded polystyrene (EPS) foam board. Components 2.2 WIRE NETTING Refer to 4161 UNDERLAYS, FOIL AND DPC for wire netting used to support the

insulation. 2.3 NAILS Galvanized steel clouts, 25mm gauge. 2.4 STAPLES Stainless steel gauge and length to suit application and to manufacturer's requirements. 2.5 STRAPPING TAPES Proprietary plastic strapping tape, stapled over framing to retain insulation in unlined wall,

ceiling and underfloor locations. 2.6 ADHESIVE TAPE Adhesive tapes to compliment the underlay. Pressure sensitive aluminium foil tapes for

joining foil insulation and vapour barriers. 3. EXECUTION Conditions 3.1 DELIVERY Keep insulation dry in transit. Take delivery of insulation dry and undamaged and store in

a location that protects them from the weather and damage. Reject all damaged materials.

3.2 STORAGE Accept materials undamaged and dry and store in a location that protects them from the

weather and damage. Avoid distortion, stretching, puncturing and damage to edges of sheet materials. Do not use damaged sheets.

3.3 HANDLING Wear protective clothing as necessary and when handling, avoid delamination or

distortion of the rectangular form. Maintain full thickness unless compression is an installation system requirement.

3.4 HAZARD & RISK MANAGEMENT To Health and Safety at Work Act 2015 and take all safety precautions necessary to

reduce potential hazards and risks. 3.5 INSPECTION Before starting installation of blankets and pads, check that the location and framing are

free from moisture, that the cavities are not interconnected and that mesh, netting, underlays and vapour barriers are in place.

Application 3.6 INSTALL INSULATION - GENERAL Lay, install, fit and fix to NZBC H1/AS1: Energy efficiency, 2.0 Building thermal envelope,

and to manufacturer's requirements. Install in housing to NZS 4218 and NZS 4246. Install in large buildings to NZS 4243.1 and NZS 4220. Allow insulation to re-loft/relax prior to installation. Do not cover vents. Allow a clear gap around metal flues as recommended by the fireplace manufacturer. Lift up electrical wires, lighting transformers/controllers and lay the insulation underneath.








3.7 RECESSED LIGHT FITTINGS - CLEARANCE Non-residential applications; The clearance between insulation and recessed downlights; - 100mm gap to AS/NZS 3000, figure 4.9 - Provide larger gaps where required by the light manufacturer. Residential applications; - Ensure new recessed downlights are one of the new classes classified in AS/NZS

60598.2.2; CA 80, CA 135, IC and IC - F - Classification type CA 80, CA 135, to AS/NZS 60598.2.2; insulation can abut the sides

(wrapping around the sides) - Classification type IC and IC - F, to AS/NZS 60598.2.2; insulation can abut and cover

over the top of the downlight - Provide larger gaps where required by the light manufacturer. - In a retrofit situation where recessed downlights are unclassified or unknown, ensure

100mm clearance from the insulation to AS/NZS 3000, figure 4.9. 3.8 INSTALL INSULATION - CLEARANCE Ensure a minimum 25mm clearance is maintained between the insulation and any non

rigid roofing underlay. 3.9 WIRE NETTING TO SUBSTRATE Lay at right angles across the rafters/roof joists (under purlins). Pull tight and temporarily

fix. Tie edges of netting together with galvanized wire clips. 3.10 LAY WIRE NETTING Lay at right angles over the purlins with enough slack to allow insulation to retain its

nominal thickness between. Tie edges of netting together with galvanized wire clips. 3.11 STRAPPING TAPE Lay at right angles across the framing at a minimum of 400mm centres, staple tape to

each framing member with stainless steel staples. 3.12 ADHESIVE TAPES Fully seal all laps and all penetrations with adhesive tape. 3.13 FIT CELLULAR PLASTIC RIGID BOARD (EPS) Friction fit EPS board after roof and wall claddings have been installed. Cut oversize

lengthways for a tight compression fit between framing. Leave no gaps between, and maintain full thickness of the insulating segments over the whole of the installation. Fit EPS between floor joists and timber framing using proprietary fixings. Ensure separation from electric cabling. In windy locations secure floor insulation with proprietary support brackets. For ceilings check with manufacturer for clearances to recessed light fittings and flues.

3.14 FIT EPS INSULATION - UNDER CONCRETE FLOORS Lay EPS on damp proof membrane before pouring the concrete floor slab. Completion 3.15 CLEAN UP Clean up as the work proceeds, so no spare off cuts or any other matter or item remain

behind claddings or linings. 3.16 CHECK WALL AND ROOF UNDERLAYS Ensure these are dry, clean, undamaged and free of debris before being covered. 3.17 LEAVE Leave work to the standard required by following procedures. 3.18 REMOVE Remove debris, unused materials and elements from the site.








4. SELECTIONS 4.1 EXPANDED POLYSTYRENE INSULATION Location: Roof Brand/type: Expol Platinum Board Polystyrene Insulation R Value: 1.56 Thickness: 50mm

© CIL Masterspec Aug 2016 DRAFT 4711A AUTEX GREENSTUF® THERMAL INSULATION

4711A AUTEX GREENSTUF® THERMAL INSULATION 1. GENERAL This section relates to Autex GreenStuf® polyester fibre insulation installed, laid, hung or

fitted as thermal insulation. 1.1 RELATED WORK Refer to the following: - 3821 TIMBER FRAMING for timber framing. - 4161T THERMAKRAFT UNDERLAYS, FOILS & DPC for underlays. - 4171HR JAMES HARDIE RIGID AIR BARRIERS for pre-cladding. - 5113G GIB PLASTERBOARD LININGS for optional interior lining. - 5122 PLYWOOD LININGS for ply wood lining 1.2 ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS Refer to the general section 1232 INTERPRETATION & DEFINITIONS for abbreviations

and definitions used throughout the specification. The following abbreviations apply specifically to this section: BIB Building Insulation Blanket Documents 1.3 DOCUMENTS Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The following

documents are specifically referred to in this section: NZBC E2 External moisture NZBC H1/AS1 Energy efficiency AS/NZS 3000 Electrical installations NZS 4218:2004 Energy Efficiency - Small building envelope NZS 4220 Code of practice for energy conservation in non-residential buildings NZS 4243.1 Energy Efficiency - Large buildings - Building thermal envelope NZS 4246 Energy Efficiency - Installing insulation in residential buildings AS/NZS 4534 Zinc and zinc/aluminium-alloy coatings on steel wire AS/NZS 60598.2.2:2001 Luminaires- Particular Requirements - Recessed

luminaires AS/NZS 60695.11.5 Fire hazard testing - Test flames - Needle-flame test

method - Apparatus, conformity test arrangement and guidance AS/NZS ISO 9001 Quality management systems - requirements 1.4 MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER DOCUMENTS Autex Insulation documents related to this section are: Autex Insulation Product Manual, including: Data sheet GreenStuf® Thermal Insulation - Pad Form Data sheet GreenStuf® Thermal Insulation - Roll Form Data sheet GreenStuf® Underfloor Data sheet GreenStuf® Building Insulation Blanket Data sheet GreenStuf® Masonry Wall Blanket Data Sheet GreenStuf® Skillion Roof Blanket Installation Instructions - GreenStuf® Thermal Insulation Installation Instructions - GreenStuf® Underfloor Insulation Autex Insulation Acoustic Design Guide Autex Insulation Residential Design Guide Autex Insulation Warranty Certificate BRANZ Appraisal 380 - Autex Greenstuf® Polyester Thermal Insulation BRANZ Appraisal 734 GreenStuf® Underfloor Insulation Environmental Choice NZ (Licence No. 2508037) Autex GreenStuf® polyester thermal

(resistive-type) insulation Manufacturer/supplier contact details Company: Autex Industries Limited















Web: www.autex.co.nz Telephone: 0800 428 839 Autex Insulation documents are also available on EBOSS Web: www.eboss.co.nz Warranties 1.5 WARRANTY - MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER Provide a material manufacturer/supplier warranty: - For Autex polyester thermal and acoustic insulation products. - Provide this warranty on the Autex Insulation Certificate of Warranty standard form. Requirements 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS Work to be carried out by tradesmen experienced, competent and familiar with Autex

Insulation materials and techniques specified. 2. PRODUCTS Materials 2.1 POLYESTER FIBRE THERMAL INSULATING PADS Autex GreenStuf® Pad Form- 100% polyester fibres thermally bonded to form a

rectangular insulation pad. Manufactured in NZ under AS/NZS ISO 9001 and ISO 14001 quality and environmental management systems. Refer to SELECTIONS for details.

NOTE: All GreenStuf® Polyester insulation is compliant with AS/NZS 60695.11.5 and can safely be installed abutted to downlights classified CA 80, CA 135 and can be safely installed covering downlights classified IC and IC-F.

2.2 POLYESTER FIBRE THERMAL INSULATING ROLLS / BLANKET Autex GreenStuf® Roll Form- 100% polyester fibres thermally bonded to form a flexible

insulation blanket/roll. Manufactured in NZ under AS/NZS ISO 9001 and ISO 14001 quality and environmental management systems. Refer to SELECTIONS for details.


2.3 POLYESTER FIBRE THERMAL INSULATING ROOF BLANKET Autex GreenStuf® Building Insulation Blanket (GreenStuf® BIB) - 100% polyester fibres

thermally bonded to form a flexible insulation blanket/roll for commercial roofing applications. Manufactured in NZ under AS/NZS ISO 9001 and ISO 14001 quality and environmental management systems. Refer to SELECTIONS for details.


Components 2.4 TAPES Proprietary plastic tape, stapled across framing to retain insulation in unlined wall and

ceiling locations. 2.5 STAPLES / GUN STAPLER Gun stapler and staples (standard or stainless steel as appropriate) for fixing GreenStuf®

Masonry Wall Blanket and GreenStuf® Underfloor in place. 3. EXECUTION Conditions

http://www.autex.co.nz/

http://www.eboss.co.nz/








3.1 STORAGE Accept materials undamaged and dry and store in a location that protects them from the

weather and damage. Avoid distortion, stretching, puncturing and damage to insulation and packaging. Do not use damaged materials.

3.2 HANDLING Avoid distortion of rectangular pad form. Maintain full thickness of the insulation unless

compression is an installation system requirement. 3.3 INSPECTION Before starting installation of Autex GreenStuf® blankets, pads and rolls, check that the

location and framing are free from moisture, that the cavities are not interconnected and that mesh, underlays and vapour barriers are in place.

Application 3.4 INSTALL INSULATION - GENERAL Lay, install, fit and fix to NZBC H1/AS1: Energy efficiency, 2.0 Building thermal envelope,

and to manufacturer's requirements. Install in housing to NZS 4218 and NZS 4246. Install in large buildings to NZS 4243.1 and NZS 4220. Allow insulation to re-loft/relax prior to installation. Do not cover vents. Allow a clear gap around metal flues as recommended by the fireplace manufacturer. Lift up electrical wires, lighting transformers/controllers and lay the insulation underneath.

3.5 RECESSED LIGHT FITTINGS - CLEARANCE Non-residential applications; The clearance between insulation and recessed downlights; - 100mm gap to AS/NZS 3000, figure 4.9 - Provide larger clearances where required by the light manufacturer. Residential applications; - Ensure new recessed downlights are one of the new classes classified in AS/NZS

60598.2.2; CA 80, CA 135, IC and IC - F - Classification type CA 80, CA 135, to AS/NZS 60598.2.2; insulation can abut the sides


over the top of the downlight - Provide larger clearances where required by the light manufacturer. - In a retrofit situation where recessed downlights are unclassified or unknown, ensure

100mm clearance from the insulation to AS/NZS 3000, figure 4.9. 3.6 CHECK FOILS Ensure foils are dry, clean, bright, undamaged and free of debris before installing

insulation. 3.7 CHECK WALL UNDERLAYS AND ROOF UNDERLAYS Ensure foils are dry, clean, bright, undamaged and free of debris before installing

insulation. 3.8 CHECK VAPOUR BARRIERS Ensure vapour barriers form a homogeneous sheet vapour barrier before installing

insulation. 3.9 FIT POLYESTER FIBRE THERMAL INSULATION PADS Friction fit GreenStuf®insulation pads in place to completely fill the whole of the cavities.

Slightly oversize length for friction fit and tear by hand across pad and fill cavity. Tear to smaller pieces for smaller spaces and around penetrations. Leave no gaps and maintain full thickness over the whole of the installation. Do not cover vents and cut around metal flues to the safety requirement of the fireplace manufacturer. Fix in place with plastic tape as necessary to hold the insulation until the wall and or ceiling linings are in place.

Refer to GreenStuf® Pads and Roll Form installation instructions.













3.10 FIT POLYESTER FIBRE THERMAL INSULATION ROLLS Friction fit GreenStuf® insulation rolls between the studs/joists, or in place to completely

fill the whole of the cavities. Slightly oversize length for friction fit and tear by hand across the width of the roll. Tear to smaller pieces for smaller spaces and around penetrations. Leave no gaps and maintain full thickness over the whole of the installation. Do not cover vents and cut around metal flues to the safety requirement of the fireplace manufacturer. Fix in place with plastic tape as necessary to hold the insulation until the wall and or ceiling linings are in place.

Refer to GreenStuf® Pads and Roll Form installation instructions. Completion 3.11 CLEAN UP Clean up as the work proceeds so no spare off-cuts or any other matter or item remain

behind claddings or linings. 3.12 LEAVE Leave work to the standard required by following procedures. 3.13 REMOVE Remove debris, unused materials and elements from the site. 4. SELECTIONS 4.1 AUTEX GREENSTUF® POLYESTER FIBRE THERMAL EXTERIOR WALL

INSULATION Location: Exterior Walls Brand: Autex GreenStuf® R Value: R2.2 Thickness: 90mm 4.2 AUTEX GREENSTUF® POLYESTER FIBRE THERMAL CEILING INSULATION Location: North end Facilities Brand: Autex GreenStuf® R Value: RR1.8 Thickness: 100mm

© CIL Masterspec Aug 2016 DRAFT 4811FS FOSROC SEALANTS

4811FS FOSROC SEALANTS 1. GENERAL This section relates to the supply and application of Concrete Plus Limited sealants

Fosroc® Duraflex, Fosroc® Duraflex FC, Emer-Seal CR, Selleys® Proseries Fireblock, Selleys® Fireblock XT™, for sealing of joints of concrete and other substrates, and Selleys® Fireblock PB™ adhesive.

It includes: - Joints in concrete panels, masonry, brickwork, stonework, aluminium and timber joinery,

metals and some plastics - Joints exposed to aggregate chemical environments - Joints in most construction materials requiring high bond strength - Polyurethane Silica Acrylic (PSA) fire rated joint sealant for internal use - Silyl Modified Polymers (SMP) fire rated sealant for internal and external use 1.1 RELATED WORK Refer to the following: - 4521AE APL ALUMINIUM WOINDOWS & DOORS EDUCATIONAL FACILITIES for

frames. - 4821 FLASHINGS for flashings. Documents 1.2 DOCUMENTS Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The following

documents are specifically referred to in this section: AS 1530 4 Methods for fire tests on building materials, components and

structures - Fire resistance tests of elements of building construction AS/NZS 4020 Testing of products for use in contact with drinking water 1.3 MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER DOCUMENTS Manufacturer's and supplier's documents relating to this part of the work: Concrete Plus Construction Products Product Guide Fosroc® Technical data sheets Selleys® Technical data sheets Parchem Technical Data sheets Parchem Material Safety Data sheets Manufacturer/supplier contact details Company: Concrete Plus Limited Web: www.concreteplus.co.nz Email: [email protected] Telephone: 0508 FOSROC (367762) Warranties 1.4 WARRANTY - MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER Provide a material manufacturer/supplier warranty: 10 years: For materials - Provide this warranty on Concrete Plus Limited standard form. - Commence the warranty from the date of practical completion of the contract works. Refer to the general section 1237 WARRANTIES for additional requirements. 1.5 WARRANTY - INSTALLER/APPLICATOR Provide an applicator warranty: 5 years: For workmanship - Provide this warranty on the applicator standard form. - Commence the warranty from the date of practical completion of the contract works.


http://www.concreteplus.co.nz/


Refer to the general section 1237 WARRANTIES for additional requirements. Requirements 1.6 TEST SUBSTRATES Before commencing the sealant installation, obtain and submit a certificate from Concrete

Plus Limited confirming that adjoining substrates and materials have been examined and are deemed suitable for sealant application, and are compatible with the sealant material specified.

1.7 SAMPLE JOINT Upon submission of the required sealant certificate and confirmation of sample materials,

prepare and install a sample joint for each sealant type, each not less than 3 metres in length, in a selected locations. Following review and confirmation that work may proceed, the sample joint becomes the quality control standard for subsequent work of each type. Sample joints may be retained as part of the completed work.

1.8 QUALIFICATIONS Sealant work, including preparation, to be carried out by competent and experienced

sealant applicators, approved by Concrete Plus Limited. Provide evidence of technical competence and experience for review before commencing work.

1.9 MANUFACTURER'S TECHNICAL SERVICES Use the research and development, and the technical information provided by Concrete

Plus Limited throughout the design, development, prototype testing and installation stages of sealant work.

1.11 HEALTH AND SAFETY Follow the requirements of the appropriate Concrete Plus Limited Material safety data

sheets and safety advice on package labels. Compliance information 1.12 INFORMATION REQUIRED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE Provide the following compliance documentation: - - Applicators approval certificate from Concrete Plus Limited - Concrete Plus Limited warranty - Applicator's warranty - Producer Statement - Construction from the applicator. - Other information required by the BCA in the Building Consent Approval documents. Quality control and assurance 1.13 QUALITY ASSURANCE The approved applicator to provide a Quality Assurance plan before commencing work.

This is to include a list of the personnel to work on the project, proposed preparation of the substrate and method of application to specific details of sealing of construction joints.

2. PRODUCTS Materials - sealants 2.1 FACADE AND GENERAL CONSTRUCTION JOINT SEALANT Fosroc® DuraFlex, high performance UV resistant elastomeric joint sealant with stain-

free properties, based on Silyl Modified Polymers. A total 50% (± 25%) joint movement capability. VOC content 15g/L. Contains no isocyanate. 5mm minimum joint width.

2.2 UV RESISTANT ELASTOMERIC TRAFFICABLE JOINT SEALANT Fosroc® DuraFlex FC, high performance elastomeric trafficable joint sealant with stain-

free properties, based on Silyl Modified Polymers, with a total 40% (± 20%) joint movement capability. VOC content 15g/L. Contains no isocyanate. 5mm minimum joint width.


2.3 FIRE AND ACOUSTIC RATED SMP JOINT SEALANT To AS 1530.4 Selleys Fireblock XT™, high UV resistant, moisture curing SMP sealant suitable for fire

and acoustic rated construction, with ± 20% joint movement capability. VOC content 15g/L. Halogen and isocyanate free.

Materials - adhesive 2.4 FIRE RATED ADHESIVE Selleys Fireblock PB™, high strength, non-slumping adhesive for fire and acoustic rated

construction. VOC content 15g/L. Solvent and isocyanate free. Accessories 2.5 MASKING TAPE Pressure sensitive, self adhesive crimped paper tape. Do not use masking-grease

materials. 2.6 JOINT BACKING ROD PEF backing rod. Extruded closed cell polyethylene foam rod or open cell foam

polyurethane, chemically compatible with the sealant. Use backing rod diameter 25% greater than the joint width before installation. Use in long lengths.

2.7 BOND BREAKER TAPE Pressure sensitive self adhesive polyethylene breaker tape. Masking tape or PVC

insulation tape is not permitted. 3. EXECUTION Conditions - general 3.1 COMPATIBILITY Ensure compatibility by using only Concrete Plus Limited branded sealants with Concrete

Plus Limited supplied joint fillers, primers and backing rods. 3.2 NON SLUMP SEALANTS Use only thixotropic sealants capable of supporting their own weight (non slump) in

vertical applications. 3.3 SEALANT PAINTABILITY Ensure that a paintable sealant is selected when the sealant joint requires painting.

Concrete Plus Limited recommends a field test be carried out to ensure compatibility of the paint coatings.

3.4 COLOURS Refer to SELECTIONS for colour options. Where colour is not specified, choose sealant

colours from Concrete Plus standard/special colour ranges. 3.5 NEW CONCRETE Ensure concrete and masonry is dry to Concrete Plus Limited requirements before

applying joint sealants. Minimum curing of new concrete to be 28 days, sand/cement screeds 7 days.

3.6 ENSURE Ensure that joints to receive sealants are suitable for the proposed application. Ensure

that surfaces are sound, dry, free from dust, dirt, scale, laitance, corrosion or other loose material, oil, grease, paint, release agents or other contaminants which may affect the bond, or the performance of the sealing material.

Ensure that joints and spaces receiving sealant are not less than the depth and width

required for the sealant being used.


Application - preparation - general 3.7 TEST SUBSTRATES Test substrates for indications of staining or poor adhesion. If poor adhesion is evident

from initial tests, consult Concrete Plus Limited about the application of a suitable primer. Only use combinations of sealants and substrates for which favourable adhesion and compatibility have been confirmed.

3.8 CLEAN JOINTS Clean joints as detailed in application instructions contained in Concrete Plus Limited

Technical Data Sheet to achieve acceptable joint surfaces for the application of sealant. Protect adjacent surfaces from abrasion or other damage.

3.9 CLEAN METAL SURFACES Clean metal surfaces with Concrete Plus Limited cleaner to remove any grease deposits. 3.10 MASK Mask adjacent surfaces alongside joints to prevent contamination. Mask off any surfaces

which would be difficult to clean if smeared with sealant, or where excess sealant could not be neatly trimmed off or removed.

3.11 VENTILATION Ensure adequate ventilation for sealant applicators during the preparation and application

of sealant work. 3.12 FINAL PREPARATION Prepare joints in accordance with approved Concrete Plus Limited cleaning methods. Application - general 3.13 BACKING Insert PEF backing rod or bond breaker tape to avoid three sided adhesion. PEF backing

rod diameter to be 25% larger than the gap size. Use only blunt instruments to install backing rods to avoid puncturing or damage. Do not twist rods when installing. When using backup material do not leave gaps and do not reduce the depth of the sealant joint to less than the minimum required by Concrete Plus Limited.

3.14 APPLY SEALANTS Apply sealants in accordance with Concrete Plus Limited requirements. 3.15 JOINT FILLING Fill joint cavity with sealant in accordance with Concrete Plus Limited requirements and

quality control programmes. Use a pressure gun with a nozzle cut to suit the required joint width. Ensure sealant is deposited in a uniform, continuous bead, without gaps or air pockets and with clean, neat edges.

3.16 TOOLING Tool sealant to form a smooth, flat bead, or a smooth convex fillet, with a profile as

required by Concrete Plus Limited. Complete tooling before the sealant surface starts to form a skin.

3.17 FINISHING Remove masking immediately after tooling and before sealant surface starts to skin.

Remove excess sealant from adjoining surfaces before the sealant has set, using the cleaning materials and methods required by Concrete Plus Limited, leaving surfaces clean and the sealant runs undamaged.

3.18 SURROUNDING WORK Leave surrounding surfaces in a neat, clean condition with no evidence of spill over. Application - Fosroc® DuraFlex


3.19 PREPARE JOINT Joint surfaces must be clean, dry and free from frost. Remove all dirt, laitance, loose

materials and foreign matter. Remove all rust, scale and protective lacquers from metal surfaces. Non-porous surfaces should be degreased using solvent 10.

3.20 BOND BREAKERS AND JOINT BACKING In deep joints in walls and non-trafficable horizontal surfaces use Expandafoam as a

backing material. In shallow joints use a polyethylene bond breaker tape. 3.21 APPLY SEALANT Apply Fosroc® DuraFlex sealant in accordance with Concrete Plus Limited requirements

including required sealant width to depth ratio. Extrude the sealant firmly into joint to ensure complete contact with joint faces. Tool sealant into the joint.

3.22 LIMITATIONS Do not apply Fosroc® DuraFlex to bituminous surfaces or allow bitumen to contact these

sealants. Do not apply to wet surfaces. 3.23 CLEAN TOOLS Clean tools immediately after use with Solvent 10. Application - Fosroc® DuraFlex FC 3.24 PREPARE JOINT Joint surfaces must be clean, dry and free from frost. Remove all dirt, laitance, loose

materials and foreign matter. Remove all rust, scale and protective lacquers from metal surfaces. Non-porous surfaces should be degreased using solvent 10.

3.25 BOND BREAKERS AND JOINT BACKING In deep joints in walls and non-trafficable horizontal surfaces use Expandafoam as a

backing material. In formed joints use a polyethylene bond breaker tape. In joints subject to traffic or hydrostatic pressure use a polyethylene filler board such as Concrete Plus stiff joint.

3.26 APPLY SEALANT Apply Fosroc® DuraFlex FC sealant in accordance with Concrete Plus Limited

requirements including required sealant width to depth ratio. Extrude the sealant firmly into joint to ensure complete contact with joint faces. Tool sealant into the joint.

3.27 LIMITATIONS Do not apply Fosrco Duraflex FC to bituminous surfaces or allow bitumen to contact

these sealants. Do not apply to wet surfaces. 3.28 CLEAN TOOLS Clean tools immediately after use with Solvent 10. Application - Selleys Fireblock XT™ 3.29 PREPARE JOINT Joint surfaces must be clean and free of oil, grease, release agents, dust and loose

particles. Any laitance should be removed from concrete-based surfaces. Non porous surfaces should be free of scale, rust or oxides, degrease with a solvent such

as MEK, acetone or mineral turpentine. Remove any solvent residue. 3.30 BONDBREAKERS AND JOINT BACKING Install a suitable backing rod in joint to control sealant depth. Refer to SELECTIONS. 3.31 APPLY SEALANT Extrude Selleys Fireblock XT™ sealant smoothly into joint to achieve required sealant

width to depth ratio, ensuring that all substrates are well wetted out with sealant. Application - Selleys Fireblock PB™ Adhesive


3.32 SUBSTRATE PREPARATION Substrates must be clean, dry and free from oil, grease, release agents, dust and loose

material. 3.33 APPLY ADHESIVE Extrude Selleys Fireblock PB™ adhesive smoothly onto surface, ensuring that all

substrates are well wetted out with sealant. For fire rating, apply an 8mm diameter bead of adhesive into the groove (T&G Application) or edge (Butt joint) of panel to be adhered.

Completion 3.34 ROUTINE CLEANING Carry out routine trade cleaning of this part of the work including periodic removal all


repair is not possible or will not be acceptable. Leave work to the standard required for following procedures.

3.36 PROTECTION Provide the following temporary protection of the finished work: - Windows and door frames. 4. SELECTIONS For further details on selections go to www.concreteplus.co.nz Sealants 4.1 FOSROC® DURAFLEX - GENERAL PURPOSE ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANT Location: Exterior Use & interior use Application area: Penetrations and facade joints Sealant: Fosroc® Duraflex Sealant colour: Grey Substrate: timber, metal Primer: Contact Manufaucturer Joint backing: Expandafoam PEF Rod 4.2 FOSROC® DURAFLEX FC - ELASTOMERIC TRAFFICABLE JOINT SEALANT Location: Exterior and interior use Application area: Trafficable floor joints. Sealant: Fosroc® Duraflex FC Sealant colour: Exterior: Black; Interior: Grey Substrate: Timber Primer: Contact Manufacturer Joint backing: Expandafoam PEF Rod Fire and acoustic rated sealants 4.3 SELLEYS FIREBLOCK XT™ - FIRE AND ACOUSTIC SEALANT Location: Adjoining walls to next room Application area: Learning areas Sealant: Selleys Fireblock XT™ Sealant colour: Grey Substrate: timber Joint backing: Expandafoam PEF Rod Element acoustic rating: 45 Stc Element fire rating: 60/60/60 Fire rated adhesive

http://www.concreteplus.co.nz/


4.4 SELLEYS FIREBLOCK PB™ - FIRE RATED ADHESIVE Location: External use Application area: Electrical penetrstions Sealant: Selleys Fireblock PB™ Sealant colour: Red Substrate: timber Element fire rating: 60/60/60

© CIL Masterspec Aug 2016 DRAFT 4821 FLASHINGS

4821 FLASHINGS 1. GENERAL This section relates to the fabrication and installation of flashing systems not forming part

of a proprietary system. 1.1 RELATED WORK Refer to the following: - 4171HR JAMES HARDIE RIGID AIR BARRIERS for pre-cladding - 4231HF JAMES HARDIE FACADE PANEL CLADDING for exterior cladding - 4241D DIMOND PROFILED CLADDING for metal cladding. - 4311D DIMOND PROFILED METAL ROOFING for metal roofing - 4521AE APL ALUMINIUM WINDOWS & DOORS EDUCATION FACILITIES for window

framing. - 4821 FOSROC SEALANTS for sealant systems. Documents 1.2 DOCUMENTS Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The following

documents are specifically referred to in this section: NZBC B2/AS1 Durability NZBC E2/AS1 External moisture AS/NZS 2728 Prefinished/prepainted sheet metal products for interior/exterior

building applications - Performance requirements AS 3566 Self-drilling screws for the building and construction industries -

General requirements and mechanical properties NZS 3604 Timber-framed buildings NZMRM CoP NZ metal roof and wall cladding Code of Practice Requirements 1.3 QUALIFICATIONS Work to be carried out by tradesmen experienced, competent and familiar with the

materials and techniques specified. 1.4 VERIFY DIMENSIONS Verify dimensions against site measurements prior to fabrication. Standards of performance 1.5 DURABILITY REQUIREMENTS Design and install the flashings appropriate for the durability applications in accordance

with NZBC B2/AS1. The Building Code B2, 3.2 requires that all hidden elements have at least the same durability as that of the element that covers it. Refer to NZBC B2/AS1 Table 1: Durability Requirements of Nominated Building Elements and NZBC E2/AS1 Table 20 Material selection.

1.6 COMPATIBILITY REQUIREMENTS Each flashing material shall be selected in accordance with NZBC E2/AS1 Table 20 to

minimise corrosion. Refer to either NZS 3604 Clause 4.2 or AS/NZS 2728 for the relevant exposure conditions. For compatibility of materials in contact and subject to run-off, refer to NZBC E2/AS1 table 21 and NZBC E2/AS1 table 22.

1.7 DESIGN For flashings where there are no specific details or drawings, provide a full size mock-up

of the flashing to integrate components into the weathertight system. Co-ordinate with the trades affected by the installation.

2. PRODUCTS















2.1 FLASHING MATERIALS Acceptable materials for flashings are described in NZBC E2/AS1, 4.0. Material, grade

and colour as detailed and scheduled. Ensure that materials used for flashings are compatible with the building and cladding materials and their fixings.

2.2 FLASHING FABRICATION Fabricate flashings generally to NZBC E2/AS1, 4.0, from a ductile grade of metal

designed for lateral strength by folding, stiffening or ribbing on external edges, having a maximum un-stiffened width of 300mm. Provide all hooks, hems, kick outs, bird's beaks, stop ends, soft edges and turn downs etc. to NZBC E2/AS1, 4.0, or as shown on the drawings.

2.3 FIXINGS Rivets, screws, nails and cleats to be compatible with the materials being fastened.

Fasteners complying with the corrosion requirements of AS 3566 are suitable for use with ZINCALUME® steel products. Use only low carbon non-conductive sealing washers.

2.4 JOINTS - SEALANTS Neutral Curing silicone or MS polymer sealant as required, with low resistance to

compression and be-able to withstand large temperature variations. MS polymer sealant to be used where the sealant is exposed and the surrounding surfaces are to be subsequently painted or coated.

2.5 JOINTS - SOLDER Eutectic solder of 60% tin/40% lead using a suitable proprietary flux. 3. EXECUTION Conditions 3.1 DELIVERY Keep flashings dry in transit. Take delivery of flashings in an undamaged condition.

Reject all damaged materials. 3.2 STORAGE Store materials and accessories on a level, firm base, in dry conditions, well ventilated,

out of direct sunlight and completely protected from weather and damage. Ensure storage areas are away from current work areas. Cover to keep dry until fixed.

3.3 HANDLING Avoid distortion and contact with potentially damaging surfaces/substances. Do not drag

flashings across each other, or across other surfaces. Protect edges, corners and surfaces from damage.

3.4 SUBSTRATE Do not commence work until the substrate is of the standard required by the installer for

the specified flashings, level and in true alignment. 3.5 PROTECT Protect surfaces, window and door joinery, and finishes already in place, from the

possibility of damage during the installation process. 3.6 CONFIRM LAYOUT Before commencing work confirm the proposed installation of the flashings and

expansion joints and other visual considerations of the finished work. 3.7 CO-ORDINATE INSTALLATION Co-ordinate installation of flashings with associated trades. Application





3.8 INSTALLATION Install flashings in accordance with NZMRM CoP and in compliance with NZBC E2/AS1,

4.0 Flashings. For very high wind zones and where the pitch of the roof is below 15° the flashing joint laps shall be sealed with sealant at each end of the lap to prevent the ingress of water.

Refer to NZBC E2/AS1 Table 7 for general dimensions of flashings. 3.9 FIXINGS Fix flashings with fasteners appropriate to the situation. For fixing flashings with

proprietary brackets or clips ensure they are aligned to allow for movement and are compatible with the flashing material.

Fix screws with the shank perpendicular to the surface of the flashing with the washer

fitted firmly against the flashing. Screws to be compatible with the flashing material. Rivets 'blind' or 'pop' are to be sealed when used. Aluminium rivets are compatible with

zinc or AZ coated steel. Monel and stainless steel rivets can be used to fix galvanized steel flashings. Minimum diameter of rivet to be used is 4.0mm. Drill hole 1mm larger than the rivet size. Seal head of rivet with neutral cured silicone.

3.10 JOINTING - SEALANTS Clean surfaces to be lapped using a solvent ensuring all traces of the solvent are

removed with a clean rag. Apply sealant by gun in a continuous bead of approximately 5mm diameter. Width of sealant when compressed should not exceed 25mm. Sealant joints shall be mechanically fixed for strength. Refer to NZMRM CoP for details.

3.11 JOINTING - SOLDER Solder joints in galvanized steel and non-ferrous metals when specified with lead/tin

solder. Clean joint ensuring it is dry and free of grease immediately prior to applying a proprietary flux. Lap the flashing 25mm in the direction of the water flow and fasten the lap with rivets or screws at 50mm centres. Completely sweat the joint to avoid leaving any flux residue. Wash down the joint to remove any trace of flux.

3.12 FINAL INSPECTION A final inspection by the installer to take place after completion of the flashing work. Any

defects or subsequent damage to be made good. Completion 3.13 PROTECT Protect new work from damage. 3.14 REPLACE Replace all damaged or marked elements. 3.15 LEAVE Leave work to the standard required for following procedures. 3.16 REMOVE Remove debris, unused materials and elements from the site. 4. SELECTIONS 4.1 FLASHINGS Type Material and finish/colour General flashings: Aluminium / Match cladding colour Window/doors: Aluminium / Match cladding colour - Head: Aluminium / Match cladding colour - Sill: Aluminium / Match cladding colour Beam caps: Aluminium / Match cladding colour Cladding: Aluminium / Match cladding colour - External corner: Aluminium / Match cladding colour






- Internal corner: Aluminium / Match cladding colour Balustrade capping: Not required Garage door: Not required Meter box: Aluminium / Match cladding colour Chimney flue: Not required Soffit: Aluminium / Match cladding colour Wall/roof junctions: Aluminium / Match cladding colour Barge: Aluminium / Match cladding colour Apron: Aluminium / Match cladding colour Parapet capping: Aluminium / Match cladding colour Saddle: Aluminium / Match cladding colour Change of pitch: Aluminium / Match cladding colour Gutter apron: Aluminium / Match cladding colour Curved: Aluminium / Match cladding colour Roof penetrations: Aluminium / Match cladding colour

© CIL Masterspec Aug 2016 DRAFT 4924 STAINLESS STEEL METALWORK

4924 STAINLESS STEEL METALWORK 1. GENERAL This section relates to the fabrication and installation of stainless steel items used in

exterior applications. It includes: - stainless steel fabricated items (exterior wall and door cladding systems, structural

items, column and beam cladding, screens, grilles, louvres, fins and other external features, stairs, ladders, canopies, signs and signage, street furniture, flues and cowlings, associated fasteners and hardware)

- stainless steel decorative and specialised finishes - stainless steel wire mesh and expanded metal items - stainless steel handrails and balustrades 1.1 RELATED WORK Refer to 5571 TIMBER STAIRS for vertical circulation. Documents 1.2 DOCUMENTS Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The following

documents are specifically referred to in this section: NZBC F4/AS1. Safety from falling AS/NZS 1554.6 Structural steel welding - Welding stainless steel for structural

purposes AS/NZS 4673 Cold-formed stainless steel structures ASTM A240 Standard specification for chromium and chromium-nickel stainless

steel plate, sheet and strip for pressure vessels and for general applications

ASTM A276 Standard specification for stainless steel bars and shapes ASTM A480 Standard specification for general requirements for flat-rolled stainless

steel and heat-resisting steel plate, sheet and strip ASTM A1016 Standard specification for general requirements for ferritic alloy steel,

austenitic alloy steel, and stainless steel tubes BS EN 1011-3 Welding. Recommendations for welding of metallic materials. Arc

welding of stainless steels BRANZ BU 567 E2/AS1 Flashing Requirements 1.3 MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER DOCUMENTS The Contractor shall inform themselves of all the manufacturer's documents and

specifications and ensure all documents are current and up to date. Requirements 1.4 QUALIFICATIONS Metalworkers to be experienced, competent trades people familiar with the materials and

techniques specified. 2. PRODUCTS Fabricated items 2.1 ITEMS Refer to SELECTIONS. Materials 2.2 STAINLESS STEEL COIL, SHEET, PLATE, BARS, ANGLES AND TUBES Coil and sheet manufactured to ASTM A240, plate, sheet and strip manufactured to

ASTM A480. Bars and angles manufactured to ASTM A276. Design of stainless steel structural members to AS/NZS 4673. Welding to AS/NZS 1554.6.








Alloy containing iron, low carbon, and typically, 18% chromium and 8% nickel. Refer to SELECTIONS for details. 2.3 STAINLESS STEEL HANDRAILS AND BALUSTRADES To ASTM A1016. Alloy containing iron, low carbon, and typically, 18% chromium and 8% nickel, with 2%

molybdenum added. Refer to SELECTIONS for details. Components 2.4 SCREWS Grade 316 stainless steel self-tapping with the type of head, length, gauge and thread to

suit the work and its location. 2.5 BOLTS Grade 316 stainless steel, type and size to suit the work and its location. 2.6 RIVETS Domed with similar composition and mechanical properties to the parent metal. 2.7 TUBULAR RIVETS Stainless steel or Monel metal with domed/countersunk head. 2.8 THREADED STUDS Grade 316 stainless steel with stud and nut threads to suit the base material and the nut

being used. 2.9 CLIPS Form clips to detail of the same metal as the metal sheet being fixed/secured. 2.10 NAILS Spiral rolled flat-head/clout type, with similar composition and mechanical properties to

the parent metal. Select length and gauge to suit the work and its location. 3. EXECUTION Conditions 3.1 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Take delivery of materials and goods and store on site and protect from damage. Protect finished surfaces, edges and corners from damage. Move/handle goods in accordance with manufacturer's requirements. Reject and replace goods that are damaged or will not provide the required finish. 3.2 PRE-INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS Check work previously carried out and confirm it is of the required standard for this part of

the work. 3.3 FLASHINGS Form to BRANZ BU 567. Ensure the location and the substrate is ready to receive the

fabrication and will allow work of the required standard. 3.4 SURFACE TREATMENT OF STAINLESS STEEL Ensure stainless steel items commissioned for service are free from oil, scale, grinding

dust or small particles of steel from tools, dies or rollers. On no account should welding slag or other contamination to be removed with a mild steel brush - a stainless steel brush should only be used.

Fabrication general 3.5 PROTECTION During fabrication protect all surfaces which will be visible in completed work.


3.6 COLD FORMED Ensure cold formed work is free from warping, buckling and fractures. Form bends with a

brake press or by cold rolling. 3.7 CORNERS Unless specified otherwise, mitre junctions of identical sections. 3.8 HOLES Form without distortion of surrounding metal. 3.9 MOVING PARTS When assembled, all moving parts must move freely and without binding. 3.10 CLEANING Remove all burrs and sharp arrises which would be visible after fixing, or a hazard to the

user. 3.11 AFTER CUTTING STAINLESS STEEL Grind off materials liable to corrode after thermal cutting. 3.12 BONDING Prepare surfaces of metals to receive adhesives by degreasing and abrading

mechanically or chemically. Use adhesives in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements. Form bond under pressure.

3.13 RIVETED JOINTS Draw riveted joints tightly together, with rivets closed to completely fill holes. 3.14 MECHANICAL JOINTS Ensure mechanical joints are tight with no visible gaps. 3.15 MECHANICAL JOINTS - ELEMENTS Bed in mastic all mechanical joints of elements which will be located externally, including

all mating surfaces, cleats and other fixings. 3.16 MECHANICAL JOINTS - CLEATS Unless specified otherwise connect cleats to frames with countersunk screws where they

will be visible after the component has been fixed and where raised heads would interfere with any moving part.

Fabrication - welding 3.17 WELDING OF STAINLESS STEEL Weld stainless steel to BS EN 1011-3 and for structural steel to AS/NZS 1554.6. 3.18 PREPARATION FOR WELDING Remove grease, dirt, moisture and oxide from edges to be welded. Remove scale and

residue from arc and power cutting by machining or hand grinding. 3.19 ACCURACY Ensure accurate fit using clamps and jigs where practical. Use tack welds for temporary

attachment where jigging is not practical. 3.20 WELDS Make joints with parent and weld metal fully fused throughout with no inclusions, holes,

porosity or cracks. 3.21 WELDING STAINLESS STEEL Use double level butt welds, backing bars to remove heat, jigging, tack welds and any

other measures necessary to minimise distortion. Remove slight distortion by light hammering, taking care not to damage the surface finish.




3.22 SPATTER Prevent weld spatter falling on surfaces of materials which will be self finished and visible

in completed work. 3.23 RESIDUES Ensure complete removal of flux residues and slag. 3.24 BUTT WELDS Grind butt welds which will be visible in completed work smooth and flush with adjacent

surfaces. Fabrication - handrails and balustrades 3.25 FABRICATE HANDRAILS AND BALUSTRADES Units to comply with the reviewed shop drawings and installation details, including

brackets, bolts, fixings, complete with all associated stainless steel componentry and hardware.

Installation - fabricated items 3.26 INSTALL FABRICATED ITEMS Install fabricated items in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements. Fix plumb,

level and true to line. Fix to comply with the reviewed shop drawings and installation details, including brackets, bolts, fixings, bedding compounds and sealants.

Installation - handrails and balustrades 3.27 INSTALL HANDRAILS AND BALUSTRADES Install handrails and balustrades in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements.

Fix plumb, level and true to line. Fix to comply with the reviewed shop drawings and installation details, including brackets, bolts, fixings, bedding compounds and sealants, complete with all associated stainless steel componentry and hardware. Unless otherwise detailed installation to comply with NZBC F4/AS1.



repair is not possible or will not be acceptable. Adjust operation of equipment and moving parts not working correctly. Leave work to the standard required for following procedures.

3.30 PROTECTION Provide the following temporary protection of the finished work: - Handrails - Stanchions - Handles and hinges 4. SELECTIONS Fabricated items 4.1 STAINLESS STEEL ITEMS Location/item: Ramp handrail, associated fasteners and hardware, etc Manufacturer: Contractor to specify Brand/type: Contractor to specify Profile: round, flat bars, angles, tubes, Grade: all 316 grade Thickness: Tubes as required; angles bars and plates minimum 10mm



Dimensions: see drawings Finish: satin No4 brush 4.2 STAINLESS STEEL HANDRAILS AND BALUSTRADES Location/item: Ramp handrail Manufacturer: Contractor to Specify Brand/type: Contractor to specify Profile: Round Grade: 316 Dimensions: 50mm min Finish: Satin No4 brush Hardware 4.3 HARDWARE

© CIL Masterspec Aug 2016 DRAFT 5111H JAMES HARDIE FIBRE CEMENT SHEET LININGS

5111H JAMES HARDIE FIBRE CEMENT SHEET LININGS 1. GENERAL This section relates to the supply and installation of James Hardie Villaboard® Lining and

HardieGroove™ Lining for: - internal wall linings - ceiling linings 1.1 RELATED WORK Refer to the following: - 3821 TIMBER FRAMING for timber grades and framing. - 4161T THERMAKRAFT UNDERLAYS, FOILS & DPC for underlays - 6211J JACOBSEN WALL TILING for wall tiles. - 6221J JACOBSEN FLOOR TILING for floor tiles Documents 1.2 DOCUMENTS Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The following

documents are specifically referred to in this section: AS/NZS 2589 Gypsum linings - Application and finishing AS/NZS 2908.2 Cellulose-cement products - Flat sheet NZS 3602 Timber and wood-based products for use in buildings 1.3 MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER DOCUMENTS James Hardie documents relating to this part of the work: Villaboard® Lining HardieGroove™ Lining Manufacturer/supplier contact details Company: James Hardie New Zealand Web: www.jameshardie.co.nz Email: [email protected] Telephone: Ask James Hardie™ on 0800 808 868 Warranties 1.4 WARRANTY - MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER Provide a material manufacturer/supplier warranty: 15 years: For James Hardie™ Lining. (refer to James Hardie™ product warranty) 15 years: For accessories supplied by James Hardie (refer to James Hardie™

product warranty) From: Date of purchase - Provide this warranty on the manufacturer's standard form. Refer to the general section 1237 WARRANTIES for additional requirements. Requirements 1.6 COMPLIANCE Fibre cement sheets to AS/NZS 2908.2. Performance 1.7 SURFACE FIRE PROPERTIES Group Number to NZBC C/AS2-AS7, table 4.1. Unfinished fibre cement board has a

group number of 1-S when complying with parameters of NZBC C/VM2, Appendix A, table A1.









2. PRODUCTS Materials 2.1 PLAIN FIBRE CEMENT SHEET LININGS James Hardie Villaboard® Lining manufactured from treated cellulose fibre, portland

cement, sand and water. Cured by high pressure autoclaving and manufactured to AS/NZS 2908.2. Sealed on the face.

Components 2.2 BATTENS, TIMBER Minimum 45mm wide, 35mm deep timber with depth suitable for length of fasteners used. 2.3 PACKERS 3 - 4mm timber packers. 2.4 NAILS 6mm and 9mm linings: 40mm x 2.8mm galvanized flathead HardieFlex™ nails Over Gypsum plasterboard: 50mm x 2.8mm galvanized flathead HardieFlex™ nails 2.5 SCREWS FOR POWER SCREW GUN DRIVING Timber framing 6mm and 9mm linings: Villadrive 6 gauge x 30mm self embedding screws or

HardieDrive™ self embedding stainless steel screws Steel framing: Steel 8 gauge x 32mm self embedding screws 2.6 WALL BOARD ADHESIVE Polyurethane wallboard adhesive. Refer to James Hardie product installation manual. Accessories 2.7 CONTROL JOINTS SECTION 45mm x 10mm shaped PVC control joint or Rondo P35 jointer. 2.8 EXTERNAL CORNER SECTIONS 30mm x 30mm x 1.2mm PVC angle. 2.9 POLYETHYLENE TAPE Self adhesive polyethylene for behind expressed joints and expressed control joints. 2.10 JOINT REINFORCING TAPE 52mm wide perforated paper tape. 2.11 BEDDING COMPOUND James Hardie® Base Coat compound powder. 2.12 FINISHING COMPOUND James Hardie® Top Coat premixed. 2.13 SEALANT Silicone or polyurethane sealant. Refer to the James Hardie installation manual. 3. EXECUTION CONDITIONS 3.1 MOISTURE CONTENT Maximum moisture content of timber framing to NZS 3602. 3.2 PROTECT Protect joinery, fittings and finishes already in place from water staining or damage from

lining installation.




3.3 BUILDING Ensure building is weatherproof before lining work commences. 3.4 STORAGE Take delivery of products dry and undamaged on pallets, and keep on pallet. Protect

edges and corners from damage and covered to keep dry until fixed. 3.5 HANDLING Avoid distortion and contact with potentially damaging surfaces. Carry sheets vertically.

Do not drag sheets across each other, or across other materials. Protect edges, corners and surface finish from damage.

3.6 SUBSTRATE Do not commence work until the substrate is of the standard required by the relevant

manufacturer's technical literature for the specified finish; plumb, level and in true alignment. Maximum moisture content of timber framing to NZS 3602.

Application 3.7 FIXING FLUSH JOINTED WALLS, PAINT OR WALLPAPER Prepare and fix recessed edge sheets to James Hardie installation manual. Fix with

screws and/or nails at edges. 3.8 FIXING FLUSH JOINTED CEILINGS, PAINT Fix ceiling battens at 600mm centres maximum. (Do not fix sheets to the underside of

roof trusses). Fix sheets in an offset pattern so that adjacent end joints do not coincide. Break the ceiling into bays not exceeding 9 metres x 6 metres and provide control joints at the perimeter of each bay. Provide control joints at the junction of large ceilings and narrow passages.

3.9 FIXING IN CERAMIC TILED AREAS Prepare and fix sheets, horizontally or vertically and stagger joints where possible, to

James Hardie installation manual. 3.10 PROVIDE VERTICAL CONTROL JOINTS Provide vertical control joints at 7.2 metre centres maximum for general application and

4.2 metres centres maximum for tiled applications. Provide acoustic sealant in walls having an acoustic rating.

3.11 PROVIDE HORIZONTAL CONTROL JOINTS Provide horizontal control joints at 7.2 metres centres maximum for general application

and 4.2 metre centres maximum for tiled applications. 3.12 PROVIDE EXTERNAL CORNER ANGLE Provide perforated PVC external corner angle or paper faced rigid spine corner mould to

external corners. 3.13 INTERNAL CORNERS When used in tiling applications provide a Lumberlock Stud saver to framed internal

corner prior to fixing of Villaboard® Lining. Provide perforated PVC corner mould, or paper faced rigid spine corner mould or solid

blocking to internal corners. 3.14 SILICONE JOINTS Provide polyethylene tape behind joints finished with flexible sealant. Levels of Finish Refer to AS/NZS 2589. Refer to SELECTIONS/drawings for required levels of finish. 3.15 LEVEL 0, 1 and 2 FINISHES Refer to James Hardie installation manual.




3.16 LEVEL 3 FINISH Application: For use in areas which are to receive heavy or medium texture (spray

or hand applied) finishes or where heavy paper wall coverings are to be applied as the final decoration.

Jointing/setting: Joints and corner joints will be set with James Hardie Base Coat reinforced with perforated paper tape and James Hardie Top Coat.

Finish: This level of finish must be sufficiently smooth to accept vinyl, tiles or textured coatings without blemishes.

3.17 LEVEL 4 FINISH Application: This is generally the accepted level of finish for domestic construction.

It is used where light textures or wall coverings and smooth textured finishes and satin/flat/low sheen paints are illuminated by non-critical lighting.

Jointing/setting: Refer to flush jointing recommendations on page 11 James Hardie Villaboard® Lining installation manual.

Finish: For use where light-texture coatings or wallpaper or other lightweight wall coverings are to be applied. For painted finishes in non-critical lighting areas flat and low-sheen textured paints are to be applied. Gloss and semi-gloss paints are not generally suitable over this level of finish as any minor blemish will show under critical light. The weight, texture and sheen level or wall coverings applied over this level of finish must be carefully evaluated. Joints and fasteners must be adequately concealed if the wallcovering material is lightweight, contains limited pattern, has a gloss finish, or any combination of these features is present. Unbacked vinyl wall coverings are not suitable over this level of finish.

3.18 LEVEL 5 FINISH Application: This level of finish is for use where gloss or semi-gloss paints are

specified or where critical lighting conditions occur on satin, flat or low sheet paints.

Jointing/setting: Typically all joints and corner joints will have tape embedded in James Hardie Base Coat applied over all joints, angles, fastener heads and accessories. A thin skim coat of James Hardie Top Coat must be applied to the entire surface to be plastered. The surface must be finished smooth and free of tool marks and ridges and special care must be taken with the application of the finishing compound to achieve a smooth, true surface suitable for these critical finishes.

Finish: This level of finish is for use where gloss, semi-gloss, low-sheen or non-textured paints are specified or where critical lighting conditions occur.

Joint Finishing 3.19 JOINT FINISHING FOR LOW SHEEN PAINT Apply James Hardie Base Coat to fill recess. Firmly embed perforated paper tape in

joints and cover with a thin layer of James Hardie Top Coat over all joints, angles, fastener heads and accessories and allow to dry. Apply a second coat of James Hardie Top Coat over the recess and feather the edges to achieve a level 4 finish.

3.20 JOINT FINISHING FOR TILED AREAS Joints and corner joints set with James Hardie Base Coat reinforced with perforated

paper tape to achieve a level 3 finish. Completion 3.21 REPLACE Replace damaged or marked elements. 3.22 CLEAN Clean adjoining surfaces and fittings of spots, marks, dust and droppings.


3.23 LEAVE Leave work to the standard required by following procedures. 3.24 REMOVE Remove debris, unused materials and components from the site. 4. SELECTIONS Linings 4.1 JAMES HARDIE VILLABOARD® LINING Location: Facilities Type: James Hardie Villaboard® Lining Thickness: 9mm walls; 6mm ceilings Fixing method: Screw 4.2 FIXING FLUSH JOINTED WALLS, PAINT OR WALLPAPER Location: Facilities Fasteners: 40mm x 2.8mm galvanized HardieFlex™ nail Villadrive 6

gauge x 30mm self embedding screw HardieDrive™ 7 gauge x 30mm self embedding screw

4.3 FIXING FLUSH JOINTED CEILINGS, PAINT Location: Facilities Finish: Paint to Architects specification Abutment detail: 40mm x 2.8mm galvanized HardieFlex™ nail Villadrive 6


4.4 FIXING CERAMIC TILED AREAS Location: Facilities Fasteners: 40mm x 2.8mm galvanized HardieFlex™ nail Villadrive 6


4.5 LEVELS OF FINISH To conform to the following levels of finish:

Location Finish level

facilities 5

© CIL Masterspec Aug 2016 DRAFT 5113G GIB® PLASTERBOARD LININGS

5113G GIB® PLASTERBOARD LININGS 1. GENERAL This section relates to the supply, fixing and jointing of GIB® plasterboard linings and

accessories to timber and steel framed walls and ceilings to form: - standard systems - superior finish quality systems - bracing systems - fire rated garage boundary wall systems - wet area systems 1.1 RELATED WORK Refer to the following: - 3821 TIMBER FRAMING for farming. - 4161T THERMAKRAFT UNDERLAYS, FOILS & DPC for wall underlays - 4711A AUTEX GREENSTUF THERMAL INSULATION for insulation. - 6721W WATTYL TAUBMANS PAINTING IUNTERIOR for interior painting finishes 1.2 ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS Refer to the general section 1232 INTERPRETATION & DEFINITIONS for abbreviations

and definitions used throughout the specification. The following abbreviations apply specifically to this section: AWCINZ Association of Wall and Ceiling Industries New Zealand Documents 1.3 DOCUMENTS Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The following

documents are specifically referred to in this section: NZBC C/AS2-AS6 Protection from fire NZBC E2/AS1 External moisture AS 1397 Continuous hot-dip metallic coated steel sheet and strip - Coatings of

zinc and zinc alloyed with aluminium and magnesium AS/NZS 2588 Gypsum plasterboard AS/NZS 2589 Gypsum linings - Application and finishing NZS 3604 Timber-framed buildings AS/NZS 4600 Cold-formed steel structures ISO 5660.1 Reaction-to-fire tests - Heat release, smoke production and mass loss

rate - Part 1: Heat release rate (cone calorimeter method) ISO 5660.2 Reaction-to-fire tests - Heat release, smoke production and mass loss

rate - Part 2: Smoke production rate (dynamic measurement) BRANZ Technical Paper P21 BRANZ Technical Paper P21: A wall bracing test and

evaluation procedure (2010) NASH Residential and Low-Rise Steel Framing Part 1 2010 Design Criteria 1.4 MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER DOCUMENTS Manufacturer’s and supplier’s documents relating to this part of the work: - GIB® Site Guide (Dec 2014) - GIB Ultraline® Plus lining system (February 2006) - GIB® Noise Control Systems (March 2006) - GIB® Fire Rated Systems (Oct 2012) - GIB Aqualine® Wet Area Systems (March 2007) - GIB Superline® (June 2013) - GIB® Ezybrace® Systems (June 2011), with amendments (Dec 2014) - GIB® Ezybrace® Software (2011), with amendments (Dec 2014) - GIB® Ezybrace® for Steel Frame Housing (NASH) Software (2011) - GIB® Rondo® Metal Ceiling Batten Systems - GIB-Cove® - GIB® Goldline™ Platinum Tape-on Trims (Jan 2006)








- GIB® UltraFlex® high impact corner mould (Sept 2004) - GIB® Tough Systems (Nov 2014) BRANZ Appraisal 294 (2011) - GIB® Ezybrace® Systems BRANZ Appraisal 427 (2007) - GIB Aqualine® Wet Area Systems GreenTag Certification - GreenTag™ GreenRate/Level C for: - GIB® Standard (10mm & 13mm) - GIB Fyreline®(10mm, 13mm, 16mm &19mm) - GIB Braceline® (10mm & 13mm) - GIB® Noiseline® (10mm & 13mm) - GIB Toughline® (13mm) Copies of the above literature are available at Company: Winstone Wallboards Web: www.gib.co.nz Telephone: 0800 100 442 Requirements 1.6 INSTALLER WORK SKILLS AND QUALIFICATIONS GIB® plasterboard fixers and plasterers to be experienced competent workers, familiar

with GIB® plasterboard lining systems installation and finishing techniques. Submit evidence of experience on request. For example:

- National Certificate of Interior Systems; or - Certified Business member of AWCINZ. Performance 1.7 INSPECTIONS AND ACCEPTANCE Allow for inspection of the finished plasterboard surface: - before applying sealer and - before applying finish coatings or decorative papers, so that after assessment of the type and/or angle of illumination and its effect on the

completed decorative treatment, group approval and acceptance of the surface can be given.

1.8 SURFACE FIRE PROPERTIES - UNFINISHED BOARD All GIB® unfinished plasterboard sheet materials achieve a Group Classification of,

Group 1-S to NZBC C/AS2-AS6, Table 4.1, following testing in accordance with ISO 5660.1 and ISO 5660.2.

2. PRODUCTS Materials 2.1 GIB® PLASTERBOARD Gypsum plaster core encased in a face and backing paper formed for standard and water

resistance use to AS/NZS 2588. Refer to SELECTIONS for location, type, thickness and finish.

GIB® Standard plasterboard GIB Wideline® plasterboard GIB Ultraline® and/or GIB® Ultraline PLUS high quality surface plasterboard GIB Fyreline® fire resistant plasterboard GIB Braceline® & GIB® Noiseline® dual purpose wall bracing & noise control

plasterboard GIB Aqualine® wet area plasterboard GIB Toughline® GIB Superline® Components 2.2 CEILING BATTENS GIB® Rondo® metal ceiling battens, batten joiners and perimeter channel.



http://www.gib.co.nz/




2.3 SCREWS GIB® Grabber® drywall screws. 2.4 NAILS GIB® Nails (gold passivated). Size: 30mm, 40mm 2.5 TAPE ON TRIMS AND EDGES GIB® Goldline™ tape-on trims GIB® UltraFlex® high impact corner mould GIB® Levelline® Tape on Trim 2.6 METAL ANGLE TRIMS GIB® galvanized steel slim angle trims. 2.7 CONTROL JOINTS GIB® Rondo® P35 control joints. GIB® Goldline™ tape-on trims Accessories 2.8 ADHESIVE Timber frame and/or steel frame: GIBFix® One ultra low VOC water based wallboard adhesive GIBFix® All-Bond solvent based wallboard adhesive 2.9 JOINTING COMPOUND

Bedding compound: GIB Tradeset®, GIB Lite Blue®, GIB MaxSet®, GIB ProMix® All Purpose, GIB Plus 4®

Finishing compound: GIB ProMix® All Purpose, GIB® Trade Finish®, GIB® Trade Finish® Lite, GIB ProMix® Lite, GIB® U-Mix, GIB Plus 4®, GIB Trade Finish® Multi

Cove: GIB-Cove® Bond

2.10 JOINTING TAPE GIB® paper jointing tape. 2.11 GAP FILLER GIB® Gap Filler ultra low VOC multi-purpose acrylic flexible filler 3. EXECUTION Conditions 3.1 STORAGE Store GIB® plasterboard sheets and accessories in dry conditions stored indoors out of

direct sunlight in neat flat stacks on either an impervious plastic sheet or clear of the floor with no sagging and avoiding damage to ends, edges and surfaces. Reject damaged material. Refer to GIB® Site Guide (Dec 2014).

3.2 LEVELS OF PLASTERBOARD FINISH Provide the selected plasterboard surfaces to the pre decorative levels of finish specified

in AS/NZS 2589. 3.3 CONFIRM LEVELS OF PLASTERBOARD FINISH ACCEPTANCE Before commencing work, agree in writing upon the surface finish assessment procedure

towards ensuring that the quality of finish expectations are reasonable and are subsequently obtained and acceptable.

Do not apply decorative treatment until it is agreed in writing by the contractor,

subcontractors and decorator that the specified plasterboard Level of Finish has been achieved.



"Levels of plasterboard finish" is a tool for specifying the required quality of finish when

installing and flush stopping GIB® plasterboard prior to the application of a range of decorative finishes under various lighting conditions. Refer to AS/NZS 2589.

3.4 SUBSTRATE Do not commence work until the substrate is plumb, level and to the standard required by

the sheet manufacturer's requirements. Refer to GIB® Site Guide (Dec 2014). 3.5 TIMBER FRAME MOISTURE CONTENT Maximum allowable moisture content to AS/NZS 2589 for timber framing at lining: 18% or

less for plasterboard linings. Refer to NZBC E2/AS1 and GIB® Site Guide (Dec 2014). 3.6 PROTECTION Protect surfaces; cabinetwork, fittings, equipment and finishes already in place from the

possibility of water staining and stopping damage. Refer to GIB® Site Guide (Dec 2014). Application 3.7 INSTALL CEILING BATTENS Install to GIB® Rondo® Ceiling Batten Systems requirements. 3.8 LINING WALLS AND CEILINGS GENERALLY Form to GIB® Site Guide (Jan 2010). Ensure bulk insulation thickness shall not exceed

that of the wall framing. 3.9 BOARD ORIENTATION Minimise joints by careful sheet layout using the largest sheet sizes possible, and

generally fixing horizontally. Where part sheets are required for various stud heights they should be positioned so the cut sheet is as low as possible to keep joints below eye level.

3.10 FORM CONTROL JOINTS Form control joints to GIB® Site Guide (Dec 2014) requirements. 3.11 INSTALL TAPE-ON TRIMS Install to GIB® Goldline™ Tape-on trims literature and/or GIB® Ultraflex high impact

corner mould literature. Finishing 3.12 FINISHING GENERALLY To GIB® Site Guide (Dec 2014) and AS/NZS 2589. Completion 3.13 REPLACE Replace damaged sheets or elements. 3.14 CLEAN DOWN Clean down completed surfaces to remove irregularities and finally sand down with fine

paper to the sheet manufacturer's requirements, to leave completely smooth and clean. 3.15 REMOVE Remove debris, unused materials and elements from the site. 3.16 LEAVE Leave work to the standard required by following procedures. 4. SELECTIONS Plasterboard





4.1 GIB® STANDARD SYSTEMS WALLS

Location Plasterboard type / Lining requirements

Thickness Finish Level

GIB® Standard plasterboard 10mm Level 4


GIB Ultraline® plasterboard 10mm Level 4

GIB Ultraline® PLUS plasterboard 13mm Level 4

4.2 GIB® STANDARD SYSTEMS CEILINGS

Location Plasterboard type / Lining requirements

Thickness Finish Level

Internal Learning area ceilings


Optional to above GIB Ultraline® PLUS plasterboard 13mm Level 4

Accessories 4.3 GIB® RONDO® CEILING BATTENS Brand/type: GIB® Rondo® Ceiling battens 4.4 GIB® TAPE ON EDGE OR CORNER TRIMS Brand/type: Manufacturer's recommendation 4.5 GIB® EDGE PROFILES Brand/type: Rondo / P06, P09, P51, P52, P53, R50 EXANGLE Range

© CIL Masterspec Aug 2016 DRAFT 5122 PLYWOOD LININGS

5122 PLYWOOD LININGS 1. GENERAL This section relates to the use of plywood sheets for: - interior lining - installed as bracing (as lining or under lining) - specialist plywood panelling 1.1 RELATED SECTIONS Refer to the following: - 3821 TIMBER FRAMING for farming. - 4161T THERMAKRAFT UNDERLAYS, FOILS & DPC for wall underlays - 4711A AUTEX GREENSTUF THERMAL INSULATION for insulation. Documents 1.2 DOCUMENTS REFERRED TO Documents referred to in this section are: NZBC B1/AS1 Structure NZBC E2/AS1 External moisture AS/NZS 2269.0 Plywood - Structural - Specifications AS/NZS 2270 Plywood and blockboard for interior use NZS 3604 Timber-framed buildings Documents listed above and cited in the clauses that follow are part of this specification.


1.3 MANUFACTURER'S DOCUMENTS Manufacturer's and supplier's documents relating to work in this section are: Copies of the above literature are available from Plytech Web: plytech.co.nz Email: refer to website Telephone: +64 9573 5016 Facsimile: -64 9573 5035 2. PRODUCTS Materials 2.1 PLYWOOD LINING To AS/NZS 2270. Refer to SELECTIONS for type. Components 2.2 PANEL PINS Refer to the plywood manufacturer's requirements and use 30mm, 40mm and 50mm

plated panel pins for interior linings. 2.3 NAILS Refer to the panel manufacturer's requirements. Galvanized or stainless steel for H3

CCA treated sheets. Use annular grooved or twisted shank nails for roof sarking. 2.4 SCREWS Refer to the manufacturer's requirements for size and use. Accessories








2.5 ADHESIVE Use only multi-purpose water or solvent based wallboard adhesives required by the

plywood manufacturer. 3. EXECUTION Conditions 3.1 HANDLE Handle sheets carefully and reject those with damaged faces or edges. 3.2 STORE Store sheets in stacks clear of the ground, supported without sagging on evenly spaced

horizontal bearers. Protect from damage and weather. 3.3 FRAMING To NZS 3604 and the plywood manufacturer's requirements. Maximum moisture content: 18 %. Application - General 3.4 SUPPORT Fully support all edges and joints, except where tongue and groove is used. 3.5 EXPANSION Allow a 2-3mm gap at edges of linings for sheet expansion; and 2 - 3mm at each sheet joint; or 6 - 9mm at 3.6 metres; or 8 - 12mm every 4.8 metres In areas with an expected high level of internal moisture, allow a gap of 4 - 6mm every

1.2 metres. Application - linings 3.6 FIXING GENERALLY A combination of panel pins and glueing. 3.7 FIT AND FIX PLYWOOD SHEETS Fit and fix as detailed to the plywood manufacturer's requirements with sheets and trim in

plumb, true alignment, face and grain. Completion 3.8 REPLACE Replace damaged or marked elements. 3.9 LEAVE Leave work to the standard required by following procedures. 3.10 REMOVE Remove debris, unused materials and elements from the site. 3.11 PROTECTION Protect the surfaces and the finished work until coatings or finishes are applied. 4. SELECTIONS 4.1 PLYWOOD LINING Location: Interior Learning Areas Brand/type: Plytech / Hoop pine interior Thickness: 18mm Treatment: Bora treated End/edge profile: 2mm arrise



Face/back grade: B / BB Face pattern: Finish: Clear polyurethane finish 4.2 FIXINGS, PLYWOOD Lining: Plywood Fixing type/finish: Screw / 316 stainless Steel Centres: 400max

© CIL Masterspec Aug 2016 DRAFT 5431 PARTICLEBOARD FLOORS

5431 PARTICLEBOARD FLOORS 1. GENERAL This section relates to the supply and fixing of particleboard as a floor. 1.1 RELATED WORK Refer to the following: - 3821 TIMBER FRAMING for farming. - 4161T THERMAKRAFT UNDERLAYS, FOILS & DPC for underlays - 5438H JAMES HARDIE FIBRE CEMENT SHEET LININGS for flooring preparation

over. - 6512J JACOBSEN CARPET TILES for floor overlays. - 6612J JACOBSEN ENTRANCE MATTING for floor overlays Documents 1.2 DOCUMENTS Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The following

documents are specifically referred to in this section: AS/NZS 1860.1 Particleboard flooring - Specifications NZS 3604 Timber-framed buildings 1.3 MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER DOCUMENTS Manufacturer's and supplier's documents relating to this part of the work: - Kopine Specification and Installations Guide - Kopine Material Safety Data Sheet Particle Board - Kopine Tongue and Groove Flooring Information Bulletin Manufacturer/supplier contact details Company: Kopine Web: kopine.co.nz Email: sales@kopine Telephone: 0800 866 678 Requirements 1.4 QUALIFICATIONS Workers to be experienced, competent trades people familiar with the materials and

techniques specified. 2. PRODUCTS 2.1 PARTICLEBOARD FLOORING To AS/NZS 1860.1. 2.2 NAILS Hand-driven nails: - 60 x 2.8mm hot-dipped galvanized jolt head nails or 60 x 3.15mm hot-dipped galvanized

csk annular grooved flooring nails. Power-driven nails: - 65 x 2.87mm hot-dipped galvanized annular grooved flooring nails. Jolt head nails must be used where particle board is to be exposed (clear finished). 2.3 SCREWS Sure-fast type countersunk 50mm x 8 gauge, minimum length 50mm, minimum Class 3

or stainless steel 2.4 ADHESIVE One-component polyurethane based construction adhesive or elastomeric construction

adhesive.





3. EXECUTION Conditions 3.1 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Take delivery of packets of particle board, all from the same batch for clear finish floors

and store flat stacked on site and protect from damage. Protect finished surfaces, edges and corners from damage. Move/handle particle board in accordance with manufacturer's requirements. Reject and replace goods that are damaged or will not provide the required finish. 3.2 LAYING PATTERN Ensure framing suits the required laying pattern. 3.3 SUBSTRATE Do not commence work until the substrate is plumb and level, in true alignment and to the

particleboard manufacturer's requirements. 3.4 SUPPORT EDGES AND JOINTS Fully support edges and joints on square edges of sheets. T&G edged sheet joints are

not fully supported unless shown otherwise. 3.5 FLOOR DIAPHRAGMS Install floor diaphragms in accordance with NZS 3604, 7.3 Structural floor diaphragms

and flooring manufacturer's requirements. Support all edges of sheets. Application 3.6 ADHESIVE FASTENING Use adhesive fastening to joists in conjunction with mechanical fixing, using the adhesive

required by the flooring manufacturer. Apply adhesive to all floor joists, square edge butt joints and grooved edge butt joints, in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements.

3.7 NAIL FIXING Nail edges at 150mm centres along short side of the sheets and around the perimeter of

the entire floor, and at 200mm centres along intermediate joists, with all nails slightly skewed except for corner vertical nails. Fixings must be a minimum of 10mm from the panel edge. With tongue and groove flooring nails must be 15mm from the edge to avoid tongue damage.

3.8 SCREW FIXING Fix screws at 150mm centres along short side of the sheets and around the perimeter of

the entire floor, and at 200mm centres along intermediate joists. Fixings must be a minimum of 10mm from the panel edge. With tongue and groove flooring fix screws 15mm from the edge to avoid tongue damage. Pre-drill for screw fixing. Overdriven screws must be removed and set in a new position.

3.9 EXPANSION JOINTS - LARGER FLOORS Lay flooring to allow for a 40mm expansion gap for large floor areas to manufacturer's

requirements. Locate under internal walls where possible. Installation 3.10 LAYING FLOORING - TONGUE AND GROOVE Install flooring to manufacturer's requirements. Programme work for minimal exposure to

weather. - Lay sheets across the joists in a staggered pattern from the centre of large areas, with

continuous edge support at building perimeter. Sheets to span at least 3 joists. Lay sheet brand name down.

- Leave 10mm expansion clearance where partitions or walls interrupt and an 8mm minimum clearance between panel edges and fixed objects including columns and bottom plates. Fix sheets using construction adhesive in conjunction with mechanical fixing.



- Apply adhesive in a continuous 5mm bead to all floor joists and nogs, and a 2mm bead to the top of the tongue prior to insertion into the groove.

- Fix sheets with nails or screws to manufacturer's requirements. - Finish all fixings flush with surface at time of fixing. Tighten fixings; punch nails and

tighten screws just prior to sanding. Close butt edges of sheets. Do not cramp sheets. Do not allow water to pond on the floor surface. Clean surface of flooring daily to remove

sawdust and shavings, when exposed to the weather. 3.11 LAYING FLOORING - GROOVED EDGE Install flooring to manufacturer's requirements. Programme work for minimal exposure to

weather. - Lay sheets across the joists in a staggered pattern from the centre of large areas, with

continuous edge support at building perimeter. Sheets to span at least 3 joists. Lay sheet brand name down.

- Leave 10mm expansion clearance where partitions or walls interrupt and an 8mm minimum clearance between panel edges and fixed objects including columns and bottom plates. Fix sheets using construction adhesive in conjunction with mechanical fixing.

- Apply adhesive in a continuous 10mm bead to all floor joists and nogs. - Apply a generous glue bead to short edge of sheet. Repeat application for the groove

on the long edge of the sheet. - Fix sheets with nails or screws to manufacturer's requirements. Clean off excess

adhesive. - Finish all fixings flush with surface at time of fixing. Tighten fixings; punch nails and

tighten screws just prior to sanding. Close butt edges of sheets. Do not cramp sheets. Do not allow water to pond on the floor surface. Clean surface of flooring daily to remove

sawdust and shavings, when exposed to the weather. 3.12 FINISHING Refer to the flooring manufacturer's requirements regarding timing of nail punching and

general sanding procedures. Lightly sand for floor coverings and 3-cut sand for clear finish. Hand sand into corners.



repair is not possible or will not be acceptable. Leave work to the standard required for following procedures.

3.15 PROTECTION Provide the following temporary protection of the finished work: - Carpet tiles. - Entrance mats. 4. SELECTIONS 4.1 PARTICLEBOARD FLOORING Manufacturer: Kopine Brand/grade: Kopine tongue and groove Thickness: 20mm Edge detail: Tongue and Groove Fixing type/finish: Nail and adhesive / Stainless Steel Floor finish: Covered 4.2 CONSTRUCTION METHOD Method: Platform method - Sheet to perimeter of building with all top plates on

top of sheet.


4.3 DIAPHRAGM CONSTRUCTION METHOD Method: 1200mm wide sheets with all edges supported, nail or nail plus

adhesive fixed, sheet edge to perimeter of building with all wall plates on top of sheet.

© CIL Masterspec Aug 2016 DRAFT 5438H JAMES HARDIE FIBRE CEMENT INTERIOR FLOORING

5438H JAMES HARDIE FIBRE CEMENT INTERIOR FLOORING 1. GENERAL This section relates to the supply and installation of James Hardie Secura™ Interior

Flooring substrate for: - interior wet and dry area applications - over timber or lightweight steel floor joists. 1.1 RELATED WORK Refer to tiling section for tiling. Refer to waterproofing section for waterproofing. Documents 1.2 DOCUMENTS Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The following

documents are specifically referred to in this section: NZBC E3/AS1 Internal moisture AS/NZS 2908.2 Cellulose-cement products - Flat sheet NZS 3602 Timber and wood-based products for use in buildings 1.3 MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER DOCUMENTS Manufacturer's and supplier's documents relating to this part of the work: James Hardie Secura™ Interior Flooring Installation Manual Manufacturer/supplier contact details Company: James Hardie New Zealand Web: www.jameshardie.co.nz Email: [email protected] Telephone: Ask James Hardie™ on 0800 808 868 Warranties 1.4 WARRANTY - MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER Provide a material manufacturer/supplier warranty: 15 years: For James Hardie™ Secura™ Interior Flooring. (refer to James Hardie™ product warranty) 15 year: For accessories supplied by James Hardie (refer to James Hardie™

product warranty) From: Date of purchase - Provide this warranty on the manufacturer's standard form. Refer to the general section 1237 WARRANTIES for additional requirements. Requirements 1.6 COMPLIANCE Fibre cement sheets to AS/NZS 2908.2. 2. PRODUCTS Materials 2.1 FIBRE CEMENT SHEET FLOORING Secura™ Interior Flooring, lightweight proprietary Scyon® technology, 2700mm x 600mm

x 19mm thick fibre cement sheet, manufactured from treated cellulose fibre, Portland cement, sand and water to AS/NZS 2908.2. Tongue and groove jointing system and pre-sealed with a water resistant sealer.

Components








2.2 NAILS FOR TIMBER 50mm x 2.87mm RounDrive, Stainless steel or hot dipped galvanised nails. Accessories - not supplied by James Hardie 2.3 BACKING ROD PEF backing rod to be used with sealant in control joints. 2.4 SEALANT James Hardie approved sealant used in v joint for tiled applications. Ensure compatibility

with waterproofing membrane system selected. 2.5 WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE James Hardie approved waterproofing membrane over the Secura™ Interior Flooring in

wet areas. Refer to waterproofing section. 2.6 ADHESIVE Adhesive used over joists prior to installation of Secura™ Interior Flooring. Refer to

adhesive manufacturers technical data and James Hardie technical specifications. Refer to adhesive section.

3. EXECUTION Conditions 3.1 MOISTURE CONTENT Maximum moisture content of timber framing to NZS 3602. 3.2 STORAGE Take delivery of products dry and undamaged on pallets, and keep on pallet. Protect

edges and corners from damage and covered to keep dry until fixed. 3.3 HANDLING Avoid distortion and contact with potentially damaging surfaces. Carry sheets vertically.

Do not drag sheets across each other, or across other materials. Protect edges, corners and surface finish from damage.

3.4 SUBSTRATE Do not commence work until the substrate is of the standard required by the relevant

manufacturer's technical literature for the specified finish; plumb, level and in true alignment. Maximum moisture content of timber framing to NZS 3602.

Application 3.5 SUPPORT FRAMING Ensure support framing is completed to James Hardie stated requirements. 3.6 SUPPORT EDGES AND JOINTS Fully support edges and joints of sheets, other than tongue and groove joints. 3.7 FIXINGS Minimum 50mm from a corner, 12mm from the edge, 200mm maximum centres along

edges and on intermediate supports. Leave heads flush with surface. 3.8 FIXING SHEETS - TILE APPLICATIONS Fix Secura™ Interior Flooring sheets to James Hardie requirements. Lay sheets in a

staggered layout, long edge of sheet at right-angles to support and with sheets in square, true alignment and plane. Install sheet with label 'This side down for tiles' facing down. Always lay sheets across the floor joists. Refer to tiling section for tiling.




3.9 WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE - WET AREAS Ensure all sheet fixing is completed to James Hardie installation requirements before the

primer and solvent free waterproofing membrane is applied. Refer to waterproofing section for waterproofing installation and manufactures requirements.

3.10 CUT SHEETS Ensure the minimum length of any site cut sheet is 900mm minimum or more. 3.11 CONTROL JOINTS Form control joints where floor dimensions exceed 4.05 metres in the long direction and

where existing structural joints are located. Position joints symmetrical about the centre of the floor where possible. Form control joints where there are changes in wall direction and at doorways where the tiled surface is carried through into the next room. When laying tiles the joint location must coincide with the control joint in the underlay.

Place a 6-8mm diameter polyethylene backing rod in the bottom of the joint between the

sheets and fill the joint with a suitable flexible sealant. All square edges to be fully supported.

Completion 3.12 REPLACE Replace damaged or marked elements. 3.13 CLEAN Clean adjoining surfaces and fittings of spots, marks, dust and droppings. 3.14 LEAVE Leave work to the standard required by following procedures. 3.15 REMOVE Remove debris, unused materials and components from the site. 4. SELECTIONS For further details on selections go to www.jameshardie.co.nz 4.1 SECURA™ INTERIOR FLOORING Location: Facilities Brand: James Hardie Type: Secura™ Interior Flooring Thickness: 19mm Fixings: 50mm x 2.87mm RounDrive, stainless steel or hot dipped galvanised

nails.


© CIL Masterspec Aug 2016 DRAFT 5511 JOINERY & CABINETRY FIXTURES

5511 JOINERY & CABINETRY FIXTURES 1. GENERAL This section relates to custom joinery fittings and cabinetwork, purpose made in a factory

and fitted on site. 1.1 RELATED WORKS Refer to 7151 SANITARY FIXTURES, TAPWARE & ACCESSORIES for fixtures. Documents 1.2 DOCUMENTS REFERRED TO Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The following

documents are specifically referred to in this section: AS/NZS 1859.1 Reconstituted wood based panels - Specifications - Particleboard AS/NZS 1859.2 Reconstituted wood based panels - Specifications - Dry processed

fibreboard AS/NZS 1859.3 Reconstituted wood based panels - Specifications - decorative

overlaid wood panels AS/NZS 4386.1 Domestic kitchen assemblies - Kitchen units AS/NZS 4386.2 Domestic kitchen assemblies - Installation 1.3 MANUFACTURER'S DOCUMENTS The Contractor shall inform themselves of all the manufacturer's documents and

specifications and ensure that documents are current and up to date. 2. PRODUCTS Materials 2.1 TIMBER BOARDS AND FRAMES Boards and frames carefully sawn to minimise the inherent warping, twisting and bowing

of the selected species and to give a finish suitable for clear finishing. 2.2 PLYWOOD PANEL Urea-formaldehyde resin hot-press bonded timber veneers, select grade interior. 2.3 PARTICLEBOARD Urea-formaldehyde resin bonded medium density particleboard to AS/NZS 1859.1. 2.4 MEDIUM DENSITY FIBRE BOARD - MELAMINE VENEER Urea-formaldehyde resin bonded wood fibre sheet to AS/NZS 1859.2 and AS/NZS

1859.3 veneered both sides with melamine sheet. Components 2.5 CARCASE CONNECTORS One-piece steel, straight deep-cut thread, fibre board screws with press fit plastic trim

cap. 2.6 CARCASE FASTENERS Knock down type centric sphere zinc alloy connectors with connecting bolts, sleeves and

dowels, to suit each particular fastening location. 2.7 BUTT HINGES Butt, broad butt, flush butt or overlay steel or brass, to suit the location, or as detailed. 2.8 CONCEALED HINGES All-metal zinc alloy with automatic spring and screw-fixed. Door stops of plastic foam

with self adhesive backs, or plastic buttons clear or coloured to match unit.











2.9 GLASS DOOR HINGES All-metal zinc alloy body and metal/plastic glass cup, with automatic spring, screw-fixed

and with matching door pulls. 2.10 FLAP HINGES All-metal, flush-fitted and screw-fixed with no gap when the flap is down. 2.11 FLAP STAY All-metal, slide/folding and screw fixed. 2.12 DRAWER RUNNERS Under mounted type, precision running ball-mounted full extension, bright steel finish

system. Accessories 2.13 ADHESIVES As approved by the manufacturer for the timber product or pre-finished timber product

joint being used. 3. EXECUTION Conditions 3.1 JOINERY FIXTURES GENERALLY Execution to include those methods, practices and processes contained in the current

syllabus for the National Certificate in Carpentry and the National Certificate in Joinery (cabinetry, exterior joinery, stairs). Take responsibility for the completed joinery fixtures including fittings included within fixtures and the on site installation.

3.2 SITE MEASURE Site check and confirm dimensions after wall linings have been fixed. Verify positions of

electric power outlets, wiring to light fittings included in joinery fixtures, water supplies and waste pipe locations.

3.3 SHRINKAGE Arrange jointing and fixing so that shrinkage in any part and direction does not impair the

strength or appearance of the finished work or damage the adjoining work. 3.4 TOLERANCES Provide reasonable tolerances at connections between the joinery fittings and the

building fabric so that any irregularities are adequately compensated for in the site fixing. 3.5 NATURAL FINISH TIMBER Select timber for match or uniformity or symmetry of colour or grain of adjacent pieces.

Finish to same standard on all faces. 3.6 PRE-FINISH MELAMINE VENEER Select and match all adjacent pieces. Clash exposed edges of wood grains with solid

matching timber strips and with selected PVC strips to other patterns. Conditions - site 3.7 TRANSIT Load, transport and unload fittings without distortion or damage and keep covered to

protect from the weather. 3.8 DELIVERY Deliver fittings to the site only when floor, wall and ceiling surfaces are in place and the

fittings can be immediately placed in their final location. Assembly


3.9 MACHINING Carry out machining within the practices required for the particular timber, wood product

or pre-finished wood product being used. Machine drill holes, cut recesses and form joints ready for assembly to the componentry manufacturer's requirements. Ensure work is accurate, square and true to line.

3.10 MAKE CUT OUTS FOR APPLIANCES AND FITTINGS Obtain fitting templates from the appliances and other fittings to be installed within joinery

fixtures and bench tops. Ensure appliances and fittings can be installed with the required tolerances and clearances. Where bench tops are being provided under other work sections, provide templates and confirm dimensions to others.

3.11 ASSEMBLY Carry out gluing, dowelling, and other operations necessary for the proper assembly of

the fittings as detailed with fixings concealed unless detailed otherwise. Scribe fit adjustable shelves with 4 shelf pins to each and with force fit pin holes at 50mm maximum centres in solid cheeks. Construct drawers and using groove mounting runners, fit them with 3mm clearance into drawer space. Hang doors on concealed hinges with 115 degree openings except where detailed for 170 degrees.

3.12 GLUE JOINTS Use glue joints where provision for shrinkage is not required. Cross-tongue or otherwise

reinforce. Surfaces in contact to have an even sawn or planed finish and be free of contamination. Mix, apply and set to the glue manufacturer's requirements with adequate pressure applied to ensure intimate contact that will be maintained while the glue sets.

3.13 CONNECTOR JOINTS Locate and drive connectors to the board manufacturer's requirements. Fit plastic trim

cap where detailed. Conceal or hide from sight other connector heads. 3.14 FASTENER JOINTS Locate and drive connecting bolts to the board manufacturer's requirements. Form joint

and fit and rotate centric sphere connector to finish it rigid and tightly fitting over the whole length of the joint.

Application 3.15 FIXING ON SITE - Scribe fit and conceal fix rigidly in place square, level, plumb and true to line and face

as detailed and to the required standard. - Assemble fittings on-site if brought in sections. - Fit counter and bench tops and upstands. - Complete with moveable parts in place and freely moving in their proper range. 3.16 PROTECT Protect finished surfaces from damage, particularly benchtops. Completion 3.17 REPLACE Replace damaged or marked elements. 3.18 LEAVE Leave work complete, clean and without blemish and to the standard required by

following procedures. 3.19 REMOVE Remove debris, unused materials and elements from the site. 4. SELECTIONS 4.1 TIMBER BOARDS AND FRAMES Species/grading: Contractor to specify for approval.


4.2 PLYWOOD PANEL Manufacturer: Interior grade, clear polyurethane finish. Contractor to specify for

approval Grade/brand: 2 Thickness: 25mm min Species/cut: Evenly as a bench top or desk 4.3 PARTICLEBOARD Contractor to specify for approval 4.4 MEDIUM DENSITY FIBRE BOARD - MELAMINE VENEER Manufacturer: Contractor to specify for approval Product name: Contractor to specify for approval Thickness: 18mm and up depending on load and span. Pattern/colour: White Clashing: matching PVC strip 4.5 CARCASE CONNECTORS Manufacturer: Contractor to specify for approval Finish: 316 stainless steel Cap colour: Colour to match 4.6 CARCASE FASTENERS Manufacturer: Contractor to specify for approval Product name: Contractor to specify for approval 4.7 BUTT HINGES Manufacturer: Contractor to specify for approval Series/size: Contractor to specify for approval Finish: 316 stainless steel 4.8 CONCEALED HINGES Manufacturer: Contractor to specify for approval Product name: Contractor to specify for approval 4.9 GLASS DOOR HINGES Manufacturer: Contractor to specify for approval Product name: Contractor to specify for approval Decorative cap: Contractor to specify for approval Finish: 316 stainless steel 4.10 FLAP HINGES Manufacturer: Contractor to specify for approval Product name: Contractor to specify for approval Finish: Contractor to specify for approval 4.11 FLAP STAY Manufacturer: Contractor to specify for approval Product name: Contractor to specify for approval Finish: Contractor to specify for approval 4.12 DRAWER RUNNERS Manufacturer: Contractor to specify for approval Product name: Contractor to specify for approval

© CIL Masterspec Aug 2016 DRAFT 5571 TIMBER STAIRS

5571 TIMBER STAIRS 1. GENERAL This section relates to the fabrication and installation of interior timber stairs and landings. 1.1 RELATED WORK Refer to the following: - 3821 TIMBER FRAMING for framing. - 4383 TIMBER DECKING for decking timber to used for treads. Documents 1.2 DOCUMENTS Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The following

documents are specifically referred to in this section: NZBC D1/AS1 Access routes AS/NZS 1860.1 Particleboard flooring - Specifications BRANZ BU 497 Stair construction 1.3 MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER DOCUMENTS The Contractor shall inform themselves of all manufacturer's documents and

specifications and ensure all documents are current and up to date. 2. PRODUCTS Materials 2.1 SOLID TIMBER COMPONENTS Refer to SELECTIONS/DRAWINGS. 3. EXECUTION Conditions 3.1 GENERALLY Execution to include those methods, practices and processes contained in the current

syllabus for the National Certificate in Carpentry and the National Certificate in Joinery (cabinetry, exterior joinery, stairs).

Check site dimensions. Carry out machining within the practices recommended for the

particular timber, wood product or pre-finished wood product being used. Machine drill and cut holes and recesses and form joints to the componentry manufacturer's recommendations. Work to be accurate, square and true to line and face.

Application 3.2 FABRICATE AND INSTALL TIMBER STAIRS Fabricate and install stair flights and landings to comply with NZBC acceptable solution

D1/AS1:4.0 Stairways, and unless detailed otherwise to BRANZ BU 497. House and wedge treads and risers 15mm into strings, all glued, wedged and blocked. Form nosing overhangs of 25mm by splaying risers forward to finish flush with the front of the treads.

Completion 3.3 LEAVE Leave work to the standard required by following procedures. 3.4 REMOVE Remove all debris, unused materials and elements from the site.



© CIL Masterspec Aug 2016 DRAFT 5571 TIMBER STAIRS

4. SELECTIONS 4.1 TIMBER STAIRS Strings: 240mm x 45mm Treads: 90mm x 19mm Kwila reeded timber Risers: no cover Finish: Cabots Aquadeck to match decking

© CIL Masterspec Aug 2016 DRAFT 6211J JACOBSEN WALL TILING

6211J JACOBSEN WALL TILING 1. GENERAL This section relates to the supply and installation of Jacobsen selected tiles to cement

render, concrete masonry and timber substrate walls: - ceramic - porcelain - conglomerate - glass - mosaic wall tiles 1.1 RELATED WORK Refer to the following: - 3821 TIMBER FRAMING for farming. - 4161T THERMAKRAFT UNDERLAYS, FOILS & DPC for wall underlays - 4821 FOSROC SEALANTS for waterproofing Documents 1.2 DOCUMENTS Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The following

documents are specifically referred to this section: AS 3740 Waterproofing of wet areas within residential buildings AS 3958.1 Ceramic tiles - Guide to the installation of ceramic tiles BRANZ Good practice guide: Tiling Documents listed above and cited in the clauses that follow are part of this specification.


1.3 MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER DOCUMENTS Manufacturer's and Jacobsen's products and applications relating to this part of the work: Refer www.ardex.co.nz under Technical Literature. Manufacturer/supplier contact details Company: Jacobsen Freephone: 0800 800 460 Warranties 1.4 WARRANTY - MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER Provide a material manufacturer/supplier warranty: 10 years: For materials - Provide this warranty on the standard form in the general section 1237WA WARRANTY

AGREEMENT. - Commence the warranty from the date of practical completion of the contract works. Refer to the general section 1237 WARRANTIES for additional requirements. 1.5 WARRANTY - INSTALLER/APPLICATOR Provide an installer/applicator warranty: 2 years: For execution - Provide this warranty on the standard form in the general section 1237WA WARRANTY

AGREEMENT. - Commence the warranty from the date of practical completion of the contract works. Refer to the general section 1237 WARRANTIES for additional requirements. Requirements

http://www.ardex.co.nz/


1.6 QUALIFICATIONS Tilers to be experienced competent workers, familiar with the materials and the

techniques specified. Waterproofers to hold a current registered Ardex Approved Applicators Certificate. 1.8 SAMPLES Submit on request samples of the tiles specified, sufficient to show the pattern and the

range of colour finish. 1.9 PROVIDE SPARE TILES Provide spare tiles. Refer to SELECTIONS for type and quantity. 2. PRODUCTS Materials 2.1 WALL TILES Refer to SELECTIONS for type. Accessories 2.2 SUPERFLEX WATERPROOFING SYSTEM Flexible acrylic based liquid waterproofing membrane. Premixed bathroom balcony: Ardex WPM 001 Two part bathroom and balcony: Ardex WPM 002 2.3 WET AREA TILE ADHESIVE Residential and Light Commercial irregular water immersion (Showers etc) Manufacturer: Ardex Brand: Z10 or MPP Pools and Spas immersed in water Manufacturer: Ardex Brand: X77 2.4 WATER RESISTANT ORGANIC ADHESIVE Manufacturer: Ardex Type: D2 2.5 TWO COMPONENT ADHESIVE Manufacturer: Ardex Type: WA100 2.6 GROUT Cement based, compressible and to suit particular location/use. Manufacturer: Ardex 2.7 MOVEMENT JOINT SEALANT Single component, acetic based silicone sealant. Manufacturer: Ardex SE Note: Check compatibility of membrane and sealant, use bond breaking tape to separate

them if required. 3. EXECUTION 3.1 HANDLING AND STORAGE Take delivery of packets of tiles undamaged and dry. Handle tiles with care to avoid

chipping, soiling and damage. Store on hard level standings in non-traffic, non work areas that are enclosed, clean and dry.


3.2 CHECK TILES Check tiles to ensure that they are as specified, from the same batch, of a consistent

colour and pattern and sufficient to complete the work. Reject tiles that vary widely in colour or pattern. Reject tiles that are damaged.

3.3 CONFIRM LAYOUT Before commencing work confirm the proposed layout of tiles and expansion joints and

other visual considerations of the finished work. 3.4 SETTING OUT Before commencing the setting out confirm the number and location of cut tiles. Minimise

in number with no cut tiles less than half size and only at the perimeter of the work. Conditions 3.5 GENERALLY Surface preparation and tiling work to AS 3958.1, as modified by BRANZ Good practice

guide: Tiling. 3.6 SERVICES AND ACCESSORIES Ensure that services and accessories are in place and located to suit the tile layout, and

that the substrate to receive the tiles will allow tiling of the required standard. 3.7 SUBSTRATE TEMPERATURE Do not carry out tiling where the substrate temperature is below 5°C or above 40°C. 3.8 SUBSTRATE Ensure that backgrounds and adjoining surfaces (with the preparation called for in this

section) are of the quality required for work of the required standard. Do not start work until the substrate is brought up to the required preparation standard.

3.9 COMMENCEMENT Commencement of this work means that the substrate and environment are accepted as

satisfactory for work of the required standard. 3.10 LIGHTING Light the tile work as closely and clearly as possible to that of the finished lighting, to

ensure that differences in plane surface are highlighted during installation. Application - preparing new surfaces 3.11 NEW SHEET LININGS Remove contaminants that may affect bonding or adhesion. Surface to finish clean and

dry with a texture to give a complete key to the tile manufacturer's requirements and with a maximum variation in the background plane of 4mm in 2 metres.

Application - waterproof membranes 3.12 INSTALL WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE Install waterproofing membrane between the tile adhesive and the substrate. Reinforce

all junctions of the waterproofing membrane to appropriate Membrane Class as shown in AS 3740: Table 5.2. Unless otherwise specified or shown on the drawings, install waterproof membranes as follows: -

Unenclosed shower cubicle - To 1800mm above floor and 300mm above shower rose. - To at least 1500mm from shower rose. - To the floor within 1500mm of the shower rose. Bath with a shower over and no shower screen - To 1500mm from the shower rose and top edge. - To 1800mm above base of bath. - To the floor within 1500mm of the shower rose.


Bath with shower over and a screen for the shower - To 1800mm height around sides of bath. Bath - To 150mm minimum around the sides and along walls horizontally 150mm minimum. Splashback to a vanity To 300mm minimum up wall behind the vanity. To the floor level at least twice the width of the vanity and 500mm min beyond it at each

end. External deck Wall upstands 150mm minimum above the top surface of the tiles, 100mm minimum at

door thresholds. Application - tile installation 3.13 FITTING TILES Cut edges smooth and install without jagged or flaked edges. Do not install single tiles in

more than one piece. Maintain the heights of wall tile work in full courses to the nearest dimension. Within allowed tolerances, ensure corners of tiles are flush and level with corners of adjacent tiles. Keep joint lines, including mitres, straight and of an even width. Fully bed trim units, moulded or shaped pieces and other accessories with an appropriate bedding material. Fix accessories level, plumb and true to the designated projection at detailed locations and heights.

3.14 MOVEMENT JOINTS Minimum width 6mm, carried through tile and bedding and where substantial movement

is anticipated, through the rigid sheet to the structure. Install joints over expansion joints, at junctions between different backgrounds, abutting other materials, at storey heights horizontally and 3 to 4 metres vertically, at internal corners and at junctions with floors and columns. Ensure joints are clean, formed, filled and with sealant inserted to the sealant manufacturer's requirements.

3.15 TILE FINISH AND JOINTS Ensure finished surface is flat and true to a tolerance of ± 4mm in 2 metres from the

required plane. Clean surplus bedding material from joint spaces and tile surface. Ensure joint widths are consistent throughout the installation with 1.5mm width for dust-pressed tiles and 6mm for extruded tiles, measured at the tile face. Ensure joint alignment is consistent throughout the installation and to a tolerance of ± 4mm in 2 metres from the detailed joint alignment.

3.16 THIN BED FIXING Apply adhesive to a maximum 3mm bed thickness with a minimum of voids. Notched trowel method - for internal dry applications, spread adhesive to a uniform thickness and 'rib' it with a

notched trowel to the adhesive manufacturer's requirements Coverage to AS 3958.1: section 5.6.4.2.

Back buttering - with a trowel butter adhesive evenly over the whole of the back of the tile, slightly thicker

than the final required adhesive thickness. Press and tap firmly into position leaving no voids. Coverage to AS 3958.1: section 5.6.4.2. Do not use "spot-fixing".

Occasionally remove a tile as fixing proceeds to check the maintenance of adequate

contact with the adhesive. 3.17 THICK BED FIXING Apply thick-bed cement based adhesive to an average 6mm bed thickness to the tile

manufacturer's requirements. Prepare and fix tiles by the method required by the tile manufacturer and beat and tap them firmly into place.


Finishing 3.18 APPLY GROUTING Remove spacers. Apply grouting mix to as large an area as can be worked before setting

commences. Work with a grouting tool back and forth until joints are completely filled with no adhesive showing. Avoid damage to the surface of tiles, using masking tape where necessary. Finish to the depth of the cushion and flush with surface to cushion edge and square edge tiles. Remove surplus grout with a damp cloth and tool the joints to finish the grout uniform in colour, smooth and without voids, pinholes or low spots.

3.19 APPLY PROPRIETARY GROUTING Remove spacers. Prepare joints, mix and apply grout and finish off to the tile

manufacturer's requirements, uniform in colour, smooth and without voids, pinholes or low spots.

Completion 3.20 REPLACE Replace damaged tiles or elements. 3.21 CLEANING Upon completion of setting and grouting, thoroughly sponge and wash the tiles to leave

them completely clean and without blemish. Finally polish glazed tiles with a clean dry cloth.

3.22 REMOVE Remove debris, unused materials and elements from the site. 3.23 LEAVE Leave work to the standard required by following procedures. 4. SELECTIONS For further details on selections go to www.ardex.co.nz. 4.1 SAMPLES Samples required for review: No 4.2 JACOBSEN CERAMIC TILES Manufacturer: Jacobsen Vogue range Pattern/number: RAL 5014 Colour: Blue Avio Edging: Stopping angles 4.3 ARDEX PRIMER Manufacture: Ardex Type: Installer to specify manufacturer's specifications 4.4 ARDEX WATERPROOF MEMBRANE Brand: Ardex 4.5 ARDEX TILE ADHESIVE Type: Ardex 4.6 ARDEX GROUT Type: Ardex 4.7 ARDEX MOVEMENT JOINT SEALANT Type: Ardex 4.8 PROVIDE SPARE TILES Tile: Blue Avio Number: RAL 5014



4.9 TILE TRIMS & ANGLES Supply and install Progress Profiles angles and trims supplied by Quantum Group NZ.

www.cg.co.nz.

© CIL Masterspec Aug 2016 DRAFT 6221J JACOBSEN FLOOR TILING

6221J JACOBSEN FLOOR TILING 1. GENERAL This section relates to the supply and setting of selected Jacobsen tiles to concrete and

timber substrate floors, including floor overlays: - ceramic - porcelain - conglomerate - glass mosaic tiles 1.1 RELATED WORK Refer to the following: - 3821 TIMBER FRAMING for farming. - 4161T THERMAKRAFT UNDERLAYS, FOILS & DPC for wall underlays - 4821 FOSROC SEALANTS for waterproofing - 5431 PARTICLEBOARD FLOORS floor base - 5438H JAMES HARDIE FIBRE CEMENT INTERIOR FLOORING for pre-tiling lining.. Documents 1.2 DOCUMENTS Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The following

documents are specifically referred to in this section: NZBC D1/VM1 Access routes NZBC D1/AS1 Access routes AS 2358 Adhesives - For fixing ceramic tiles AS/NZS 3661.1 Slip resistance of pedestrian surfaces - Requirements AS 3740 Waterproofing of wet areas to residential buildings AS 3958.1 Ceramic tiles - Guide to the installation of ceramic tiles AS/NZS 4671 Steel reinforcing material BRANZ Good practice guide: Tiling 1.3 MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER DOCUMENTS Manufacturer's and Jacobsen's adhesives, waterproofing and application relating to this

part of the work: Refer www.ardex.co.nz under Technical Literature. Manufacturer/supplier details Company: Jacobsen Freephone: 0800 800 460 Warranties 1.4 WARRANTY - MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER Provide a material manufacturer/supplier warranty: 10 years: For materials - Provide this warranty on the standard form in the general section 1237WA WARRANTY

AGREEMENT along with Ardex certificate. - Commence the warranty from the date of practical completion of the contract works. Refer to the general section 1237 WARRANTIES for additional requirements. 1.5 WARRANTY - INSTALLER/APPLICATOR Provide an installer/applicator warranty: 2 years: For execution - Provide this warranty on the standard form in the general section 1237WA WARRANTY

AGREEMENT. - Commence the warranty from the date of practical completion of the contract works.







Refer to the general section 1237 WARRANTIES for additional requirements. Requirements 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS Tilers to be experienced competent workers, familiar with the materials and the

techniques specified. Waterproofers to hold a current registered Ardex Approved Applicators Certificate. 1.8 SAMPLES Submit on request samples of the tiles specified, sufficient to show the pattern and the

range of colour finish. 1.9 DEFLECTION CRITERIA FOR SUSPENDED FLOORS Check that the floor is rigid enough for the tiling. Deflection of suspended floors should

not exceed 1/360th of the span under dead load and live load. 1.10 PROVIDE SPARE TILES Provide spare tiles. Refer to SELECTIONS for type and quantity. 2. PRODUCTS Materials 2.1 FLOOR TILES Refer SELECTIONS for type. 2.2 REINFORCING MESH To AS/NZS 4671, galvanized 500mm x 500mm x 2.5mm. 2.3 SEPARATING LAYER Single layer polyethylene film. 2.4 BUILDING UNDERLAY Breather type bitumen saturated kraft paper. Components 2.5 EXPANSION JOINT, METAL AND RUBBER Clear anodised aluminium/brass with metal anchor to set into in situ concrete, cement

screed/bed and complete with rubber infill. 2.6 EXPANSION JOINT, METAL AND COMPOUND Aluminium/brass angles with high density foam rubber insert and jointing compound. 2.7 EXPANSION JOINT, PLASTIC Rigid stabilised PVC sides with flexible central section. Accessories 2.8 SCREED Mix of 1 Part Ardex Abacrete to 3 parts water,1 part neat cement, 3 - 4 parts No. 3

washed sand, Refer to Abacrete packaging for stated requirements. For rapid setting use ARDEX A46 patching and ramping compound.

2.9 TILE ADHESIVE Cement based ceramic tile adhesive to AS 2358. Manufacturer: Ardex 2.10 PROPRIETARY GROUT Cement based, compressible and to suit the particular location and/or use and the tile

manufacturer's requirements.



Manufacturer: Ardex 2.11 EXPANSION JOINT, COMPOUND Single component, acetic based silicone sealant. Manufacturer: Ardex Brand: SE 3. EXECUTION 3.1 HANDLING AND STORAGE Take delivery of packets of tiles undamaged and dry. Handle tiles with care to avoid

chipping, soiling and damage. Store on hard level standings in non-traffic, non work areas that are enclosed, clean and dry.

3.2 CHECK TILES Check tiles to ensure that they are as specified, from the same batch, of a consistent

colour and pattern and sufficient to complete the work. Reject tiles that vary widely in colour or pattern. Reject tiles that are damaged.

3.3 CONFIRM LAYOUT Before commencing work confirm the proposed layout of tiles and expansion joints and

other visual considerations of the finished work. 3.4 SETTING OUT Before commencing the setting out confirm the number and location of cut tiles. Minimise

in number with no cut tiles less than half size and only at the perimeter of the work. 3.5 GENERALLY Surface preparations and tiling work to AS 3958.1, as modified by BRANZ Good practice

guide: Tiling. Conditions 3.6 SERVICES AND ACCESSORIES Ensure that services and accessories are in place and located to suit the tile layout, and

the substrate to receive the tiles is satisfactory and will achieve tiling of the required standard. Bring unsatisfactory substrate up to the required standard before commencing work.

3.7 DO NOT START Do not start laying tiles until concrete floors are cured, moisture content of floors is such

that shrinkage is complete, thermal movement has been accommodated and the levels and surface finish will achieve tile laying of the required standard.

3.8 SUBSTRATE TEMPERATURE Do not carry out tiling where the substrate temperature is below 5°C or above 40°C. 3.9 STARTING WORK Starting means the tiler accepts the substrate as allowing work of the required standard. 3.10 MOISTURE CONTENT Ensure the floor is dry and if in doubt check for moisture content by hygrometer. Do not

proceed with tiling work until readings for the whole area show 75% relative humidity or less.

3.11 SCREEDS Form screeds with a deviation from plane of not more than 5mm over 3 metres. 3.12 FALLS Form screeds in areas where water is used in significant amounts with a deviation from

plane of not more than 5mm over 3 metres. Unless otherwise specified form screeds with the following falls:

1 : 40 minimum For tiled decks which also act as a roof (1 : 30 min for some BCA's)


1 : 40 minimum For paving over ground 1 : 40 minimum For shower bases 1 : 40 For shower bases for people with disabilities 1 : 50 minimum For commercial kitchens Application - preparing new surfaces 3.13 TIMBER SUBFLOOR AND COMPRESSED FIBRE CEMENT SHEET Completely remove surface contaminants such as paints and loose material, to leave a

clean dust and dirt free surface with screw heads flush. Application - expansion joints 3.14 METAL EXPANSION JOINT Accurately locate as detailed and fix joints in situ, with the bedding, or on top of the

bedding, to finish flush with the installed tile and to the tile manufacturer's requirements. Fit and fix rubber/rubber compound inserts to finish flush. Fit expansion joints at regular intervals over the floor area at intervals not exceeding 4 metres, at changes in floor plane and where the floor plane is interrupted.

Application - interior tile installation on timber floors 3.15 FIBRE CEMENT FLOOR AND MODIFIED CEMENT BASED ADHESIVE Align movement joints with overlay joints. Apply and float thick or thin bed of modified

cement based adhesive to bed thickness to the adhesive manufacturer's requirements. Rib surface with a notched trowel, press tiles and place with required grout joints and to obtain adequate coverage by adhesive on the back of each tile to AS3958.1.

3.16 TIMBER PRODUCT FLOOR AND MODIFIED CEMENT BASED ADHESIVE Align movement joints with sheet joints. Spread Ardex X56 adhesive to a uniform

minimum thickness, rib surface with a notched trowel, press tiles and place with required grout joints and to obtain adequate coverage by adhesive on the back of each tile to AS3958.1.

3.17 TIMBER PRODUCT FLOOR, SEPARATING LAYER, ARDEX SCREED Lay polyethylene sheet to a smooth surface, joints lapped 100mm minimum. Place

galvanized steel mesh over with spacers to centralise it in the mortar bed. Thoroughly mix and place the Ardex Abacrete and screed to Ardex Specifications, bed and firmly tamp, screed and compact to the required level. Ensure drying times are observed before installation of tiles by thin/thick set method.

Finishing 3.18 EXPANSION JOINT, COMPOUND Provide expansion joints as detailed; at 4 metre intervals, at the perimeter of floors, at

changes of level and around structural features. Carefully clean out the joint, insert the backing rod and fill with compound placed by gun. After the correct interval, finish the surface off flush to the compound manufacturer's requirements.

3.19 APPLY GROUTING Remove spacers. Apply grouting mix to as large an area as can be worked before setting

commences. Work with a grouting tool back and forth until joints are completely filled with no adhesive showing. Avoid damage to the surface of tiles, using masking tape where necessary. Remove surplus grout with a damp sponge and tool the joints to finish the grout uniform in colour, smooth and without voids, pinholes or low spots.

3.20 APPLY PROPRIETARY GROUTING Remove spacers. Prepare joints, mix and apply grout and finish off to Ardex

requirements, to finish the grout uniform in colour, smooth and without voids, pinholes, or low spots.

Completion


3.21 REPLACE Replace damaged tiles or elements. 3.22 CLEANING Upon completion of setting and grouting, thoroughly sponge and wash the tiles to leave

them completely clean and without blemish. Finally polish glazed tiles with a clean dry cloth.

3.23 REMOVE Remove debris, unused materials and elements from the site. 3.24 LEAVE Leave work to the standard required by following procedures. 3.25 PROTECT TILES Protect tiles from damage. Do not allow tiles to be disturbed by foot traffic for at least 24

hours after laying and after grouting. Provide protection to tiles by laying sheet material such as insulating board for the period between completion of laying and completion of the contract works, or until acceptance/sign off by Architect.

4. SELECTIONS 4.1 SAMPLES Samples required. For further details on selections go to www.ardex.co.nz. 4.2 SEPARATING LAYER Manufacturer: Ardex Brand/number: Ardex Abascreed Thickness: As required and within manufacturers specifications 4.3 BUILDING UNDERLAY Breather type bitumen saturated kraft paper. Manufacturer: Thermakraft Brand/weight: section 4.4 COMPRESSED FIBRE CEMENT SHEET Manufacturer: James Hardie Brand: Villaboard® 4.5 JACOBSEN CERAMIC TILES Manufacturer: Jacobsen Vogue Indent range Pattern/number: RAL9010 Class: 4 Colour: Latte Edging: Proflex AL Grout width: 3mm 4.6 JACOBSEN PORCELAIN TILES Not required 4.7 JACOBSEN MOSAIC TILES Not required 4.8 EXPANSION JOINT, METAL AND RUBBER Manufacturer: Proflex AL Catalogue number: Depending on tIle depth PFXAL/OT Dimensions: Contractor to site verify Rubber colour: N - Black (E85) 4.9 EXPANSION JOINT, METAL AND COMPOUND Not required



4.10 EXPANSION JOINT, PLASTIC Not required 4.11 ARDEX TILE ADHESIVE Type: Ardex 4.12 ARDEX PROPRIETARY GROUT Type: Ardex 4.13 ARDEX PRIMER Type: Ardex 4.14 ARDEX MOVEMENT JOINT SEALANT Type: Ardex Brand: SE 4.15 PROVIDE SPARE TILES Tile: Jacobsen Indent range Number: RAL9010 4.16 TILE TRIMS & ANGLES Supply and install Progress Profiles angles and trims supplied by Quantum Group NZ.

www.cg.co.nz.

© CIL Masterspec Aug 2016 DRAFT 6512J JACOBSEN CARPET TILES

6512J JACOBSEN CARPET TILES 1. GENERAL This section relates to the supply and installation of Jacobsen modular commercial

carpet tiles. 1.1 RELATED WORK Refer to the following: - 5431 PARTICLEBOARD FLOORS for flooring base. Documents 1.2 DOCUMENTS Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The following

documents are specifically referred to in this section: NZBC C/AS2-AS7 Protection from fire AS/NZS 2455.1 Textile floor coverings - installation practice - General AS/NZS 2455.2 Textile floor coverings - installation practice - Carpet tiles 1.3 MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER DOCUMENTS Manufacturer's and supplier's documents relating to this part of the work: Shaw/Tarkett installation Textile flooring maintenance Selected range colours Selected range technical Manufacturer/supplier contact details

Company: Jacobsen Web: www.jacobsens.co.nz Telephone: Auckland 09 574 0640 Wellington 04 495 4300 Christchurch 03 366 4153

Warranties 1.4 WARRANTY Warrant this work under normal environmental and use conditions against failure. 5 years: Carpet tile material 1 year: Execution Provide the execution warranty in the standard form in the general section 1237WA

WARRANTY AGREEMENT. Refer to the general section 1237 WARRANTIES for additional requirements. Requirements 1.5 SAMPLES Provide full size sample tiles for each selected range and colour, for approval of colour,

design and quality. 1.7 QUALIFICATIONS Carpet tile layers to be competent, experienced workers familiar with the materials and

techniques specified. 1.8 RESERVE MATERIAL Supply reserve carpet tiles, suitably packaged for delivery and storage. Refer to

SELECTIONS for details. Performance




http://www.jacobsens.co.nz/


1.9 SURFACE FIRE PERFORMANCE Flooring to meet the fire performance requirements of NZBC C/AS2-AS7, 4.17.3, by: Either, Flooring is tested and achieved the minimum Critical Radiant Flux requirements of NZBC

C/AS2-AS6, Table 4.2. Provide certificates or other evidence that the flooring will comply.

or, Critical Radiant Flux not required if area of non-conforming products have an aggregate

surface area of not greater than 5m² within a firecell, to NZBC C/AS2-AS7, 4.17.6.a. 2. PRODUCTS Materials 2.1 CARPET TILES Refer to SELECTIONS. 2.2 ADHESIVE Refer to Jacobsen for product specific adhesives. 3. EXECUTION Conditions 3.1 INSPECTION Before starting work inspect the substrate to ensure that it will allow work of the required

standard and that fittings and fixtures, around which the carpet is to be scribed, are in place.

3.2 PROTECTION Protect adjoining work surfaces and finishes during the carpet installation. 3.3 LAYOUT Plan the general layout to: - to conform with any special pattern requirements as detailed - to maximise perimeter and cut module sizes and - subject to any specific design instructions, to ensure that tiles are laid parallel to the

longest wall. 3.4 TEMPERATURE Floor temperature: Minimum 16°C. Concrete pH: No more than 10.0. Carpet tiles: Conditioned at 16°C for a minimum of 24 hours prior to installation. 3.5 HANDLE AND STORE Keep carpet tiles dry. Protect from damage. Application - substrate preparation 3.6 PREPARING NEW WOOD PRODUCT FLOOR To be level, sanded smooth and dry with loose material and dust removed. Check for

moisture content and do not commence laying until readings for the whole area show a moisture content of:

8 - 12% for air conditioned buildings 10 - 14% for intermittently heated buildings 12 - 16% for unheated buildings Application - carpet tile laying 3.7 LAYING GENERALLY Lay in accordance with AS/NZS 2455.1, AS/NZS 2455.2 and Jacobsen installation

instructions.








3.8 ADHESIVE Prepare surfaces and apply adhesive compound strictly in accordance with the carpet tile

and adhesive manufacturer's instructions. 3.9 LAYING DIRECTION Lay in a mono direction, except where specifically instructed otherwise. 3.10 CUTTING OF TILES Cut tiles from the back, using the carpet tile manufacturer's required cutting technique. Completion 3.11 REPLACE Replace damaged or marked carpet tiles. 3.12 LEAVE On completion of the flooring installation thoroughly vacuum the finished carpet, using the

vacuuming technique recommended by the carpet tile manufacturer. Leave surfaces free of adhesive, dirt and debris and to the standard required by following procedures.

3.13 REMOVE Remove debris, unused materials and elements from the site. 3.14 PROTECT Protect completed work from damage for the period between completion of laying and

completion of the contract works. 3.15 SPECIAL PROTECTION A self-adhesive carpet protective coating is available (Poli-film PF38) which protects the

carpet surface from later trades' operations and reduces soiling from inevitable foot traffic over the finished floor. Being a clear film it provides significant protection while ensuring that site personnel remain aware they are working over a vulnerable surface.

4. SELECTIONS For further details on selections go to www.jacobsens.co.nz. 4.1 JACOBSEN CARPET TILES Location: Internal Learning Areas Brand/Type: Jacobsens Range: Pacific Colour: Karamea Lava 4.2 ADHESIVE Brand/Type: Manufacturers specification 4.3 RESERVE MATERIAL Tile Range Quantity Pacific Karamea Lava 10% of Floor area

http://www.jacobsens.co.nz/

© CIL Masterspec Aug 2016 DRAFT 6711W WATTYL TAUBMANS PAINTING EXTERIOR

6711W WATTYL TAUBMANS PAINTING EXTERIOR 1. GENERAL This section relates to the preparation of unpainted and pre-painted surfaces, and the

application of Wattyl Taubmans' exterior paint systems: - decorative paint coatings - protective paint coatings - sealers - stains - clear finishes 1.1 RELATED WORK Refer to 6700W WATTYL TAUBMANS PAINTING GENERAL for general matters related

to painting work. Refer to 6721W WATTYL TAUBMANS PAINTING INTERIOR for interior paint systems. 2. PRODUCTS Materials 2.1 PAINT TYPES GENERALLY/ THINNERS AND ADDITIVES/ FILLERS Refer to 6700W WATTYL TAUBMANS PAINTING GENERAL for product clauses. 3. EXECUTION Conditions 3.1 EXECUTION Refer to 6700W WATTYL TAUBMANS PAINTING GENERAL for execution clauses. 4. SELECTIONS 4.1 CONTROL SAMPLES Location: Wet areas, Ceilings and Soffits Substrate: Fibre cement sheeting Coating system: Exterior paint system 4.2 INSPECTION OF WORK Stage: On site sample for approval Coating system: Exterior paint system 4.3 HARDWARE Hardware for removal: Verify with architect. Exterior new unpainted walls and soffits 4.4 EXTERIOR FIBROUS CEMENT SHEETING, PLASTER, AND SOFFITS Coating type: Water based premium acrylic finish Gloss levels: Low Sheen 1st coat: Wattyl Solagard 2nd coat: Wattyl Solagard 3rd coat: Wattyl Solagard Coating type: Water based premium acrylic finish Gloss levels: Satin 1st coat: Taubmans SunProof Acrylic 2nd coat: Taubmans SunProof Acrylic 3rd coat: Taubmans SunProof Acrylic Exterior new roofs

© CIL Masterspec Aug 2016 DRAFT 6711W WATTYL TAUBMANS PAINTING EXTERIOR

4.5 EXTERIOR GALVANIZED IRON ROOFS Coating type: Water based premium acrylic Gloss levels: Satin 1st coat: Taubmans All Weather Acrylic Galvanized Iron Primer 2nd coat: Wattyl Solagard Roof 3rd coat: Wattyl Solagard Roof Coating type: Water based premium acrylic Gloss levels: Satin 1st coat: Taubmans All Weather Acrylic Galvanized Iron Primer 2nd coat: Taubmans All Weather Roof 3rd coat: Taubmans All Weather Roof Exterior new miscellaneous substrates 4.6 EXTERIOR GALVANIZED IRON OR ZINC/ALUMINIUM ALLOYS Coating type: Water based premium acrylic finish Gloss levels: Satin 1st coat: Taubmans All Weather Acrylic Galvanized Iron Primer 2nd coat: Taubmans SunProof Acrylic 3rd coat: Taubmans SunProof Acrylic Coating type: Water based premium acrylic finish Gloss levels: Low sheen 1st coat: Taubmans All Weather Acrylic Galvanized Iron Primer 2nd coat: Wattyl Solagard 3rd coat: Wattyl Solagard

© CIL Masterspec Aug 2016 DRAFT 6721W WATTYL TAUBMANS PAINTING INTERIOR

6721W WATTYL TAUBMANS PAINTING INTERIOR 1. GENERAL This section relates to the preparation of unpainted and pre-painted surfaces, and the

application of Wattyl Taubmans' interior paint systems: - decorative paint coatings - protective paint coatings - sealers - stains - clear finishes 1.1 RELATED WORK Refer to 6700W WATTYL TAUBMANS PAINTING GENERAL for general matters related

to painting work. Refer to 6711W WATTYL TAUBMANS PAINTING EXTERIOR for exterior paint systems. 2. PRODUCTS Materials 2.1 PAINT TYPES GENERALLY/ THINNERS AND ADDITIVES/ FILLERS Refer to 6700W WATTYL TAUBMANS PAINTING GENERAL for product clauses. 3. EXECUTION Conditions 3.1 EXECUTION Refer to 6700W WATTYL TAUBMANS PAINTING GENERAL for execution clauses. 4. SELECTIONS 4.1 CONTROL SAMPLES Location: Ceiling, Any walls scheduled for plasterboard Substrate: Plasterboard Coating system: Interior paint system 4.2 SUPERVISED CONTROL SAMPLES Location: Ceiling. Any walls scheduled for plasterboard. Substrate: Plasterboard Coating system: Interior paint system 4.3 INSPECTION OF WORK Stage: Before full painting Coating system: Interior paint system 4.4 HARDWARE Hardware for removal: Architect to verify. Interior new unpainted walls and ceilings 4.5 INTERIOR PAPER FACED PLASTERBOARD: WALLS Coating type: Water based premium acrylic finish - low VOC - Fire Rated to Group

1S. Gloss levels: Eggshell 1st coat: Wattyl Interior Design i.d Acrylic Sealer Undercoat 2nd coat: Wattyl Interior Design i.d 3rd coat: Wattyl Interior Design i.d


Coating type: Water based premium acrylic finish - low VOC - Fire rated to Group 1S.

Gloss levels: Eggshell 1st coat: Taubmans UnderProof Primer Sealer Undercoat 2nd coat: Taubmans LivingProof 3rd coat: Taubmans LivingProof 4.6 INTERIOR PAPER FACED PLASTERBOARD: WALLS WET SERVICE AREAS:

VENTILATED Coating type: Water based premium enamel finish - Fire Rated to Group 1S. Gloss levels: Eggshell 1st coat: Taubmans UnderProof Primer Sealer Undercoat 2nd coat: Taubmans UltraProof Acrylic Enamel 3rd coat: Taubmans UltraProof Acrylic Enamel 4.7 INTERIOR PAPER FACED PLASTERBOARD: WALLS WET SERVICE AREAS Coating type: Solvent based premium enamel finish Gloss levels: Gloss 1st coat: Taubmans UnderProof Pigmented Sealer 2nd coat: Taubmans UnderProof All Purpose Undercoat 3rd coat: Taubmans Butex Gloss Enamel 4th coat: Taubmans Butex Gloss Enamel 4.8 INTERIOR PAPER FACED PLASTERBOARD: CEILINGS Coating type: Water based premium acrylic finish - low VOC - Fire Rated to Group

1S Gloss levels: Flat 1st coat: Wattyl Interior Design i.d Acrylic Sealer Undercoat 2nd coat: Wattyl Interior Design i.d Ceiling White 3rd coat: Wattyl Interior Design i.d Ceiling White Coating type: Water based premium acrylic ceiling finish - Fire Rated to Group 1S Gloss levels: Flat 1st coat: Taubmans Underproof Primer Sealer Undercoat 2nd coat: Taubmans LivingProof Ceiling 3rd coat: Taubmans LivingProof Ceiling Coating type: Water based premium enamel finish - Fire Rated to Group 1S Gloss levels: Eggshell 1st coat: Taubmans UnderProof Primer Sealer Undercoat 2nd coat: Taubmans UltraProof Acrylic Enamel 3rd coat: Taubmans UltraProof Acrylic Enamel Coating type: Solvent based premium enamel finish Gloss levels: Gloss 1st coat: Taubmans UnderProof Pigmented Sealer 2nd coat: Taubmans Butex Enamel 3rd coat: Taubmans Butex Enamel Coating type: Solvent based premium enamel finish Gloss levels: Satin 1st coat: Taubmans UnderProof Pigmented Sealer 2nd coat: Taubmans Gaylon 3rd coat: Taubmans Gaylon 4.9 INTERIOR PAPER FACED PLASTERBOARD: CEILINGS WET SERVICE AREAS:

VENTILATED Coating type: Water based premium enamel finish - Fire Rated to Group 1S Gloss levels: Eggshell 1st coat: Taubmans UnderProof Primer Sealer Undercoat 2nd coat: Taubmans UltraProof Acrylic Enamel 3rd coat: Taubmans UltraProof Acrylic Enamel


4.10 INTERIOR PAPER FACED PLASTERBOARD: CEILINGS WET SERVICE AREAS Coating type: Solvent based premium enamel finish Gloss levels: Gloss 1st coat: Taubmans UnderProof Pigmented Sealer 2nd coat: Taubmans Butex Enamel 3rd coat: Taubmans Butex Enamel Coating type: Solvent based premium enamel finish Gloss levels: Satin 1st coat: Taubmans UnderProof Pigmented Sealer 2nd coat: Taubmans Gaylon 3rd coat: Taubmans Gaylon 4.11 INTERIOR TIMBER, PLYWOOD PANELLING, HARDBOARD, MEDIUM DENSITY

FIBREBOARD (MDF) PARTICLEBOARD: WALLS Coating type: Water based premium acrylic finish - low VOC Gloss levels: Eggshell 1st coat: Wattyl Interior Design i.d Acrylic Sealer Undercoat 2nd coat: Wattyl Interior Design i.d 3rd coat: Wattyl Interior Design i.d Coating type: Water based premium acrylic finish Gloss levels: Eggshell 1st coat: Taubmans UnderProof Primer Sealer Undercoat 2nd coat: Taubmans LivingProof 3rd coat: Taubmans LivingProof Coating type: Water based premium enamel finish Gloss levels: Eggshell 1st coat: Taubmans UnderProof Primer Sealer Undercoat 2nd coat: Taubmans UltraProof Acrylic Enamel 3rd coat: Taubmans UltraProof Acrylic Enamel Coating type: Solvent based premium enamel finish Gloss levels: Gloss 1st coat: Taubmans UnderProof Primer Sealer Undercoat 2nd coat: Taubmans Butex Enamel 3rd coat: Taubmans Butex Enamel Coating type: Solvent based premium enamel finish Gloss levels: Satin 1st coat: Taubmans UnderProof Primer Sealer Undercoat 2nd coat: Taubmans Gaylon Enamel 3rd coat: Taubmans Gaylon Enamel Coating type: Clear finishes Solvent based premium polyurethane finish Gloss levels: Satin 1st coat: Wattyl Estapol Sanding Sealer Hi-Build Clear 2nd coat: Wattyl Estapol Polyurethane Clear 3rd coat: Wattyl Estapol Polyurethane Clear Coating type: Clear finishes, premium water based finish Gloss levels: Satin 1st coat: Wattyl Estapol Speed Clear 2nd coat: Wattyl Estapol Speed Clear 3rd coat: Wattyl Estapol Speed Clear Coating type: Clear finishes Premium oiled finish Gloss levels: Matt 1st coat: Wattyl Estapol Sanding Sealer Hi-Build Clear 2nd coat: Wattyl Estapol Polyurethane Clear Matt


3rd coat: Wattyl Estapol Danish oil Interior new floors 4.12 INTERIOR CORK, TIMBER, PARQUETRY, PARTICLEBOARD: FLOORS Coating type: Clear finishes, premium moisture cured polyurethane finish Gloss levels: Gloss 1st coat: Wattyl Estapol Moisture Cured Polyurethane 2nd coat: Wattyl Estapol Moisture Cured Polyurethane 3rd coat: Wattyl Estapol Moisture Cured Polyurethane Coating type: Clear finishes, water based premium clear finish Gloss levels: Gloss 1st coat: Wattyl Estapol Easyfloor Clear 2nd coat: Wattyl Estapol Easyfloor Clear 3rd coat: Wattyl Estapol Easyfloor Clear 4.13 INTERIOR TIMBER, PARTICLEBOARD: FLOORS Coating type: Solvent based premium enamel finish Gloss levels: Not Applicable 1st coat: Taubmans Solpah Enamel Paving Paint 2nd coat: Taubmans Solpah Enamel Paving Paint 3rd coat: Taubmans Solpah Enamel Paving Paint

© CIL Masterspec Aug 2016 DRAFT 7112 RAINWATER STORAGE TANKS

7112 RAINWATER STORAGE TANKS 1. GENERAL This section relates to the installation of domestic rainwater storage tanks. Related work 1.1 RELATED SECTIONS Refer to the following: - 4311D DIMOND PROFILED METAL ROOFING for roofing material. - 7411MA MARLEY RAINWATER DISPOSAL SYSTEMS for guttering and downpipes. Documents 1.2 DOCUMENTS Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The following

documents are specifically referred to in this section: NZBC G1/AS1 Personal Hygiene NZBC G12/AS1 Water Supplies AS/NZS 1260 PVC-U pipes and fittings for drain, waste and vent application AS/NZS 1546.1 On-site domestic wastewater treatment units - septic tanks AS 2070 Plastic materials for food contact use AS/NZS 2845.1 Water supply - Mechanical backflow prevention devices - materials,

design and performance requirements AS/NZS 3000 Electrical installations AS/NZS 3500.1:2003 Plumbing and drainage - water services AS/NZS 3500.3 Plumbing and drainage - stormwater drainage AS/NZS 4020 Testing of products for use in contact with drinking water AS/NZS 4130 Polyethylene (PE) pipes for pressure applications AS/NZS 4766 Polyethylene storage tanks for water and chemicals ATS 5200.026 Technical Specification for plumbing and drainage products - Cold

water storage HB 230 Rainwater Tank Design and Installation Handbook Ministry of Health Household water supplies: The selection, operation, and maintenance

of individual household water supplies 1.3 MANUFACTURER'S DOCUMENTS The Contractor shall inform themselves of all the necessary documents and

specifications and ensure that these documents are unto date. Requirements 1.4 HEALTH REQUIREMENTS Refer to The Ministry of Health publication "Household water supplies: The selection,

operation, and maintenance of individual household water supplies" for guidance. 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS Work to be carried out by tradesmen experienced, competent and familiar with the

materials and techniques specified. Performance 1.6 PRODUCER STATEMENT Provide a producer statement from a suitably qualified person for: Design, manufacturer and installation of system. Producer statements to be in the form required by the Building Consent Authority. 1.7 DESIGN AND INSTALLATION To HB 230 Rainwater Tank Design and Installation Handbook, to AS/NZS 3500.3 and to

NZBC G1/AS1 and NZBC G12/AS1.
















1.8 TESTING OF PRODUCTS Materials used in the manufacture of rainwater tanks to be tested to AS/NZS 4020. 2. PRODUCTS Components 2.1 RAINWATER STORAGE TANK - Above ground tank manufactured from polyethylene to AS/NZS 4766 and to AS 2070. - Above ground tank manufactured from precast concrete to ATS 5200.026 Technical

Specification for plumbing and drainage products - Cold water storage tanks. - Above ground tank manufactured from precast reinforced plaster to ATS 5200.026

Technical Specification for plumbing and drainage products - Cold water storage tanks. - Underground tank manufactured from reinforced concrete. To be designed, inspected

and certified by a professional consulting engineer in accordance with the specified test method, performance requirements, pressure testing and objectives of AS/NZS 1546.1 and AS/NZS 4766.

Tanks to be fitted with a secure fitting lid to provide internal access for cleaning or inspection.

Accessories 2.2 TANK FITTINGS Fittings kit supplied with the tank for complete installation. 2.3 UPVC PIPES AND FITTINGS Unplasticised PVC pipe and fittings to AS/NZS 1260. 2.4 POLYETHYLENE PIPES AND FITTINGS High density polyethylene pipe and fittings to AS/NZS 4130. 2.5 WATER PUMP Pump designed to pressurised water supply from tank into the building. 2.6 TANK VENT Vent with insect proof stainless steel mesh fitted on top of the tank. 2.7 FIRST FLUSH WATER DIVERTER Wall mounted or underground system specific to installation. To prevent the first flow of

water from the roof entering the water storage tank. 2.8 FILTER SYSTEM Inline cartridge filter housing fitted between the first flush diverter and the inlet, or a 955

micron filter tank screen system fitted within the tank. 2.11 SEALS Uniseals for pipe connections to the top of the tank. 2.12 TANK BASE BEDDING Clean sand or concrete 100 to 150mm thick. 2.13 CONCRETE To NZS 3104: Prescribed mix 17.5 MPa: For in situ tank base and water pump pad. 3. EXECUTION Conditions 3.1 SITE ACCESS Transportation on site to the position of the tank is at the risk and responsibility of the

contractor. Make provision for manoeuvring and unloading of tank









Application - site 3.2 SITE EXCAVATION FOR ABOVE GROUND TANK Select level site, free of sharp protrusions. Form solid pad with a bed of sand or

concrete, screeded level to a minimum depth of 50mm. Extend pad 500mm pass base of tank. On a sloping site excavate fully into bank and provide 600mm clearance from the tank to the base of the cut. Do not place tank on any fill, over in ground pipes, cables or underground structures.

3.3 ABOVE GROUND TANK INSTALLATION Position tank on the prepared compacted level base. 3.4 LAYING AND JOINTING Lay in straight lines between changes of line or grade from the lower end of the drain with

sockets pointing uphill. Set each pipe true to line and grade and each joint completed before the next pipe is laid.

Application - fittings 3.5 WATER PUMP INSTALLATION Install pump on a solid base bolted down through base plate. Place weather tight

housing over the pump and secure to base. Connect to water supply and power supply 3.7 BACK FLOW PREVENTION DEVICES Install to AS/NZS 2845.1, to AS/NZS 3500.1:2003 and to NZBC G12/AS1. Application - connections 3.8 FIRST FLUSH WATER DIVERTER Install either adjacent to the tank or underground, first flush water diverter. Connect

downpipes from the roof gutter to the first flush water diverter. Connect the first flush diverter to the top of the tank. Refer to manufacturer's installation details.

3.9 FILTER INSTALLATION Install proprietary in-line filter before the inlet connection. 3.10 INLET CONNECTION Install inlet pipe into top of tank at manufacturer's designated mounting area using a

Uniseal type connection. 3.11 OUTLET CONNECTION Install pipe to manufacturer's installation details. To the outlet connect a floating arm

draw-off to deliver water from 100mm below the surface. From the base connection run a flexible hose to the pump. Install ball valve in line between base connection and water pump. Support all pipework at outlet.

3.12 OVERFLOW PIPE Install pipe to manufacturer's installation details and connect to approved discharge point

or as detailed. 3.13 PIPE SEALS Insert Uniseals in clean cut holes of the correct size. Insert Uniseal into hole with

widespread facing the pipe to be inserted. Lubricate the pipe with detergent and push through the Uniseal. Use only on top of tank connections.

3.14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION Installation to AS/NZS 3000. Allow to connect up water pump and water treatment unit to

the power supply as provided. Commissioning






3.15 POST INSTALLATION TESTING Test and commission the completed system to manufacturer's requirements and AS/NZS

3500.1:2003.16 Testing and Commissioning. At the completion and testing of the water service, check all valves and other components to confirm their correct performance.

Completion 3.16 REPLACE Replace damaged or marked elements. 3.17 LEAVE Leave work to the standard required by following procedures. 3.18 CLEAN Clean and flush out the whole installation. Remove silt and debris. 3.19 REMOVE Remove debris, unused materials and elements from the site. 4. SELECTIONS 4.1 RAINWATER STORAGE TANK Manufacturer: Contractor to specifiy Tank material: PVC Capacity: 6000 litres min First flush water diverter: contractor to specify Filter: In-line cartridge filter housing Tank vacuum kit: not required Water pump: Contractor to specify Water treatment system: UV disinfection system Filtration



© CIL Masterspec Aug 2016 DRAFT 7123 HOT & COLD WATER SYSTEM

7123 HOT & COLD WATER SYSTEM 1. GENERAL This section relates to piped potable water supply systems from the network utility supply

authority water main to designated points and appliances, the installation of hot water heating appliances, distributing piped hot water to other appliances, and the installation of valves.

1.1 RELATED WORK Refer to 7151 SANITARY FIXTURES, TAPWARE & ACCESSORIES for sanitary fixtures

and tapware selections. Documents 1.2 DOCUMENTS Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The following

documents are specifically referred to in this section: NZBC B2/AS1 Durability NZBC C/AS1-AS7 Protection from fire NZBC G4/AS1 Ventilation NZBC G12/VM1 Water supplies NZBC G12/AS1 Water supplies NZBC H1/AS1 Energy Efficiency AS 1432 Copper tubes for plumbing, gasfitting and drainage applications AS/NZS 2492 Cross Linked Polyethylene (PE-X) pipe for pressure applications AS/NZS 2537.2 Mechanical joining fittings for use with crosslinked Polyethylene (PE-

X) for pressure applications - Plastics piping systems for hot and cold water installations - Crosslinked Polyethylene (PE-X) - Fittings

AS/NZS 2642.1 Polybutylene pipe systems - Polybutylene (PB) pipe extrusion compounds

AS/NZS 2642.2 Polybutylene pipe systems - Polybutylene (PB) pipe for hot and cold water applications

AS/NZS 2642.3 Polybutylene pipe fittings - Mechanical jointing fittings for use with polybutylene (PB) pipes for hot and cold water applications

AS/NZS 2845.1 Water supply - Backflow prevention devices - Materials, design and performance requirements

AS 2845.3 Water supply - Backflow prevention devices - Field testing and maintenance

AS/NZS 3500.1: 2003 Plumbing and drainage - Water services AS/NZS 3500.4: 2003 Plumbing and drainage - Heated water services AS/NZS 3500.5 Plumbing and drainage - Housing installations NZS 3501 Specification for copper tubes for water, gas and sanitation AS 3688 Water supply - Metallic fittings and end connectors AS/NZS 4130 Polyethylene (PE) pipes for pressure applications NZS 4305 Energy efficiency domestic type hot water systems NZS 4602 Low pressure copper thermal storage electric water heaters NZS 4607 Installation of thermal storage electric water heaters: valve vented

Systems NZS 4617 Tempering (3-port mixing) valves AS/NZS 5601.1: 2010 Gas installations - general installations DIN 8077 Polypropylene (PP) Pipes - PP-H, PP-B, PP-R, PP-RCT - Dimensions DIN 8078 Polypropylene (PP) Pipes - PP-H, PP-B, PP-R, PP-RCT - General

quality requirements and testing. Gas (Safety and Measurement) Regulations 2010 Plumbers, Gasfitters and Drainlayers Act 2006 NZ Backflow Testing Standard: NZ Backflow Testing Standard 2011, Field testing of

backflow prevention devices and verification of air gaps



























1.3 MANUFACTURER'S DOCUMENTS The Contractor shall inform themselves of all Manufacturer's documents and

specifications and ensure all documents are current and up to date. Requirements 1.4 QUALIFICATIONS Plumbers to be experienced competent workers, familiar with the materials and the

techniques specified. Carry out all work under the direct supervision of a certifying plumber under the Plumbers, Gasfitters and Drainlayers Act 2006.

1.5 PIPEWORK LAYOUTS Submit a layout for architects approval. 1.7 WARRANTY Provide warranty for: 5 years: For the supply and installation of the plumbing system and fixtures - Provide the warranty in the standard form in the general section 1237WA WARRANTY

AGREEMENT. - Commence the warranty from the date of practical completion of the contract works. Performance 1.8 TESTING - TO NZBC G12/AS1 Test to NZBC G12/AS1, 7.5, Watertightness, for hot and cold water. - Test to a pressure of 1500 kpa for period not less than 15 minutes. Confirm the timing before carrying out any tests. Supply potable water and the apparatus

needed. Slowly fill service pipes with water to exclude air. Test and ensure there is no

measurable loss of pressure for the minimum period. Slowly fill distribution pipes with water to exclude air. Ensure that with draw-off taps closed the system must remain water-tight.

2. PRODUCTS Materials 2.1 PVC-U PIPE Complete with fittings and accessories brand matched to the pipe manufacturer's

requirements with durability to NZBC B2/AS1, Table 1 and NZBC G12/AS1, Table 1. 2.2 POLYETHYLENE PIPE To AS/NZS 4130 Series 1 complete with fittings and accessories brand matched to the

pipe manufacturer's requirements with durability to NZBC B2/AS1, table 1 and NZBC G12/ AS1, table1.

2.3 BACKFLOW PREVENTION DEVICES Provide backflow prevention devices to AS/NZS 2845.1 where it is possible for water or

contaminants to backflow into the potable water supply. Refer to NZBC G12/ AS1 3.4 Backflow protection, and table 2, Selection of Backflow Protection.

3. EXECUTION 3.1 EXECUTION GENERALLY Generally carry out the whole of this work and tests to NZBC G12/VM1 or G12/AS1. 3.2 HANDLE AND STORE Handle and store pipes, fittings and accessories to avoid damage. Store on site, under

cover on a clean level area, stacked to eliminate movement and away from work in progress.













Store tapware in a shelved, dry and securely locked area. Retain tapware in the manufacturer's original packaging, complete with all fixings and installation instructions. Label each unit separately with its space/fixture number to match.

3.3 CORE HOLES AND SLEEVES Review location and fit core holes and sleeves as needed throughout the structure in

conjunction with the boxing, reinforcing and placing of concrete. Strip core holes and make good after installation of pipework.

3.4 CONCEAL Conceal pipework within the fabric of the building unless detailed otherwise. Satin finish

chrome plate exposed work, complete with matching ferrule at the surface penetration. 3.5 CORROSION Separate all metals subject to electrolytic action from each other and from treated timber,

concrete and other lime substances by space, painting of surfaces, taping, or separator strips.

3.6 THERMAL MOVEMENT Accommodate movement in pipes resulting from temperature change by the layout of the

pipe runs, by expansion joints and by sleeving through penetrations. 3.7 PIPE SIZE Flow rates to each outlet to be no less than those given in NZBC G12/VM1 or NZBC

G12/AS1, table 3, Acceptable flow rates to sanitary fixtures. Pipe size as determined in NZBC G12/AS1, table 4, Tempering valve and nominal pipe diameters.

3.8 ELECTROLYTIC ACTION Avoid electrolytic action by eliminating contact or continuity of water between dissimilar

metals. 3.9 EXCAVATE Excavate for the water main to a firm, even trench base in straight runs. Allow to backfill. Application - Jointing 3.10 JOINTING PVC-U PIPE Solvent welded joints using spigots and sockets, flanged joints and seal ring compression

joints to NZBC G12/AS1. 3.11 JOINTING POLYETHYLENE PIPE Seal ring compression joints and electrofusion to NZBC G12/AS1. Application - Pipework installation 3.12 POTABLE WATER SUPPLY PIPEWORK INSTALLATION From connection point, run pipes complete with all fittings, support and fixing, joins and

install to manufacturers specifications. Size the pipes and branches in straight runs to deliver the acceptable flow rate to NZBC G12/VM1 or NZBC G12/AS1, table 3, Acceptable flow rates to sanitary fixtures at each outlet. Allow for the expected concurrent use of adjoining fixtures and size the piping layout to eliminate loss of pressure at any point by simultaneous draw-off. Pipework support spacing to be firmly fixed and buffered to eliminate noise and hammer, with preformed tee-connection take-offs and branches, with machine made 3 diameter bends, complete with necessary valves and fittings. Conceal pipework and pressure test before the wall linings are fixed.

3.14 EQUIPOTENTIAL BONDING Earth metallic water supply pipe and metallic sanitary fixtures to NZBC G12/AS1, 9.0. 3.15 IN-LINE FILTER Install an in-line filter immediately adjacent to the main isolating valve at the point of entry

to the building, in an accessible position to allow for easy cleaning.











3.16 PENETRATIONS Provide and fit collars and escutcheon plates to match the pipework at all penetrations

through constructions. Application - Hot water systems 3.31 INSTALLING BACKFLOW PREVENTION DEVICE Provide and install backflow prevention device as near as practicable to the potential

source of contamination, and in an accessible position for maintenance and testing to AS 2845.3 or NZ Backflow Testing Standard.

Completion 3.32 LABEL Label all pipework with permanent adhesive markers at 3 metre minimum intervals. 3.33 CLEAN IN-LINE FILTER Clean all in-line filters on completion of works. 3.34 REPLACE Replace damaged or marked elements. 3.35 LEAVE Leave work to the standard required by following procedures. 3.36 REMOVE Remove debris, unused materials and elements from the site. 4. SELECTIONS Pipework 4.1 PVC-U PIPE Manufacturer: Contrator to specify Brand: Approved brand 4.2 POLYETHYLENE PIPE Manufacturer: Contractor to specify Brand: Approved brand Size: Nominal Bore / OD Size (mm) 4.3 EXPOSED PIPES Type: Contractor to specify Accessories: Contractor to specify Manufacturer: Approved brand Brand: Approved brand Hot water systems 4.12 FLOOR/ZONE ISOLATING VALVES Location: Contractor to specify Brand/type: Approved brand 4.16 BACKFLOW PREVENTION DEVICE Location: Approved location Brand/type: Approved brand 4.17 IN-LINE FILTER Location: Approved location Brand/type: Approved brand 4.18 HEADER TANKS Maker/brand: Contractor to Specify



Capacity: 6000 litres Size: Approved size

© CIL Masterspec Aug 2016 DRAFT 7151 SANITARY FIXTURES, TAPWARE & ACCESSORIES

7151 SANITARY FIXTURES, TAPWARE & ACCESSORIES 1. GENERAL This section relates to the supply and installation of sanitary fixtures, tapware and

sanitary accessories. 1.1 RELATED WORK Refer to 7120 or 7123 HOT AND COLD WATER SYSTEM for hot water cylinders. Refer to 7420 or 7421 SANITARY SYSTEMS for the supply and fitting of waste disposal

pipework Refer to the electrical section/s for electrical connection of accessories. Documents 1.2 DOCUMENTS Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The following

documents are specifically referred to in this section: NZBC E3/AS1 Internal moisture NZBC F2/AS1 Hazardous building materials NZBC G1/AS1 Personal hygiene NZBC G12/VM1 Water supplies NZBC G12/AS1 Water supplies NZBC G13/AS1 Foul water NZBC G13/AS3 Plumbing and drainage AS/NZS 1730 Washbasins AS/NZS 2023 Baths for ablutionary purposes AS/NZS 3500.1:2003 Plumbing and drainage - water services AS/NZS 3500.2:2003 Plumbing and drainage - sanitary plumbing and drainage AS/NZS 3662 Performance of showers for bathing NZS 4223.3 Glazing in buildings - Human impact safety requirements Plumbers, Gasfitters and Drainlayers Act 2006 Documents listed above and cited in the clauses that follow are part of this specification.


1.3 MANUFACTURER'S DOCUMENTS The Contractor shall inform themselves of all manufacturers documents and

specifications and ensure that they are current to date. Requirements 1.4 QUALIFICATIONS Plumbers to be experienced competent workers, familiar with the materials and the

techniques specified. Carry out all work under the direct supervision of a Certifying Plumber under the Plumbers, Gasfitters and Drainlayers Act 2006.

1.5 SAMPLES Submit samples on request of nominated tapware, along with the relevant manufacturers'

technical literature for review. 1.6 SUPPLIER A specialist in the supply of tapware, and employing experienced architectural

representatives available to assist during the course of the installation. 1.7 SUBMIT A SUPPLIER'S SCHEDULE 2. PRODUCTS

















2.1 SANITARY FIXTURES Refer to SELECTIONS for product selection. 2.2 TAPWARE Refer to SELECTIONS for product selection. 3. EXECUTION Conditions - sanitary fixtures 3.1 DELIVERY Only deliver to the site fixtures or fittings that can be immediately unloaded into suitable

storage or be placed for direct installation. 3.2 STORAGE AND HANDLING Take delivery of and store components complete with protective casings and coverings in

areas that are enclosed, clean and dry and where no work is being done. Remove protection only to the extent that will allow installation.

3.3 QUALITY STANDARDS INCLUDING NZBC G13/AS1 Installation work to comply with NZBC G1/AS1, NZBC G12/VM1, NZBC G12/AS1, NZBC

G13/AS1 and the fixture manufacturer's requirements. 3.4 QUALITY STANDARDS INCLUDING AS/NZS 3500.2 Installation work to comply with NZBC G1/AS1, NZBC G12/VM1, NZBC G12/AS1,

AS/NZS 3500.2:2003, as modified by NZBC G13/AS3, and the fixture manufacturer's requirements.

3.5 SUBSTRATE Ensure substrate and fixings will allow work of the specified standard. 3.6 CO-ORDINATION Do not proceed if the points of supply and drainage services do not match the points of

the fixtures without force or distortion. 3.7 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS INCLUDING NZBC G13/AS1 Install to NZBC G1/AS1, NZBC G12/VM1, NZBC G12/AS1, NZBC G13/AS1, NZBC

E3/AS1 and to the fixture manufacturer's installation requirements for each component. Carry out preparatory and assembly work, including connections to supply and drainage services and the application of slurries and sealants in sequence.

Seal between all sanitary fixtures and wall linings, fixtures and the tops they are in, the tops and wall linings, to NZBC E3/AS1, 3.2.2. Fixtures include baths, basins, tubs or sinks, Tops include, vanities, bath surrounds, sink benches, etc, and there upstands.

3.8 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS INCLUDING AS/NZS 3500.2 Install to NZBC G1/AS1, NZBC G12/VM1, NZBC G12/AS1, NZBC E3/AS1, AS/NZS

3500.2:2003, as modified by NZBC G13/AS3, and to the fixture manufacturer's installation requirements for each component. Carry out preparatory and assembly work, including connections to supply and drainage services and the application of slurries and sealants in sequence.

Seal between all sanitary fixtures and wall linings, fixtures and the tops they are in, the tops and wall linings, to NZBC E3/AS1, 3.2.2. Fixtures include baths, basins, tubs or sinks, Tops include, vanities, bath surrounds, sink benches, etc, and there upstands.

3.9 PROVIDE SUPPORT Confirm fixing points needed for each unit and provide solid blocking at each fixing

bracket location. Conditions - tapware



























3.10 RETAIN Retain tapware in the manufacturer's original packaging and ensure that units are

complete with fixings and installation instructions. Label each unit separately with its fitting name and space number.

3.11 STORE Store tapware packages in a shelved, dry and securely locked area. Provide supervision

when the secure area is unlocked and packages and cartons are being distributed; signing off each package from the schedule as released.

Installation - sanitary fixtures 3.12 INSTALLING TOILET PAN Carry out preparatory and assembly work, including connections to supply and drainage

services and the application of slurries/bedding and sealants in sequence. Fit the toilet pan in position, plumb, level, flush and rigid without stressing the attachment points of the component. Fixings to be corrosive resistant. Fit seat.

3.13 INSTALLING CISTERNS Fit firmly in place and connect the specified cisterns from the supply services through the

flush pipes to the relative fixtures in the positions as detailed all plumb and level. Installation - Basins 3.14 INSTALLING WASHBASINS Install to NZBC G1/AS1, AS/NZS 1730. Set basins firmly to walls or vanities as detailed

and to comply with NZBC E3/AS1. Connect to supply and drains through trap to the drainage system.

Installation - Miscellaneous 3.15 INSTALLING STAINLESS STEEL FIXTURES Carry out preparatory work and fit elements in position plumb, level, flush and rigid

without stressing the attachment points in sequence. Connect to supply and drainage services.

3.16 INSTALLING SANITARY FIXTURES & ACCESSORIES - PEOPLE WITH DISABILITIES Install fixtures to NZBC G1/AS1: Part 3 and Part 4 and to comply with the relevant layouts

shown in Figures 5,6,7,8 and 9. Provide number of facilities in accordance with NZBC G1/AS1 tables 1, and 2.

Application - tapware 3.17 GENERAL To AS/NZS 3500.1 dated 2003 and in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements.

Maintain safe water temperatures to comply with NZBC G12/AS1. Completion 3.18 REPLACE Replace damaged or marked elements. 3.19 PROTECTIVE COVERINGS Leave fixtures, fittings and accessories clean and unblemished with stickers and

protective coverings removed, with supply and drainage connections and all parts fully operating and working. Leave the whole of this work free of blemishes, undamaged and to the standard of finish required for following work.

3.20 REMOVE Remove debris, unused materials and elements from the site. 4. SELECTIONS










4.1 TOILET Location: North side of the building Toilet pan: Approved model and brand Trap type: S type Toilet seat: Yes Flush system: Approved system Isolating valve: Yes 4.2 BASIN Location: All toilets Basin: Approved brand and model Basin taps/mixer: Approved brand and model Waste/plug: Plug & chain Trap: P trap Isolating valves: Yes

© CIL Masterspec Aug 2016 DRAFT 7411MA MARLEY RAINWATER DISPOSAL SYSTEMS

7411MA MARLEY RAINWATER DISPOSAL SYSTEMS 1. GENERAL This section relates to Marley rainwater disposal systems. It includes; - uPVC spouting and downpipes - Stratus Design Series® spouting and downpipes 1.1 RELATED WORK Refer to the following: - 4311D DIMOND PROFILED METAL ROOFING for roofing. - 4821 FLASHINGS for flashings. - 7112 RAINWATER STORAGE TANKS for collection point. Documents 1.2 DOCUMENTS Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The following

documents are specifically referred to in this section: NZBC E1/AS1 Surface water NZBC E2/AS1 External moisture AS/NZS 4020 Testing of products for use in contact with drinking water 1.3 MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER DOCUMENTS Manufacturer's and supplier's documents relating to this part of the work: Marley Rainwater Sales Brochures Marley Product Catalogue Marley - Spouting and Downpipe DIY Installation Guide Marley Stratus Design Series® Sales brochure Marley Stratus Design Series® - Design and installation guide Manufacturer/supplier contact details Company: Marley New Zealand Limited Web: www.marley.co.nz Email: [email protected] Telephone: 0800 MARLEY (0800 627 539) WARRANTIES 1.4 WARRANTY - MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER Provide a material manufacturer/supplier Guarantee: 15 years: Against defects in material and manufacture - Commence the guarantee from the date of purchase - Refer to Marley NZ Guarantee available at www.marley.co.nz Refer to the general section 1237 WARRANTIES for additional requirements. 1.5 WARRANTY - INSTALLER/APPLICATOR Provide an installer/applicator warranty: 5 years: For installation - When installed to Marley's published installation instructions at time of installation. - Provide this warranty on the installer/applicator standard form. - Workmanship warranty to be issued separately by the installer - Commence the warranty from the date of practical completion of the contract works. Refer to the general section 1237 WARRANTIES for additional requirements. Requirements




http://www.marley.co.nz/



1.6 QUALIFICATIONS Installers to be experienced, competent workers familiar with the materials and

techniques specified. Performance 1.8 TEST Test the completed Marley rainwater disposal system with water to ensure, spouting is

laid to correct fall, that both spouting and downpipes are unobstructed and that no ponding occurs in spouting.

1.9 DESIGN Layout, falls and capacity of spouting to falls and the size and position of downpipes to

comply with NZBC E1/AS1. 1.10 DRINKING WATER All Marley spouting and downpipe systems are tested for the collection of rainwater and

drinking purposes to AS/NZS 4020. Care should be taken to ensure water is not contaminated by other sources.

2. PRODUCTS Materials 2.1 UPVC WHITE SPOUTING/DOWNPIPES Marley uPVC spouting and downpipe systems in white uPVC. Products 2.2 MARLEY SPOUTING Marley spouting system, complete with Marley fittings including jointers, brackets,

expansion outlets, end caps and corners supplied by Marley. Spouting to be sized to comply with NZBC E1/AS1 and installed to NZBC E2/AS1 8.1.6, Gutters. Refer to SELECTIONS for type.

2.3 MARLEY DOWNPIPES Marley downpipe system, complete with Marley fittings including bends, clips, joiners and

junctions supplied by Marley. Refer to SELECTIONS for type. Components 2.4 MARLEY MCS SOLVENT WELDING CEMENT Only Marley MCS® Solvent Welding Cement to be used in conjunction with the spouting

and downpipe systems to manufacturer's instructions. Colour match to spouting or downpipes.

2.5 EXPANSION OUTLET/DROPPERS Marley expansion outlet/droppers, compatible with spouting and downpipe profile. 2.6 SCREW FIXINGS - TIMBER FASCIA Stainless steel, grade 304 finish, self tapping screws 6g x 20mm pan head or wafer head. 2.7 NAIL FIXINGS - TIMBER FASCIA Marley galvanised nails (MCNAILS). 2.8 FABRICATION Special items can be fabricated by Marley to specific dimensions on request including but

not limited to angle flats, angle rakes, outlets and adaptors. 3. EXECUTION Conditions






3.1 HANDLING AND STORAGE Handle and store Marley downpipes, spouting and accessories to avoid damage. Store

on site under cover, on a clean level area, stacked to eliminate movement and away from work in progress. Store out of direct sunlight. Refer to Marley installation guides for further details.

3.2 SUBSTRATE Check that fascias, barges or cladding are level and true to line and face and will allow

work of the required standard without distortion to the product alignment. Do not proceed until they are up to standard.

3.3 THERMAL MOVEMENT Make adequate provision in the jointing of the spouting for thermal movement in the

length of the spouting by using Marley expansion joiners and/or expansion outlets. Refer to Marley expansion technical information.

3.4 ENVIRONMENTAL Marley Spouting and Downpipe systems are suitable for most environmental conditions

and will never rust, rot or corrode. 3.5 RECYCLING All Marley manufactured spouting and downpipe systems are 100% recyclable and

Marley operates recycling programs with industry suppliers where uPVC pipes can be returned from site for recycling at Marley.

Application 3.6 INSTALL MARLEY SPOUTING Install to Marley's current published installation instructions available at

www.marley.co.nz. Ensure only Marley MCS® Solvent Welding Cement to be used in conjunction with the spouting systems to manufacturer's instructions. From high points fix brackets true-to-line to give a fall of 5mm every 10 metres to outlets. Set spouting brackets at 500mm centres; reduce to 300mm spacing for high wind zones or areas subject to occasional snowfalls. Make adequate provision for thermal movement.

3.7 INSTALL MARLEY DOWNPIPES Install to Marley's current published installation instructions available at

www.marley.co.nz. Ensure that all joints are sealed properly using Marley MCS® Solvent Welding Cement. Assemble downpipes, solvent cement jointed complete, fit to outlets, fix with pipe clips every 1.5 metres, fix pipe clips with 304 stainless steel screws, plumb and discharging into the stormwater gully or pipe inlet to the Marley required practice.

Completion 3.8 REPLACE Replace damaged or marked elements. 3.9 LEAVE Leave the whole of this work discharging completely and freely into the stormwater

system and free of all debris. Leave work to the standard required by following procedures.

3.10 REMOVE Remove debris, unused materials and elements from the site. 4. SELECTIONS For further details on selections go to www.marley.co.nz uPVC system 4.1 MARLEY UPVC SPOUTING Manufacturer: Marley Profile/type: Magnum® Spouting





Cross section: 14300mm² Colour: Grey Bracket type: External Magnum® 4.2 MARLEY UPVC DOWNPIPES Manufacturer: Marley Profile/type: Magnum® Size: 110mm Colour: Grey Bracket type: Stand off bracket Miscellaneous items 4.3 MARLEY LEAFSLIDE Manufacturer: Marley Size: To fit 80mm downpipe Material: uPVC Colour: White, Grey Friars, Ironsand, Titanium or Copper

© CIL Masterspec Aug 2016 DRAFT 7421 SANITARY SYSTEMS

7421 SANITARY SYSTEMS 1. GENERAL This section relates to above ground gravity flow sanitary systems; - for foul water - from sanitary fixtures to first underground drain connection - including system wastes, floor wastes, floor waste gullies, traps, vents and valves - with associated components and accessories to make the system work 1.1 RELATED SECTIONS Refer to 7151 SANITARY FIXTURES, TAPWARE & ACCESSORIES for sanitary fixtures. Refer to 7123 HOT AND COLD WATER SYSTEM for potable water systems. Refer to 7142 GREYWATER SYSTEMS for greywater systems. Documents 1.2 DOCUMENTS REFERRED TO Documents referred to in this section are: NZBC G1/AS1 Personal hygiene NZBC G12/AS1 Water supplies NZBC G13/AS1 Foul water - Sanitary plumbing NZBC G13/AS3 Foul water - Plumbing and drainage AS 2887 Plastic waste fittings AS/NZS 1260 PVC-U pipes and fittings for drain, waste and vent applications AS/NZS 2032 Installation of PVC pipe systems AS/NZS 3500.2:2003 Plumbing and drainage - Sanitary plumbing and drainage BS EN 12524 Corrosion protection of metals. Electrodeposited coatings of nickel,

nickel plus chromium, copper plus nickel and copper plus nickel plus chromium

Plumbers, Gasfitters and Drainlayers Act 2006 Documents listed above and cited in the clauses that follow are part of this specification.


1.3 MANUFACTURER'S DOCUMENTS The Contractor shall inform themselves of all Manufacturer's documents and

specifications and ensure that all documents are current and up to date. Requirements 1.4 QUALIFICATIONS Plumbers to be experienced competent workers, familiar with the materials and the

techniques specified. Carry out all work under the direct supervision of a certifying plumber under the Plumbers, Gasfitters and Drainlayers Act 2006.

1.5 PIPEWORK LAYOUTS The shall submit a layout for Architects approval. 1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS Supply maintenance manual information to requirements set out in the 1239

OPERATION & MAINTENANCE section. Performance 1.7 TESTING Confirm timing before carrying out any tests. Supply potable water and apparatus

needed. Seal openings below the section being tested and slowly raise the water level to a minimum of 3 metres above the highest point of the section. Do not exceed 6 metres of head above the lowest point. Carry out and record a visual inspection that each joint showed no evidence of leaks.











2. PRODUCTS Materials 2.1 PVC-U WASTE PIPES AND TRAPS To AS/NZS 1260, complete with fittings and accessories to the pipe manufacturer's

requirements, all brand matched. 2.2 PVC-U VENT PIPE To AS/NZS 1260, complete with fittings and accessories to the pipe manufacturer's

requirements and all brand matched. Components 2.3 PROTECTIVE TAPE Plasticised PVC tape system with primer, mastic fixing and outer coating. 3. EXECUTION Conditions 3.1 EXECUTION GENERALLY - NZBC G13/AS1 Carry out this work and complete all tests to NZBC G1/AS1: 2.0, 3.0 and G13/AS1. 3.2 ELECTROLYTIC ACTION Avoid electrolytic action by eliminating actual contact or continuity of water between

dissimilar metals. 3.3 HANDLE AND STORE Handle and store pipes, fittings and accessories to avoid damage. Store on site under

cover on a clean level area, stacked to eliminate movement and away from work in progress.

3.4 SETTING OUT Set out location of all stacks, discharge pipes, fittings and vent pipes and the

completeness of their discharge into the drainage system. 3.5 CORE HOLES AND SLEEVES Fit core holes and sleeves as needed throughout the structure in conjunction with the

boxing, reinforcing and placing of concrete. Sleeve diameter to be 25mm larger than outside diameter of pipe accommodated. Strip core holes and make good after installation of pipework.

3.6 PIPE ACCESS Fit and fix stacks, wastes and pipes in ducts independent of all other services so they are

easily replaceable for their full length. Wrap or tape pipes buried in concrete. 3.7 FITTINGS ACCESS Fit and fix traps and wastes to enable access for cleaning and for maintaining the total

system. 3.8 CONFIRM LOCATIONS Unless the location and height are clearly delineated on the drawings, confirm installation

height and plan locations of sanitary fittings before commencing the piping installation. 3.9 TRAPS AND WASTES Conceal traps and wastes in the fabric of the building unless detailed otherwise. Fit and

fix satin chrome plated exposed pipes, traps and wastes unless detailed otherwise. Refer to 7151 SANITARY FIXTURES, TAPWARE & ACCESSORIES for locations and

types of traps.





3.10 CORROSION Separate metals subject to electrolytic action from each other and from treated timber,

concrete and other lime substances by space, painting of surfaces, taping, or separator strips.

Application - jointing 3.11 JOINTING PVC-U PIPE Prime and solvent weld joints using spigots and sockets, flanged joints and seal ring

compression joints to AS/NZS 2032. Application - fixing 3.12 THERMAL MOVEMENT Accommodate longitudinal movement in pipes resulting from temperature changes.

Incorporate expansion joints in copper and PVC-U pipes. Install PVC pipes to AS/NZS 2032. Take particular care to allow for movement at horizontal take-off locations from stacks.

3.13 TRAPS AND FIXTURE DISCHARGE PIPES - NZBC G13/AS1 Size traps and pipes as required for each fixture or appliance. Establish the developed

length of waste pipes. Vent and allow access for cleaning as required. Follow the most direct line with the least number of bends to NZBC G13/AS1: Foul water sanitary plumbing, table 4, Discharge unit loading for stacks and graded discharge pipes and NZBC G13/AS1, table 7, Distance between supports.

3.14 DISCHARGE STACKS AND VENTS - NZBC G13/AS1 Size stacks and vents to NZBC G13/AS1, table 2, Fixture discharge pipe sizes and

discharge units and NZBC G13/AS1, table 6, Vent pipe sizes. Extend up past the highest branch to form a discharge stack vent terminating to NZBC G13/AS1, figure 12 and finishing at the base with a 45 degree bend. Support system to NZBC G13/AS1, table 7, Distances between supports.

3.15 FLASH ROOF PENETRATIONS Flash or arrange for roofer to flash all penetrations to NZBC E2/AS1. For profiled metal roofs, fit proprietary EPDM pipe collar flashings to NZBC E2/AS1,

8.4.17 Roof Penetrations, and manufacturer's requirements. Completion 3.16 REPLACE Replace damaged or marked elements. 3.17 LEAVE Leave the whole of this work free of blemishes, undamaged and to the standard of finish

required for following procedures. 3.18 REMOVE Remove debris, unused materials and elements from site. 4. SELECTIONS 4.1 SANITARY SYSTEMS - PVC-U WASTE PIPES AND TRAPS Location: Throughout Manufacturer/Brand: Approved brand 4.2 SANITARY SYSTEMS - PVC-U VENT PIPE Manufacturer: Throughout Brand: Approved brand 4.3 SANITARY SYSTEMS - PROTECTIVE TAPE Brand: Throughout Width: Contractor to specify












© CIL Masterspec Aug 2016 DRAFT 7701 ELECTRICAL BASIC

7701 ELECTRICAL BASIC 1. GENERAL This section relates to the wiring for domestic and small scale commercial installations,

including: - power - lighting - electrical automation - security system - complete with componentry - electrically-powered fittings - fire rated sealers, liners and accessories 1.1 RELATED WORK Clause deleted. 1.2 ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS Refer to the general section 1232 INTERPRETATION & DEFINITIONS for abbreviations

and definitions used throughout the specification. The following abbreviations apply specifically to this section: CFL compact fluorescent lamp ELV extra low voltage GLS general lighting service IP international (ingress) protection classification LCD liquid crystal display LED light emitting diode MCB miniature circuit breaker NUO Network Utility Operator PCB printed circuit board PIR passive infrared RCBO residual current-operated circuit breaker with over current protection RCCB residual current-operated circuit breakers RCD residual current device SIA security integration architecture TPS tough plastic sheathed TCF Telecommunications Carriers' Forum Documents 1.3 DOCUMENTS Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The following

documents are specifically referred to in this section: NZBC E2/AS1 External moisture NZBC F6/AS1 Visibility in escape routes NZBC F7/AS1 Warning systems NZBC G4/AS1 Ventilation NZBC G9/AS1 Electricity AS/NZS 1125 Conductors in insulated electric cables and flexible cord AS/NZS 1768 Lightning protection AS/NZS 2201.1 Intruder alarm systems - Client's premises - Design, installation,

commissioning and maintenance AS 2293.1 Emergency escape lighting and exit signs for buildings - System

design, installation and operation AS 2293.3 Emergency escape lighting and exit signs for buildings - Emergency

escape luminaires and exit signs AS/NZS 3000 Electrical installations (known as the Australian/New Zealand Wiring

Rules) AS/NZS 3008.1.2 Electrical installations - Selection of cables - Cables for alternating

voltages up to and including 0.6/1 kV - Typical New Zealand installation conditions












AS/NZS 3100 Approval and test specification-general requirements for electrical equipment

AS/NZS 3112 Approval and test specification - Plugs and socket-outlets AS/NZS 3113 Approval and test specification - Ceiling roses AS/NZS 3190 Approval and test specification - Residual current devices (current-

operated earth-leakage devices) AS/NZS 3350.1 Safety of household and similar electrical appliances - General

requirements AS/NZS 3439.3 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies - Particular

requirements for low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies intended to be installed in places where unskilled persons have access for their use - Distribution boards

AS 3786 Smoke alarms NZS 4514 Interconnected smoke alarms for houses AS/NZS 5000.2 Electric cables - Polymeric insulated - for working voltages up to and

including 450/750v AS/NZS 60598.2.2:2001 Luminaires - Particular requirements - Recessed

luminaires IEC 61643 Components for low voltage surge protection devices Electricity (Safety) Regulations 2010 (Reprint as at 4 April 2016) TCF Premises Wiring Code of Practice 2011 1.4 MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER DOCUMENTS The Contractor shall inform themselves of all manufacturer's documents and

specifications and ensure that they are up to date and current. Warranties 1.5 WARRANTY Warrant the complete electrical installation under normal environmental and use

conditions against failure of materials and execution. 5 year: Warranty period Refer to the general section for the required form of 1237WA WARRANTY AGREEMENT

and details of when completed warranty must be submitted. Requirements 1.6 COMPLY Comply with the Electricity (Safety) Regulations 2010, AS/NZS 3000, AS/NZS 3008.1.2

and TCF Premises Wiring Code of Practice for listed and prescribed work and with the utility network operator's requirements. Apply for the service connection. Arrange for the required inspections of listed work. Pay all fees.

1.7 QUALIFICATIONS Carry out work under the supervision of an electrical licensed supervisor. 1.8 QUALIFICATIONS - SECURITY SYSTEM Installation by an installer licensed under the Private Investigators and Security Guards

Act. Installation of all security equipment to comply with AS/NZS 2201.1 Intruder alarm systems - Client's premises - Design, installation, commissioning and maintenance.

1.9 SAFETY OF INSTALLATION - DESIGN BY ELECTRICAL ENGINEER Before installation work commences obtain from the electrical engineer a Certified

Design. The Certified Design is to comply with the Electrical (Safety) Regulations (2010), regulation 58.

1.10 SAFETY OF INSTALLATION - DESIGN BY ELECTRICIAN Before installation work commences provide a Certified Design. The Certified Design is

to comply with the Electrical (Safety) Regulations (2010), regulations 58. It must be signed by the designer of the installation.
















1.11 ELECTRICAL CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE Supply a certificate of compliance (CoC) to the owner, and if required the NUO, as

required by the Electricity (Safety) Regulations (2010), prior to connection. - Arrange for the NUO to inspect before the meter installation, listed work inspection,

polarity check and supply becoming live. - Arrange for an inspector to inspect as required by regulation 70. 1.12 ELECTRICAL SAFETY CERTIFICATE Provide an Electrical Safety Certificate (ESC), as required by the Electrical (Safety)

Regulations 2010, to the owner and when required the BCA. To be provided no later than 20 working days after connection and prior to Practical Completion.

1.13 SUBMIT SCHEDULE OF ALL PRODUCTS The Contractor shall submit for approval a schedule of all products for approval by the

Architect. 2. PRODUCTS 2.1 MAINS SUPPLY, SINGLE PHASE Tough plastic sheathed neutral screened cable to AS/NZS 4961 and AS/NZS 3008.1.2,

with a minimum rating of 60 amps per phase. Include pilot cable where required by network utility company.

2.2 CABLES Tough plastic sheathed copper conductors to AS/NZS 5000.2, stranded above 1.0mm²,

and to AS/NZS 3008.1.2. Minimum sizes as below. Increase sizes if the method of installation, thermal insulation, cable length or load will reduce the cable rating below that of the MCB rating, or produce an excessive voltage drop.

Lighting circuits: Domestic: 1.5mm² on 10 amp MCBs Lighting circuits: Commercial: 1.5mm² on 16 amp MCBs Power circuits: 2.5mm² on 16 amp MCBs for domestic and unenclosed or unfilled

cavity construction 2.5mm² on 16 amp MCBs for domestic insulated construction, or filled

cavity 2.5mm² on 20 amp MCBs for unenclosed or unfilled cavity

construction 2.5mm² on 16 amp MCBs for insulated construction, or filled cavity, or

lengths over 30 metres Hot water cylinder circuits: Single phase: 2.5mm² on 20 amp MCBs Range/oven/hob circuits: Single phase: 6mm² on 32 amp MCBs

Heat resistant cable for final connections to all heated appliances, and high temperature

cable in ambient conditions that may be above 35°C. 2.3 METER BOX Proprietary manufactured, zinc plated powder coated metal case, or ABS plastic, with

glazed panel door, weatherproof where mounted outdoors, and complete with meter mounting, main switch and fuse.

2.4 DISTRIBUTION BOARD Flush surface mount boards manufactured to AS/NZS 3439.3 and installed in accordance

with AS/NZS 3000. Manufactured from engineering grade resin with a glow wire rating of 850°C, complete with neutral and earth busbars, and insulated comb phase bar. Distribution boards to have 20% spare capacity for future additions and alterations.

2.5 CIRCUIT PROTECTION General requirements including main switch 63A or 100A. Residual current protection

30mA, ensure RCCBs' meet Type A and comply with AS/NZS 3190. MCBs to 4.5kA or 6kA rated.

2.6 WALL BOXES Standard grid size or equivalent to be manufactured from plastic or metal, with 2 or more

gang size to be metal with steel inserts for accessory securing screws. Screw fixed.








2.7 SWITCH UNITS Single pole switches to be 16 amp minimum rated, double pole or intermediate to be 16

amp minimum rated. All switches to be 230 volt a.c. polycarbonate flushplate units. Refer to drawings/schedules for number of switches per unit, dimmer units, neon (indicator or toggle) units and 2 way units.

2.8 SWITCHED SOCKET UNITS 10 amp, 230 volt flat 3 pin socket outlets fitted with safety shutters and manufactured to

AS/NZS 3100, AS/NZS 3112 and AS/NZS 3113, single or multi gang as detailed. 2.10 SURGE PROTECTION Protection for the homes appliances with IEC 61643 Class ll surge protection devices

fitted to the switchboard. For variable electronic equipment fit IEC 61643 Class lll surge protection to switched socket outlets.

2.11 CEILING ROSES White plastic mounting base with screwed cover, manufactured to AS/NZS 3113.

Terminal type. Cylindrical section TPS for suspended fittings. 2.12 BATTEN HOLDERS Standard white plastic bayonet cap, with cap angled where wall mounted. Brass liners. 2.13 LIGHT FITTINGS Fluorescent and High Intensity Discharge fittings with low loss control gear and power

factor corrected to 0.95 minimum. Control gear suitable for dimming if this is required. All fittings complete with lamps; Incandescent GLS lamps pearl, coiled-coil 230v rated, bayonet cap; Fluorescent triphosphor 2700K; CFL; halogen ELV 12v dichroic reflector with cover glass unless detailed otherwise; integral/non-integral LEDs, reflectors, lenses, heatsinks and drivers - 3,000K to 4,000K, CRI >80, L70.

2.16 OUTDOOR SWITCHES & SOCKETS Using materials with superior UV protection, impact strength, and addition chemical

resistance when compared with interior polycarbonate fittings. Weather protected, switches to IP56 minimum, and sockets to IP53 minimum. Sockets fitted with safety shutters behind socket pins, and all products able to be padlocked off or on.

Security system 2.17 CONTROL PANEL Control panel system with a minimum of one installer code, one master code, 6 zones

minimum and 6 user codes. The installer to select codes to suit installation. 2.20 CABLING Security alarm wiring to NZS/AS 1125 for cables. Security alarm wiring to be multi stranded and not single stranded, minimum 0.5mm². 2.22 COMMUNICATIONS Digital dialler to be built into the PCB of all control panels, with the options for both

monitoring and remote dial in windows based software. Digital dialler to comply with all the industry standard communication formats including contact I.D and SIA, and NZ Telepermit certification.

Remote software able to upload / download programming changes and or history events and change status of the security alarm with the ability to be turned off if required.

Fire rated sealers and liners 2.23 FIRE RATED SEALERS AND LINERS Sealants, collars, wraps, expanding foam, mortars and liners, used to seal around pipe,

conduit and sleeve penetrations through fire and acoustic walls and floors. Refer to SELECTIONS for type.






3. EXECUTION 3.1 MAIN SUPPLY Lay underground mains to the NUO requirements. Excavate trench, install cable and

marker tape and backfill. 3.2 METER BOX Fit to meter box manufacturer's and Electricity Retailer's requirements. Recess into

external wall in sheltered area and flash to weatherproof to NZBC E2/AS1 fig 69. Arrange for meter installation and connection.

3.3 DISTRIBUTION BOARD Fit to AS/NZS 3000 and board manufacturer's requirements. Recess into wall or surface

mount and ensure fire containment properties of the enclosure are maintained. 3.4 CIRCUIT PROTECTION Install MCBs at distribution board to AS/NZS3000 to protect each final sub circuit. 3.5 EARTH BONDS Bond together and to earth all plumbing fittings not adequately isolated, to AS/NZS 3000,

the Electricity (Safety) Regulations 2010 and the fitting manufacturer's requirements. 3.6 MAIN EARTH Provide a plastic toby box to contain and protect the earth electrode. Fix the connecting

earth wiring closely and securely against wall surfaces. 3.7 EARTH LEAKAGE PROTECTION Install RCD protection to AS/NZS 3000. 3.8 RCD - DOMESTIC INSTALLATIONS Install 30mA RCD protection at the switchboard for all final sub circuits to control outlets

and lighting except for fixed or stationary cooking equipment, to AS/NZS 3000. 3.9 RCD - SPECIFIC INSTALLATIONS Install 30mA RCDs at the distribution board. Install fixed wired RCD protected outlets (SRCD) in the following areas: - Wet areas: bathrooms, laundries, kitchens. - Near pools and water features. - Where intended for use with cleaning equipment. - Hand-held tools subject to movement in use, i.e. work-shops, garages. 3.10 SET-OUT The position of outlets and equipment shown on drawings is indicative of requirements.

Confirm documents and site conditions are not in conflict with other services or features. Resolve conflicts and discrepancies before proceeding with work affected. Confirm on site the exact location, disposition and mounting heights of all outlets, fittings, equipment, penetrations, and use of exposed wiring. Fix outlet items level, plumb and in line.

3.11 CABLING Install wiring systems to AS/NZS 3000. All cabling run concealed. No TPS cable laid

directly in concrete. Locate holes in timber framing for the passage of cables at the centre line of the timber member. Install cable in conduits where required to pass through concrete or underground. In walls run cabling horizontally and vertically in straight lines. In ceilings either run cabling along ceiling framing or attached to catenary wires. Clip cabling to ceiling framing/catenary wires.

3.12 CABLING CIRCUITS Install all circuits with the appropriately rated cable and circuit protection. Install with a

maximum of 8 light switch units or 4 double or single switched socket units on any circuit. Minimum 2 lighting circuits per floor. Separate circuits for all electric heating appliances. Kitchen sockets to be on at least two different circuits.








3.13 WALL BOXES Mount flush in cavity construction size to fit products selected. Fix vertically mounted wall

boxes to studs. Screw fix horizontally mounted switched socket outlet wall boxes to solid blocking or nogs. Fix switch panel wall boxes to solid blocking.

3.14 SWITCH AND SOCKET UNITS Fit all single and double switch units, all sockets to the following heights (to the centre of

the unit) unless shown otherwise on the drawings. Switch Units: 1000mm above finished floor Socket Units: 150mm above work benches 400mm above finished floor Mount light switches and switch socket outlets vertically and socket units horizontally.

Label all switch units that control electrical equipment or special lighting circuits by colour filled engraving on the switch. Use proprietary engraved switch mechanisms where applicable.

3.15 ISOLATING SWITCHES Locate isolating switches in positions as confirmed by the owner, when not specifically

shown on the drawings. 3.16 LIGHT FITTINGS Install light fittings in locations and at heights specified and confirmed by the owner, in

accordance with the fitting manufacturer's requirements. 3.17 EXTRA LOW VOLTAGE LIGHTING Use electronic, transformers (halogen) or drivers (LED) for ELV lamps, one

transformer/driver per lamp. Locate to manufacturer's requirements and as close as practicable to the lamp. Ensure transformers/drivers and rear of light fittings are adequately ventilated and appropriately clear of any building elements, to AS/NZS 3000.

3.18 RECESSED LIGHT FITTINGS - CLEARANCE TO INSULATION Non-residential applications; The clearance between insulation and recessed downlights; - Leave 100mm gap to AS/NZS 3000, figure 4.9 - Provide larger gaps where required by the downlight manufacturer Residential applications; - Ensure new recessed downlights are one of the new classes classified in AS/NZS

60598.2.2; CA 80, CA 135, IC and IC - F. - Classification type CA 80, CA 135, to AS/NZS 60598.2.2; insulation can abut the sides


over the top of the downlight - Provide larger gaps where required by the light manufacturer - In a retrofit situation where the insulation is non-approved or unknown, ensure 100mm

clearance from the insulation to AS/NZS 3000, figure 4.9. 3.21 SURGE PROTECTION Install surge protection devices to manufacturer's requirements and in accordance with

AS/NZS 3000 and AS/NZS 1768. When fitting IEC 61643 Class ll protection at the switchboard, protect the device by a dedicated MCB.

3.22 ELECTRIC POWERED FITTINGS AND EQUIPMENT Install and wire fittings and equipment to individual fittings and equipment manufacturer's

requirements. Refer to the drawings for required layouts and locations for equipment. Refer to SELECTIONS for schedules of fittings.

3.24 OUTDOOR/EXTERIOR SERVICES Install all wiring systems in accordance with AS/NZS 3000 and in accordance with the

manufacturer's recommendations: Provide circuits and connections for exterior installations, including ELV 12/24 Volt path

lighting and electronic irrigation systems. Refer to drawings for connection points.











Where underground, ensure appropriate protection, such as thickness of sheathing, conduit, depth of cabling, and proximity to other services.

Use the appropriate rated fittings for power control and power supply. Weather protected switches to IP56, and sockets to IP53 as a minimum. Install to manufacturer's specifications using recommended fittings and sealants to maintain the products integrity.

Earth leakage protection to be provided for in areas where there is increased risk to human safety in the form of either RCDs at the distribution board, or socket outlet. RCDs are recommended for visible awareness of protection.

3.25 LABELLING Include label under each controller, switch and circuit breaker on distribution boards.

Include a warning notice if light dimmers are used in the installation. List the rating of each circuit.

Security system 3.27 SEAL ALL PENETRATIONS Seal all penetrations, including in and around conduits and sleeves, in accordance with

manufacturer's instructions. For fire and/or acoustic rated elements, maintain the rating with the seal systems.

3.28 PROVIDE CABLE SLEEVES Provide PVC sleeves formed from pipe sections, unless fire and/or acoustic systems

require sleeves for other building elements and/or different material for the sleeve. Completion 3.29 COMPLETION Leave installation operating correctly, with equipment clean and operational. 4. SELECTIONS Materials 4.1 SELECTIONS - FITTINGS AND HARDWARE Confirm selections of all outlet fittings and hardware with the owner in writing before

ordering. 4.2 METER BOX Contractor to submit schedule 4.3 DISTRIBUTION BOARD Contractor to submit schedule for approval of the following:

Location: See Drawings Brand / type: MCB: RCCB: RCBO: Surge protectors: Modular contactors: Main switch: Timers

4.5 FIRE RATED SEALERS AND LINERS Location: Box penetrations Manufacturer: Submit schedule Brand/type: Submit schedule Outlets - fittings 4.6 INTERIOR OUTLETS Contractor to submit schedule for approval of the following:

Item Brand / type


Switch / socket outlets: Coverplate colour: Switch module colour:

Item Brand / type Timer switch: Push button switch: Symbol switch: PIR sensor switch: Toggle switch:

Item - RCD Brand / type Socket outlet: USB outlet: Safety switch:

4.7 INTERNAL LIGHT FITTINGS Contractor to submit schedule identifying the following:

Fitting Brand / type Recessed ceiling lights: Fluorescent lights: Strip lights: Emergency lights: Transformers: LED Drivers:

4.9 EXTERIOR SWITCHES AND SOCKETS Contractor to submit schedule for approval of the following:

Item Brand / type Weatherproof socket outlets: Timer switch: Weatherproof switch: Daylight switch:

4.10 EXTERNAL LIGHT FITTINGS Contractor to submit schedule for approval of the following:

Fitting Brand / type Recessed lights: Security lights: Security light sensors: Transformers: LED Drivers:

Attachment 4 – Technical Specifications

Documents

Transcript of Attachment 4 – Technical Specifications